Operation Manual
Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte, Marita Sladek This PDF provides improved access for vision-impaired users. Please note that due to the complexity and number of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
Table of Contents 10 10 10 11 12 13 Introduction Platform-Independent Documentation About the Documentation Conventions Key Commands Getting Into the Details 14 14 22 24 25 Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Setting Up MIDI Connecting a Synchronizer Setting Up Video 26 26 32 34 34 35 36 36 36 43 VST Connections VST Connections Window Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Adding Input and Output Busses Adding Child Busses (Cubase Pro only) Presets for Input and Output Busses Adding Group and FX
Table of Contents 214 214 216 Range Editing Creating a Selection Range Editing Selection Ranges 219 219 221 227 228 229 230 231 231 232 233 235 Playback and Transport Transport Panel Transport Menu Transport Left and Right Locators Setting the Project Cursor Position Auto-Scroll Time Formats Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Punch In and Punch Out Metronome Chase 237 237 238 Virtual Keyboard Recording MIDI With the Virtual Keyboard Virtual Keyboard Options 239 239 243 245 250 256 257 Recording Basic Recording
Table of Contents 434 434 435 436 438 439 440 443 445 447 Silence Stereo Flip Time Stretch Applying Plug-Ins (Cubase Pro only) Offline Process History Freeze Edits Detect Silence Spectrum Analyzer Statistics Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms 450 450 453 Rendering to Audio Render Tracks Render Selection 456 458 463 463 464 467 467 469 473 476 Sample Editor Toolbar Info Line Overview Line Sample Editor Inspector Ruler Waveform Display Range Editing Regions List Snap Point 478 478 481 481 484 484
Table of Contents 651 External Instruments (Cubase Pro only) 652 652 652 655 Installing and Managing Plug-ins Installing VST plug-ins Plug-in Manager Compiling a New Effects Collection 656 656 660 661 Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls Connecting Quick Controls with Remote Controllers Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls Quick Controls and Automatable Parameters 663 663 665 667 671 672 678 Remote controlling Cubase Setting Up Operations The Generic Remote device Tr
Table of Contents 923 925 926 931 933 934 935 935 936 937 937 939 Tempo Track Editor Tempo Track Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo Beat Calculator Tempo Detection (Cubase Pro only) Exporting a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) Importing a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) Process Tempo (Cubase Pro only) Process Bars (Cubase Pro only) Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Set Definition From Tempo 941 941 943 Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Window Overview Editing tracks 952 953 954
Table of Contents 1130 1130 1132 1132 Printing from the Score Editor Exporting pages as image files Working order Force update 1181 1182 1183 Creating crossed voicings Automatic polyphonic voicing – Merge All Staves Converting voices to tracks – Extract Voices 1133 1133 1133 1133 1134 1134 1135 Transcribing MIDI recordings About this chapter About transcription Getting the parts ready Preparing parts for score printout Staff settings Situations which require additional techniques Inserting Display Qua
Table of Contents 1276 1276 1276 1278 1279 1281 1281 1283 1283 1285 1286 1287 1290 1291 1291 1293 1294 Designing your score: additional techniques About this chapter Layout settings Staff size Hiding/showing objects Coloring notes Multiple rests Editing existing bar lines Creating upbeats Setting the number of bars across the page Moving bar lines Dragging staves Adding brackets and braces Displaying the Chord Symbols from the Chord Track Auto Layout Reset Layout Breaking bar lines 1297 1297 1297 1298 13
Introduction The documentation covers the following Steinberg products: Cubase Pro and Cubase Artist. Functions that are only available in Cubase Pro and not in Cubase Artist are clearly indicated. The screenshots are taken from Cubase Pro. Platform-Independent Documentation The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and Mac OS. Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated.
Introduction Conventions HALion Sonic SE Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument HALion Sonic SE. Groove Agent SE Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Groove Agent SE. MIDI Devices Describes how to manage MIDI Devices and device panels. VST Connect SE (Cubase Pro only) Describes how to work with the VST Connect SE features. Conventions In our documentation, we use typographical and markup elements to structure information.
Introduction Key Commands Markup Bold text indicates the name of a menu, option, function, dialog, window, etc. EXAMPLE To open the Functions menu, click Functions Menu in the top right corner of the MixConsole. If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates a sequence of different menus to open. EXAMPLE Select Project > Add Track.
Getting Into the Details
Setting Up Your System To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system. Setting Up Audio IMPORTANT Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections. Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup If you only use a stereo input and output from Cubase, you can connect your audio hardware, for example, the inputs of your audio card or your audio interface, directly to the input source and the outputs to a power amplifier and speaker.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio hardware that is available to you. Therefore, the following sections can only serve as examples. How to connect your equipment, that is, whether to use digital or analog connections also depends on your setup. About Recording Levels and Inputs When you connect your equipment, make sure that the impedance and levels of the audio sources and inputs are matched. Using the correct type of input is important to avoid distortion or noisy recordings.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Setting Up Audio Hardware PREREQUISITE You have selected a driver for your audio hardware. PROCEDURE 1. Select Devices > Devices Setup. 2. In the Devices list to the left, select the driver to open the driver settings for your audio hardware. 3. Do one of the following to open the control panel for your audio hardware: • On Windows, click Control Panel. • On Mac OS, click Open Config App. This button is available only for some hardware products.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio The following options are available: ASIO Driver Allows you to select a driver. Release Driver when Application is in Background Releases the driver and allows other applications to play back via your audio hardware even though Cubase is running. Input Latency Shows the input latency of the audio hardware. Output Latency Shows the output latency of the audio hardware. ASIO-Guard Latency Shows the ASIO-Guard latency.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Disk Preload Allows you to specify how many seconds of audio are preloaded into RAM prior to starting playback. This allows for smooth playback. Adjust for Record Latency If this is activated, the plug-in latencies are taken to account during recording. Record Shift Allows you to shift the recordings by the specified value. ASIO Driver Setup This section allows you to set up your ASIO driver.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Externally Clocked Activate this option, if you use an external clock source. Direct Monitoring Activate this option to monitor via your audio hardware and to control it from Cubase. Ports Reset Allows you to reset all port names and visibilities. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Using Several Audio Applications Simultaneously You can allow other applications to play back via your audio hardware even though Cubase is running. PREREQUISITE Other audio applications accessing the audio hardware are set to release the audio driver. PROCEDURE 1. Select Devices > Devices Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select the VST Audio System page. 3. Activate Release Driver when Application is in Background.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Setting Up Input and Output Ports Once you have selected the driver for your audio hardware and have set it up, you must specify which inputs and outputs to use. PREREQUISITE You have selected a driver for your audio hardware. PROCEDURE 1. Select Devices > Devices Setup. 2. In the Devices list to the left, select the driver to open the driver settings for your audio hardware. 3. Make your settings. 4. Click OK.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up MIDI Setting Up MIDI IMPORTANT Turn off all equipment before making any connections. PROCEDURE 1. Connect your MIDI equipment (keyboard, MIDI interface, etc.) to your computer. 2. Install the drivers for your MIDI equipment. RESULT You can use your MIDI equipment in Cubase. MIDI Connections To play back and record MIDI data from your MIDI device, for example, a MIDI keyboard, you need to connect the MIDI ports.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up MIDI NOTE If you have a MIDI remote control unit connected, make sure to deactivate the In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ option for that MIDI input. This avoids accidental recording of data from the remote control when All MIDI Inputs is selected as input for a MIDI track. 4. Click OK. RESULT When you select All MIDI Inputs on the Input Routing menu of a MIDI track in the Inspector, the MIDI track uses all MIDI inputs that you specified in the MIDI Port Setup.
Setting Up Your System Connecting a Synchronizer Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate MIDI ports. State The state of the MIDI port. In 'All MIDI Inputs' Allows you to record MIDI data from all MIDI inputs. NOTE Deactivate this option, if you use remote control devices. The following options are available: Use System Timestamp for 'Windows MIDI' Inputs Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems such as shifted notes.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Video Setting Up Video Cubase plays back video files in a number of formats, such as AVI, QuickTime, or MPEG. QuickTime is used as the playback engine. Which formats can be played back depends on the video codecs that are installed on your system. There are several ways to play back video, for example, without any special hardware, using a FireWire port, or using dedicated video cards.
VST Connections To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the VST Connections window. Here, you can also set up group and FX channels, external effects, external instruments, and the Control Room (Cubase Pro only). The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, for example your surround speaker setup, and on the projects that you use.
VST Connections VST Connections Window Bus Name Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it. Speakers Indicates the speaker configuration (mono, stereo, surround formats (Cubase Pro only)) of each bus. Audio Device Shows the selected ASIO driver. Device Port Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus. Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only the first port that is used by this bus is visible.
VST Connections VST Connections Window The following columns are available for the bus list: Bus Name Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it. Speakers Indicates the speaker configuration (mono, stereo, surround formats (Cubase Pro only)) of each bus. Output Routing Lets you select the output routing for the corresponding bus. External FX Tab (Cubase Pro only) This tab allows you to create send effect or return busses.
VST Connections VST Connections Window Device Port Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus. Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only the first port that is used by this bus is visible. The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name. Up to 3 bus assignments can be displayed in this way.
VST Connections VST Connections Window The following options are available above the bus list: +- All Expands/Collapses all busses in the bus list. Add External Instrument Opens the Add External Instrument dialog, where you can configure a new external instrument. Favorites Lets you store external instrument configurations as favorites that you can recall. The following columns are available for the bus list: Bus Name Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it.
VST Connections VST Connections Window NOTE The latency of the audio hardware is handled automatically by Cubase. Return Gain Allows you to adjust the level of the signal coming in from the external instrument. NOTE Excessive output levels from an external effect device can cause clipping in the audio hardware. The Return Gain setting cannot be used to compensate for this. You must lower the output level on the effect device instead.
VST Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Presets Opens the Presets menu, where you can select bus configuration presets. Store allows you to save a bus configuration as preset. Delete selected preset. deletes the Control Room Activates/Deactivates the Control Room. Control Room Mixer Opens the Control Room Mixer window, where you can set up the Control Room. Configuration Displays the selected channel configuration.
VST Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs NOTE If you open a project that was created on another computer and the port names do not match or the port configuration is not the same, the Missing Ports dialog appears. This allows you to manually re-route ports that are used in the project to ports that are available on your computer. PROCEDURE 1. Select Devices > Device Setup. 2. On the VST Audio System page, make sure that the correct driver for your audio hardware is selected.
VST Connections Adding Input and Output Busses 3. Click Control Panel. 4. Activate/Deactivate ports. 5. Click OK. Adding Input and Output Busses PROCEDURE 1. In the VST Connections dialog, click the Inputs or Outputs tab. 2. Click Add Bus. 3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus. 4. Optional: Enter a name for the bus. If you do not specify a name, the bus is named according to the channel configuration. 5. Click Add Bus. The new bus is added to the bus list. 6.
VST Connections Presets for Input and Output Busses 2. Click Add Child Bus and select a channel configuration. RESULT The child bus is created and can be used for routing. Presets for Input and Output Busses For input and output bus configurations, you can use different kinds of presets. • A number of standard bus configurations. • Automatically created presets tailored to your specific hardware configuration.
VST Connections Adding Group and FX Channels RESULT The preset is deleted. Adding Group and FX Channels Group channels and FX channels allow you to group bus configurations. Adding group and FX channels in the VST Connections window is identical to creating group channel tracks or FX channel tracks in the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. In the VST Connections dialog, click the Group/FX tab. 2. Do one of the following: • To create a group channel, click Add Group. • To create an FX channel, click Add FX.
VST Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) An external effect requires at least one input and one output or input/output pairs for stereo effects in addition to the input/output ports that you use for recording and monitoring. • To use external instruments, a MIDI interface must be connected to your computer. • Audio hardware with low-latency drivers.
VST Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) You can also select MIDI Devices > Create Device and create a new MIDI device association. NOTE Delay compensation is only applied for the effect when you use MIDI devices. 5. Click OK. This adds a new external FX bus. 6. Click in the Device Port column for the left and right ports of the send bus and select the outputs of your audio hardware that you want to use. 7.
VST Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) RESULT The external FX bus is loaded into the effect slot. A parameter window opens, showing the Delay, Send Gain, and Return Gain settings for the external FX bus. You can adjust these settings while playing back. The audio signal from the channel is sent to the outputs on the audio hardware, through your external effect device, and back to the program via the inputs on the audio hardware.
VST Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) Return Gain Allows you to adjust the return gain for the external effect. Setting Up External Instruments PROCEDURE 1. In the VST Connections window, click the External Instruments tab. 2. Click Add External Instrument. 3. In the Add External Instrument dialog, enter a name for the external instrument and specify the number of required mono and/or stereo returns.
VST Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) RESULT The external instrument is added to the VST instruments list. A parameter window for the external instrument opens. This can either be the device window that allows you to create a generic device panel, an OPT editor window, or a default editor. External Instruments Parameter Window This window allows you to make delay and gain settings for the selected external instrument.
VST Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) Saving External Instrument and Effect Configurations as Favorites You can save external instruments and external effects as favorites. Favorites are device configurations that you can recall. They also allow you to save different configurations for the same device, for example, a multi-effect board or an effect that provides both a mono and a stereo mode.
VST Connections Editing the Bus Configurations NOTE Busses that are set up for external instruments or external effects are saved globally, that is, for your particular computer setup. Editing the Bus Configurations After you have set up all the required busses for a project you can edit the names and change port assignments. The bus configuration is saved with the project. Removing Busses PROCEDURE • In the VST Connections window, right-click a bus in the list and select Remove Bus.
VST Connections Editing the Bus Configurations NOTE You can begin renaming from any position in the list. The renaming starts from the bus where you edit the name, goes down the list to the bottom, and then continues from the top until all selected busses have been renamed. Identifying Exclusive Port Assignments For certain channel types, the port assignment is exclusive.
Project Window The Project window provides an overview of the project, and allows you to navigate and perform large scale editing. Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or create a new project. • To open a project, select File > Open. • To create a new project, select File > New Project. The Project window is divided into several zones: 1.
Project Window Showing/Hiding Zones The project zone shows the toolbar, the track list with the tracks, the event display with the parts and events of the project, and the Project window ruler. On the toolbar, you can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the transport. 3. Lower Zone The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, and the MixConsole. 4. Right Zone The right zone shows the VST Instruments rack and the MediaBay rack.
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Track List on page 51 Event Display on page 52 Global Track Controls on page 52 Ruler on page 54 Status Line on page 55 Info Line on page 56 Overview Line on page 56 Transport on page 57 Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings and functions. • To show/hide tools, open the toolbar context menu by right-clicking in an empty area of the toolbar and activate the tools that you want to display.
Project Window Project Zone Allows you to minimize the latency effects of the delay compensation. Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Media & MixConsole Windows These buttons allow you to open or close the MediaBay, the Pool, the MixConsole, and the Control Room Mixer (Cubase Pro only). Track Visibility Configurations Allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching between different visibility setups.
Project Window Project Zone Arranger Controls Shows the controls for the arranger track. Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Markers Allows you to set and locate marker positions. Tool Buttons Shows the buttons for editing in the project zone. Color Menu Allows you to define the project colors. Nudge Palette Allows you to nudge or trim events or parts. Project Root Key Allows you to change the root key of the project.
Project Window Project Zone Allows you to specify a grid type for the snap function. This setting only has effect if Snap Type is set to one of the grid options. Quantize Allows you to move recorded audio or MIDI to musical relevant positions. Performance Meter Shows the meters for ASIO time usage and hard disk transfer load. Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.
Project Window Project Zone • To activate the toolbox function, open the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Tools and activate Pop-up Toolbox on Right-Click. • To open the toolbox, right-click in the event display or editor. If Pop-up Toolbox on Right-Click is deactivated, the context menu opens. • To open the context menu instead of the toolbox, press any modifier key and right-click in the event display or editor.
Project Window Project Zone Video, marker, or arranger tracks are automatically moved to the upper track list. All other track types are moved to the lower track list. • To move any type of track from the lower track list to the upper and vice versa, rightclick it in the track list and select Toggle Track List from the context menu. • To resize the upper part of the track list, click and drag the divider between the track list sections.
Project Window Project Zone 1. Filter Track Types Allows you to determine which track types are shown in the track list. 2. Number of Visible Tracks Displays how many tracks are hidden. Click this, to show all tracks that are filtered out with the Track Visibility. NOTE If the track was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Tracks that are hidden using Filter Track Types are not shown. 3. Add Track Allows you to add tracks to the track list. 4.
Project Window Project Zone 3. In the selector, select the track and press Return. RESULT The selector closes and the track is selected in the track list. NOTE If the track was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Tracks that are hidden using Filter Track Types are not shown. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline and the display format of the project. Initially, the Project window ruler uses the display format that is specified in the Project Setup dialog.
Project Window Project Zone Bars+Beats Bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default, there are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To change this, open the Preferences dialog, select MIDI, and adjust the MIDI Display Resolution setting. Seconds Hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. Timecode Hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The number of frames per second (fps) is set in the Project Setup dialog with the Frame Rate pop-up menu.
Project Window Project Zone Record Format Displays the sample rate and the bit resolution used for recording. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. Project Frame Rate Displays the frame rate used in the project. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. Project Pan Law Displays the current pan law setting. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. Info Line The info line shows information about the event or part that you selected in the project zone.
Project Window Project Zone In the overview line, events and parts are displayed as boxes. A rectangle indicates the section of the project that is displayed in the event display. • To zoom the event display in or out horizontally, resize the rectangle by dragging the edges. • To navigate to another section of the event display, drag the rectangle to the left or right, or click in the upper part of the overview.
Project Window Project Zone Performance Meter Shows the meters for ASIO time usage and hard disk transfer load. Locators Allows you to go to the left or right locator position, and to set the left and right locator position numerically. Punch Points Allows you to set the punch in and the punch out points that determine the record start and stop stop positions. Main Transport Shows the main transport controls. Time Displays Shows the time display options.
Project Window Left Zone Input/Output Activity Allows you to monitor the MIDI input/output signals, the audio input/output signals, and allows you to control the output level. RELATED LINKS Common Record Modes on page 242 Audio Record Modes on page 247 MIDI Record Modes on page 254 Left/Right Toolbar Divider on page 50 Left Zone The left zone of the Project window allows you to display the Inspector and the Visibility. To show/hide the left zone, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Inspector on page 60 Visibility on page 65 Inspector The Inspector allows you to show controls and parameters for either the selected track in the track list or the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. If the Inspector tab is activated at the top of the left zone, the bottom of the left zone features two tabs: Track and Editor. • Click the Track tab to open the Track Inspector for the selected track.
Project Window Left Zone Opening the Track Inspector The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the selected track in the track list. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone. 2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab. RESULT The Track Inspector for the selected track in the track list is opened. If more than one track is selected, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown.
Project Window Left Zone PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone. 2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Editor tab. RESULT The Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone is opened. NOTE The Editor Inspector only contains information if the lower zone shows an editor. Otherwise, it is empty.
Project Window Left Zone PROCEDURE 1. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Editor tab. 2. Select an option from the Switch Score Editor Inspector Content pop-up menu. RESULT The selected Inspector is shown. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Inspector on page 733 The Symbols Inspector on page 1212 Inspector Sections The Track Inspector and the Editor Inspector are divided into a number of sections that each contain different controls for the track, event or part.
Project Window Left Zone • To open the Track Inspector Settings dialog, click Setup Inspector Inspector, and from the pop-up menu select Setup. • To open the Editor Inspector Settings dialog, click Setup Inspector Inspector, and from the pop-up menu select Setup. in the Track in the Editor Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector.
Project Window Left Zone Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections. Move Up/Move Down Allows you to change the order of an item in the list of visible sections. Presets Allows you to save Inspector section settings as presets. Reset All Allows you to restore the default Inspector section settings.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Track Visibility for your project is shown. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 66 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks The Track Visibility shows a list of all tracks of your project. This list allows you to show and hide individual tracks. • To show or hide a track in the track list, click the dot to the left of the track name. • To activate or deactivate several tracks at the same time, select them and press Return.
Project Window Left Zone NOTE • The channels of the MixConsole in the lower zone are updated accordingly. This means that if you hide a track with the Track Visibility, the channel corresponding to that track is also hidden in the lower zone MixConsole. • If you want to synchronize the track and the channel visibility in a separate MixConsole window, you must use the Sync Track/Channel Visibility function.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MixConsole is opened in the lower zone, and the Zones Visibility for the lower zone MixConsole is shown in the left zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the Lower Zone MixConsole on page 71 Lower Zone The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen systems and notebooks, for example.
Project Window Lower Zone To close the lower zone, click Close Lower Zone to the left of the tabs. RELATED LINKS Opening Chord Pads on page 70 Opening the Lower Zone MixConsole on page 71 Opening Sampler Control on page 71 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 72 Setting up the Lower Zone In the lower zone, the tabs MixConsole, Editor, Sampler Control, and Chord Tabs are shown. You can change the order of these tabs, and you can hide tabs that you do not need. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Lower Zone NOTE In the Presets section of this dialog you can also save a preset of your tab configuration. RESULT The tabs in the lower zone are shown according to your configuration. Opening Chord Pads Chord Pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone zone. on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower 2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Chord Pads tab. RESULT The Chord Pads are opened.
Project Window Lower Zone Opening the Lower Zone MixConsole The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures from within the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone zone. on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower 2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the MixConsole tab. RESULT The MixConsole is opened in the lower zone.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT Sampler Control is opened. RELATED LINKS Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks on page 530 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone The Editor in the lower zone allows you to perform event editing procedures from within the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT Depending on your event or part selection the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor, the Sample Editor or one of the MIDI Editors. NOTE To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu. NOTE If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor. NOTE This selection is temporary. Next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is used. Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors You can link cursors and zoom factors of the project zone and the Key Editor, Drum Editor, and the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone. NOTE The ruler display format setting is not affected by this function.
Project Window Right Zone If you activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors, the cursors and zoom factors are linked in the event displays of the project zone and the lower zone. This is useful if you edit in both zones and you want to keep the same position in view. NOTE In the Key Commands dialog in the Edit category, you can assign a key command for this.
Project Window Right Zone RELATED LINKS VST Instruments in the Right Zone on page 76 MediaBay in the Right Zone on page 79 Opening the VST Instruments in the Right Zone You can show VST Instruments in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to add and edit VST instruments, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone Zone. on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right 2.
Project Window Right Zone • Track Shows the associated VST Instrument for an instrument track. • Rack Shows a VST instrument. The following controls are available: 1. Add Track Instrument Opens the Add Instrument Track dialog that allows you to select an instrument and add an instrument track that is associated to this instrument. 2. Find Instruments Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument. 3.
Project Window Right Zone Opening the MediaBay in the Right Zone You can show the MediaBay in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to see the context of your tracks and events when you drag audio events, MIDI parts, or instrument presets into the event display. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone Zone. on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right 2. At the top of the right zone, click the MediaBay tab. RESULT The MediaBay is opened in the right zone of the Project window.
Project Window Right Zone MediaBay in the Right Zone The MediaBay in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI parts or instrument presets from into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any installed Steinberg content sets. The MediaBay is divided into several sections: 1. Search Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute. 2. Home Allows you to go back to the initial tiles view. 3.
Project Window Keyboard Focus in the Project Window Keyboard Focus in the Project Window The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by using key commands. To make sure that a key command has effect on a specific zone, you must make sure that this zone has the keyboard focus.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window NOTE The project zone and the lower zone have separate toolbars and info lines. If you use the toolbar or the info line for one of these zones, the corresponding zone automatically gets the focus. RELATED LINKS Appearance–Colors on page 1053 Zooming in the Project Window You can zoom in the Project window according to the standard zoom techniques.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window RELATED LINKS Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors on page 74 Zoom Submenu The Zoom submenu contains options for zooming in the Project window. • To open the Zoom submenu, select Edit > Zoom. The following options are available: Zoom In/Out Zooms in/out one step, centering on the project cursor. Zoom Full Zooms out so that the whole project is visible.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window The upper part of the menu lists the zoom presets. • To save the current zoom setting as a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Add. In the Type In Preset Name dialog that opens, type in a name for the preset and click OK. • To select and apply a preset, select it from the Zoom Presets pop-up menu. • To zoom out so that the whole project is visible, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Zoom Full.
Project Window Snap Function The middle part of the Zoom Presets pop-up menu lists any cycle markers that you have added to the project. NOTE Only the cycle markers that you create in the current project are available on the menu. If you select a cycle marker, the event display is zoomed in to encompass the marker area. You cannot edit the cycle markers in the Zoom Presets pop-up menu. RELATED LINKS Markers Window on page 307 Zoom History You can undo and redo zoom operations.
Project Window Snap Function NOTE You can also set the snap point in the Sample Editor. RELATED LINKS Adjusting the Snap Point on page 477 Snap to Zero Crossing When splitting and sizing audio events, sudden amplitude changes can cause pops and clicks. To avoid this, you can activate Snap to Zero Crossing to snap to points where the amplitude is zero. • To activate Snap to Zero Crossing, activate Snap to Zero Crossing on the toolbar.
Project Window Snap Function For example, if an event starts at the position 3.04.01, snap is set to Grid Relative and the Grid Type pop-up menu is set to Bar, you can move the event in steps of one bar to the positions 4.04.01, 5.04.01, and so on. NOTE This only applies when dragging existing events or parts. When you create new events or parts this snap type works like Grid. Events If this option is activated, the start and end positions of other events and parts become magnetic.
Project Window Cross-Hair Cursor Cross-Hair Cursor The cross-hair cursor is displayed when working in the Project window and in the editors, facilitating navigation and editing, especially when arranging large projects. • To set up the cross-hair cursor, open the Preferences dialog and select Editing > Tools. You can set up the colors for the line and the mask of the cross-hair cursor, and define its width.
Project Window Edit History Dialog The Action column displays the name of the action while the Time column tells you when this action was performed. In the Details column further details are shown. Here you can enter new text by double-clicking in the column. • To undo your actions, move the horizontal, colored line upwards to the desired position. You can only undo your actions in reverse order, for example, the last performed action is the first action to be undone.
Project Handling In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with the program. Creating New Projects You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > New Project. Depending on your settings, either the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog opens. 2. 3. In the location options section, select where to store the new project. • To use the default location, select Use default location.
Project Handling Hub Hub When you start Cubase or create new projects using the File menu, the Hub opens. The Hub keeps you up to date with the latest information and assists you with organizing your projects. It consists of the News and Tutorials section and the Projects section. News and Tutorials section The News and Tutorials section displays Steinberg news, tutorial videos as well as links to the user forum, downloads, and Knowledge Base.
Project Handling Project Assistant Template list When you click on one of the category items, the list below the category bar shows the available templates for this category. Any new templates that you create are added at the top of the corresponding list. Location options This section allows you to specify where the project is stored. Open other This button allows you to open any project file on your system. This is identical to using the Open command on the File menu.
Project Handling About Project Files Open other This button allows you to open any project file on your system. This is identical to using the Open command from the File menu. About Project Files A project file (extension *.cpr) is the central document in Cubase. A project file contains references to media data that can be saved in the project folder. NOTE We recommend to save files only in the project folder, even though you can save them in any other location to which you have access.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog PROCEDURE 1. Set up a project. 2. Select File > Save as Template. 3. In the New Preset section of the Save as Template dialog, enter a name for the new project template. 4. In the Attribute Inspector section, double-click the Value field of the Content Summary attribute to enter a description for the template. 5. Click the Value field of the Template Category attribute and select a template category from the pop-up menu.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog IMPORTANT While most Project Setup settings can be changed at any time, you must set the sample rate directly after creating a new project. If you change the sample rate at a later stage, you must convert all audio files in the project to the new sample rate to make them play back properly.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Get From Video Allows you to set the project frame rate to the frame rate of an imported video file. Display Format Allows you to specify the global display format that is used for all rulers and position displays in the program, except the ruler tracks. However, you can make independent display format selections for the individual rulers and displays.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Record File Type Allows you to specify the file type of the audio files that you record in Cubase. The following file types are available: • Wave files are a common file format on the PC platform. For recordings larger than 4 GB, the EBU RIFF standard is used. If a FAT 32 disk is used (not recommended), audio files are split automatically. • Wave 64 is a proprietary format developed by Sonic Foundry Inc.
Project Handling Opening Project Files Opening Project Files You can open one or several saved project files at the same time. IMPORTANT If you open a project saved with a different program version that contains data for functions that are not available in your version, this data may be lost when you save the project with your version. NOTE • If you open an external project, the last used view that was saved on your computer is used.
Project Handling Saving Project Files • Select File > Recent Projects and select a recently opened project. Re-Routing Missing Ports If you open a Cubase project that was created on a different system with other audio hardware, Cubase tries to find matching audio inputs and outputs for the input/output busses. If Cubase cannot resolve all audio/MIDI inputs and outputs that are used in the project, the Missing Ports dialog opens.
Project Handling Reverting to the Last Saved Version Saving Project Files As a New Version You can create and activate a new version of an active project file. This is useful if you are experimenting with edits and arrangements and want to be able to go back to a previous version at any time. To save a new version of the active project, do one of the following: • Select File > Save New Version. • Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-S.
Project Handling Creating Self-Contained Projects PROCEDURE 1. Close all projects. 2. Select File > Cleanup. 3. Click Start. Cubase scans the hard disks for project folders and lists all audio and image files that are not used by any project. NOTE You can also click Search Folder to select a specific folder for the Cleanup function. This is only recommended if you are sure that the folder contains no audio files that are used in other projects. 4.
Project Handling Creating Self-Contained Projects Backing Up Projects You can create a backup copy of your project. Backups only contain the necessary work data. All media files except the files from VST Sound archives are included as a copy. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Back up Project. 2. Select an empty folder or create a new one. 3. Make your settings in the Back up Project Options dialog and click OK. RESULT A copy of the project is saved in the new folder. The original project remains unaffected.
Tracks Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit data (parts and events). Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the Track list and extend horizontally across the Project window. Each track is assigned to a particular channel strip in the MixConsole. If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters displayed in the Inspector and the track list allow you to control the track.
Tracks Track Inspector Settings Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector. Pin If you activate Pin by clicking the column for a section the open/close status of the selected Inspector section is pinned. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden sections list to the list of visible sections. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections.
Tracks Track Control Settings Track Control Settings For each track type you can configure which track controls are shown in the track list. You can also specify the order of controls and group controls so that they are always shown adjacent to each other. • To open the Track Controls Settings dialog, right-click a track in the track list and select Track Controls Settings from the context menu, or click Open Track Controls Settings Dialog in the bottom right corner of the track list.
Tracks Track Control Settings Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden controls list to the list of visible controls. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible controls list to the list of hidden controls. All controls can be removed except Mute and Solo. Move Up/Move Down Allows you to change the order of an item in the list of visible controls. Group Allows you to group two or more controls selected in the visible controls list that are adjacent to each other.
Tracks Audio Tracks Audio Tracks You can use audio tracks for recording and playing back audio events and audio parts. Each audio track has a corresponding audio channel in the MixConsole. An audio track can have any number of automation tracks for automating channel parameters, effect settings, etc. • To add an audio track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Audio.
Tracks Audio Tracks Open Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to create a device panel for the plug-in and device parameters of your track. Auto Fades Settings Opens a dialog where you can make separate audio fade settings for the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. Audio Track Inspector sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, audio tracks provide other Inspector sections. These are described in the following sections. TrackVersions Allows you to create and edit TrackVersions.
Tracks Audio Tracks Strip Section Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Equalizers Section Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQ for each track. Sends Section Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels.
Tracks Audio Tracks Cue Sends Section (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Direct Routing Section Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan Section (Cubase Pro only) Shows the MultiPanner for a track (if used).
Tracks Audio Tracks Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel Section (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Section Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example.
Tracks Audio Tracks Audio Track Controls The Track List for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your audio track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode. Freeze Channel Opens the Freeze Channel Options dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Instrument Track Inspector The Inspector for instrument tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control your instrument track. It shows some of the sections from VST instrument channels and MIDI tracks. The top section of the instrument track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Opens the Input Transformer dialog that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in realtime. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, open the Preferences dialog, select MIDI, and activate MIDI Thru Active. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Activate Outputs This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument. Edit Instrument Allows you to open the instrument panel. Programs Allows you to select a program. Drum Map Allows you to select a drum map for the track. Instrument Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, instrument tracks provide other Inspector sections.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Expression Map Section Allows you to use the Expression Map features. Note Expression Section Allows you to work with the Note Expression features. MIDI Modifiers Section Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in realtime during playback.
Tracks Instrument Tracks MIDI Inserts Section Allows you to add MIDI insert effects. Instrument Section Shows the audio-related controls for the instrument. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel Section (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Section Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Instrument Track Controls The Track List for instrument tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your instrument track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Allows you to route incoming MIDI signals to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, open the Preferences dialog, select MIDI, and activate MIDI Thru Active.
Tracks Instrument Tracks ASIO Latency Compensation Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency. Programs Allows you to select a program. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Instrument Allows you to select an instrument. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode. Edit In-Place Allows you to edit MIDI events and parts on the track in the Project window.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Freeze Channel Opens the Freeze Channel Options dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds. Load available update This button lights up when other users have made changes to a track and committed them over the network to indicate that you can load the changes and update the project. MIDI Tracks You can use MIDI tracks for recording and playing back MIDI parts. Each MIDI track has a corresponding MIDI channel in the MixConsole.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Open Device Panels Allows you to open the instrument panel. Input Transformer Opens the Input Transformer dialog that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in realtime. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Pan Allows you to adjust the MIDI pan for the track. Delay Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track. Load/Save/Reload Track Preset Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. Channel Allows you to specify the MIDI channel. Edit Instrument Allows you to open the instrument panel.
Tracks MIDI Tracks TrackVersions Allows you to create and edit TrackVersions. Chords Section Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Expression Map Section Allows you to use the Expression Map features.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Note Expression Section Allows you to work with the Note Expression features. MIDI Modifiers Section Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in realtime during playback. MIDI Inserts Section Allows you to add MIDI insert effects.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Sends Section Allows you to add MIDI send effects. MIDI Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Section Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. MIDI Track Controls The Track List for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your MIDI track. The track list for MIDI tracks contains the following controls: Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Output Allows you to specify the output for the track. Programs Allows you to select a program. Edit In-Place Allows you to edit MIDI events and parts on the track in the Project window. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Load available update This button lights up when other users have made changes to a track and committed them over the network to indicate that you can load the changes and update the project. ASIO Latency Compensation Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency. Sampler Tracks You can use sampler tracks for controlling the playback of audio samples via MIDI. Each sampler track has a corresponding channel in the MixConsole.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Open Device Panels Allows you to open the instrument panel. Input Transformer Opens the Input Transformer dialog that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in realtime. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Delay Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track. Load/Save/Reload Track Preset Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Sampler Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, sampler tracks provide other Inspector sections. These are described in the following sections.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Expression Map Section Allows you to use the Expression Map features. Note Expression Section Allows you to work with the Note Expression features. MIDI Modifiers Section Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in realtime during playback.
Tracks Sampler Tracks MIDI Inserts Section Allows you to add MIDI insert effects. Instrument Section Shows the audio-related controls for the sampler track. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel Section (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Sampler Track Controls The track list for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your sampler track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Allows you to route incoming MIDI signals to the selected MIDI output.
Tracks Arranger Track Divides the tracks in lanes. ASIO Latency Compensation Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode. Edit In-Place Allows you to edit MIDI events and parts on the track in the Project window. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Arranger Track Arranger Track Inspector The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events. The arranger track Inspector contains the following settings: Track Name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Arranger Editor. Select Active Arranger Chain + Function Allows you to select the active arranger chain, to rename it, to create a new one, to duplicate or to flatten it. Current Arranger Chain Shows the active arranger chain.
Tracks Chord Track Arranger Track Controls The track list for the arranger track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the arranger track. Select Active Arranger Chain Allows you to select the active arranger chain. Current Item/Current Repeat Displays which arranger event and which repeat is active. Activate Arranger Mode Allows you to activate and deactivate the arranger mode. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks Chord Track Track name Click to show/hide the basic track settings section. Mute Mutes the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Acoustic Feedback Allows you to audition the events on the chord track. For this to work, you need to select a track for auditioning in the track list. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Chord Track Mapping Offset Allows you to specify an offset value to make sure that chord events also affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early (enter a negative value) or too late (enter a positive value). Chord Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, the chord track provides other Inspector sections. These are described in the following sections. TrackVersions Allows you to create and edit TrackVersions.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Record Enable Allows you to record chord events. Resolve Display Conflicts Allows you to show all chord events on the track properly, even at low horizontal zoom levels. Show Scales Allows you to show the scale lane in the lower part of the chord track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Inserts Section Allows you to add insert effects to the track. Strip Section Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Equalizers Section Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQ for each track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Sends Section Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Cue Sends Section (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Direct Routing Section Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan Section (Cubase Pro only) Shows the MultiPanner for a track (if used).
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Quick Controls Section Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. FX Channel Track Controls The Track List for FX channel tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the effect. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Mute Automation Deactivates the automation read function for the selected parameter. Automation parameter Allows you to select a parameter for automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks Folder Tracks Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Folder Tracks Folder tracks function as containers for other tracks, making it easier to organize and manage the track structure. They also allow you to edit several tracks at the same time. • To add a folder track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Folder.
Tracks Folder Tracks Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Folder Track Controls The Track List for folder tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit all tracks in the folder. Expand/Collapse Shows/hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Group Channel Tracks You can use group channel tracks to create a submix of several audio channels and apply the same effects to them. A group channel track contains no events as such, but displays settings and automation for the corresponding group channel. All group channel tracks are automatically placed in a special group track folder in the track list, for easy management. Each group channel track has a corresponding channel in the MixConsole.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level for the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. NOTE When you select the group folder track instead, the Inspector shows the folder and the group channels it contains.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Strip Section Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Equalizers Section Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQ for each track. Sends Section Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Cue Sends Section (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Direct Routing Section Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan Section (Cubase Pro only) Shows the MultiPanner for a track (if used).
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Quick Controls Section Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Group Channel Track Controls The Track List for group channel tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the group. Track name Double-click to rename the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Mute Automation Deactivates the automation read function for the selected parameter. Automation parameter Allows you to select a parameter for automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks Marker Track Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Marker Track Cubase Pro only: You can use marker tracks to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions quickly. Cubase Artist only: You can use the marker track to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions quickly. • To add the marker track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Marker. Cubase Pro only: You can add up to 10 marker tracks in a project.
Tracks Ruler Track Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position. Cycle Allows you to select a cycle marker. Zoom Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker. Add Marker Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position. Add Cycle Marker Allows you to add a cycle marker at the project cursor position. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Signature Track Bars+Beats Activates a display format of bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default there are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To adjust this, open the Preferences dialog, select MIDI, and set the MIDI Display Resolution. Seconds Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. Timecode Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Tracks Tempo Track Signature Track Controls The track list for the signature track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the signature track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Current Time Signature Allows you to change the time signature at the project cursor position. Open Process Bars Dialog Allows you to open the Process Bars dialog. Tempo Track You can use the tempo track to create tempo changes within a project.
Tracks Transpose Track Tempo Track Controls The track list for the tempo track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the tempo track. Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate the tempo track. In this mode, the tempo cannot be changed on the Transport panel. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Current Tempo Allows you to change the tempo at the project cursor position. Open Process Tempo Dialog Allows you to open the Process Tempo dialog.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to keep the transposition in the octave range and ensures that nothing is transposed by more than seven semitones. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Transpose Track Inspector sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, the transpose track provides other Inspector sections. These are described in the following sections.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) on page 370 VCA Fader Automation on page 374 Automation on page 615 VCA Fader Track Inspector The Inspector for VCA fader tracks shows the settings for the VCA faders. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Quick Controls Section Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. VCA Fader Track Controls The track list for VCA fader tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the VCA fader. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.
Tracks Video Track Shows the channel configuration of the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Video Track You can use the video track to play back video events.
Tracks Video Track Show Thumbnails Allows you to activate/deactivate the thumbnails of a video track. Video Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, the video track provides an other Inspector section. This is described in the following section. Notepad Section Allows you to enter notes about the track. Video Track Controls The track list for the video track contains a number of parameters to control the video track. Mute Video Track Mutes the track.
Track Handling Adding Tracks You can add tracks via the Project menu, the context menu, or by dragging files from the MediaBay. Tracks can be added with or without track presets. Add Track Dialog The Add Track dialog opens when you add audio, MIDI, group/FX/VCA channels, or instrument tracks. The available options depend on the track type. Browse Expands the dialog and allows you to select a track preset for the track. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.
Track Handling Adding Tracks Adding Tracks via the Project Menu PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track. 2. Select a track of a specific type. 3. In the Add Track dialog, edit the add track options. 4. Click Add Track. RESULT The new tracks are added to the project below the selected track. RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog on page 164 Adding Tracks based on Track Presets You can add tracks based on track presets. Track presets contain sound and channel settings. PROCEDURE 1.
Track Handling Adding Tracks • If you drag multiple audio files into the track list, choose if you want to place all files on one track or on different tracks. • If you drag multiple audio files into the track list, the Import Options dialog opens that allows you to edit the import options. RESULT The new tracks are added at the position that was highlighted by the indicator in the track list. The audio files are inserted at the cursor position.
Track Handling Removing Tracks Please, don’t ask again If this option is activated, files will always be imported according to the settings that you have made, without this dialog appearing. This can be reset in the Preferences dialog (Editing > Audio). Removing Tracks You can remove selected or empty tracks from the track list. • To remove selected tracks, select Project > Remove Selected Tracks or right-click the track that you want to remove, and from the context menu select Remove Selected Tracks.
Track Handling Showing Track Pictures • You can also use the Track Color Selector. In the Inspector, click the arrow to the right of the track name and select a color. In the track list, Ctrl/Cmd-click in the left area and select a color. • To control which colors are used for new tracks, open the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Tracks, and edit the Auto Track Color Mode settings.
Track Handling Showing Track Pictures Track Pictures Browser The Track Pictures Browser allows you to set up and select pictures that can be shown in the track list and in the MixConsole. Track pictures are useful to recognize tracks and channels easily. You can select pictures from the factory content or add new ones to the user library. • To open the Track Pictures Browser for a track, double-click in the lower left side of the track list. Factory Shows the factory content in the pictures browser.
Track Handling Setting the Track Height Track Color Opens the Track Color Selector. Click the rectangle to change the track color. Intensity Allows you to apply the track color to the track picture and set the color intensity. Zoom Allows you to change the size of the track picture. Rotate Allows you to rotate the track picture.
Track Handling Selecting Tracks Zoom Tracks x Rows Zooms all track heights to show the specified number of rows. Zoom Tracks Full Zooms all tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom x Tracks Zooms the specified number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom N Tracks Allows you to set the number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom Tracks Minimal Zooms all track heights to the minimum size. Snap Track Heights Changes the track height in fixed increments when you resize it.
Track Handling Duplicating Tracks • If this option is activated, the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key are only used to change the track selection – the current event/part selection in the Project window will not be altered. Duplicating Tracks You can duplicate a track with all contents and channel settings. PROCEDURE • Select Project > Duplicate Tracks. RESULT The duplicated track appears below the original track.
Track Handling Handling Overlapping Audio NOTE Hidden tracks are played back as usual. RELATED LINKS Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) on page 211 Moving Tracks to Folder Tracks You can move your tracks to folder tracks to organize them and to perform editing on several tracks as one entity. You can move any type of track including other folder tracks to folder tracks. PROCEDURE • Select Project > Track Folding > Move Selected Tracks to New Folder.
Track Handling Track Folding Track Folding You can show, hide, or invert tracks that are displayed in the Project window event display. This allows you to divide the project into several parts by creating several folder tracks for the different project elements and showing/hiding their contents by selecting a menu function or using a key command. You can also fold in automation tracks this way. • To open the Track Folding menu, select Project > Track Folding.
Track Handling How Events are Displayed on Folder Tracks several open automation tracks, all these audio tracks within the folder track will also be folded in. How Events are Displayed on Folder Tracks Closed folder tracks can display data of the contained audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks as data blocks or as events. When you close folder tracks, the contents of the contained tracks are displayed as data blocks or events.
Track Handling Working with Lanes The Show Lanes mode gives you a good overview of all your takes. If you activate the Show Lanes button, the recorded takes are shown on separate lanes. Show Lanes button Lanes are handled differently, depending on whether you work with audio or MIDI: Audio As each audio track can only play back one single audio event at a time, you only hear the take that is activated for playback, for example, the last lap of a cycle recording.
Track Handling Working with Lanes • To put all takes on a single lane, and remove all takes in the background, select all takes and select Audio > Advanced > Delete Overlaps. • To create a new and continuous event of all selected takes, select Audio > Bounce Selection. For MIDI, proceed as follows: • Open your takes in a MIDI editor to perform fine adjustments like removing or editing notes.
Track Handling Working with Lanes Operation Comp tool Object Selection/Range Selection tool and click. Click twice to toggle. For MIDI this mutes/ unmutes a take. Comp (create a new range and bring it to front, Project window only) Click and drag on a lane. All takes are cut at the range start and end. - If the audio takes are adjacent without gaps or fades and the material itself matches, the takes are merged within the range.
Track Handling Defining the Track Time Base Operation Comp tool Object Selection/Range Selection tool Adjust cuts Position the mouse pointer See left. over a cut and drag to the left or to the right. Glueing cuts Bring a new range to front. Select a range spanning all the cuts that you want to glue, and double-click.
Track Handling TrackVersions 2. Open the Default Track Time Type pop-up menu and select a default track time type. RESULT If you selected Follow Transport Main Display, the primary time format setting on the Transport panel is used. When this is set to Bars+Beats, tracks with musical time base are added. When this is set to any of the other options (Seconds, Timecode, Samples, etc.), all new tracks use linear time base.
Track Handling TrackVersions New Version Creates a new, empty TrackVersion for the selected tracks. Duplicate Version Creates a copy of the active TrackVersion for the selected tracks. Rename Version Opens a dialog that allows you to change the TrackVersion name for the selected tracks. Delete Version Deletes the active TrackVersion for the selected tracks. Select Tracks with Same Version ID Selects all tracks that have a TrackVersion with the same ID.
Track Handling TrackVersions 6. Duplicate Version Creates a copy of the active TrackVersion for all selected tracks. 7. Delete Version Deletes the active TrackVersion for all selected tracks. This function is only available if the track has more than one TrackVersion. Creating New TrackVersions You can create new, empty TrackVersions for selected tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the tracks for which you want to create a new TrackVersion. 2. Select Project > TrackVersions > New Version.
Track Handling TrackVersions Assigning a Common ID TrackVersions on different tracks that were not created together have different TrackVersion IDs. TrackVersions with different IDs cannot be activated together. To do this, you must assign a new version ID to these tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks and activate the TrackVersions to which you want to assign a common version ID. 2. Select Project > TrackVersions > Assign Common Version ID.
Track Handling TrackVersions 2. Click the arrow to the right of the track name to open the TrackVersions pop-up menu. 3. Select the TrackVersion that you want to activate from the list. RESULT The selected TrackVersion is activated for all selected tracks, and the corresponding events are shown in the event display. NOTE If you work with audio tracks, MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, or the chord track, you can also use the TrackVersions Inspector to activate a TrackVersion.
Track Handling TrackVersions PROCEDURE 1. Select the Range Selection tool. 2. Select a range of the TrackVersion that you want to copy. 3. Select Edit > Copy. 4. Activate the TrackVersion into which you want to insert the copied range. 5. Select Edit > Paste. RESULT The copied range from the first TrackVersion is pasted to the second TrackVersion at the exact same position.
Track Handling TrackVersions Renaming a TrackVersion PROCEDURE • In the TrackVersions section in the Inspector, double-click the TrackVersion name and enter a new name. The name is changed. If the available space in the track list is too small, the name is abbreviated automatically. Renaming TrackVersions on Multiple Tracks PROCEDURE 1. Activate all TrackVersions that you want to rename, and select the corresponding tracks. 2. Select Project > TrackVersions > Rename Version. 3.
Track Handling Track Presets TrackVersions vs. Lanes TrackVersions and lanes are individual features that complement each other. Every TrackVersion can have its own set of lanes. Creating Lanes from TrackVersions If your project contains TrackVersions and you want to continue working with lanes, using the Comp tool, for example, you can create lanes from TrackVersions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks for which you want to create lanes. 2. Select Project > TrackVersions > Create Lanes from Versions.
Track Handling Track Presets Audio Track Presets Track presets for audio tracks, group tracks, FX tracks, VST instrument channels, input channels, and output channels include all settings that define the sound. You can use the factory presets as a starting point for your own editing and save the audio settings that you optimized for an artist that you often work with as a preset for future recordings.
Track Handling Track Presets • To ensure that saved MIDI track presets for external instruments will work again with the same instrument, install the instrument as a MIDI device, see the separate PDF document MIDI Devices. The following data is saved in MIDI track presets: • MIDI modifiers (Transpose, etc.
Track Handling Track Presets • VST instrument • VST instrument settings NOTE Modifiers, inserts, and EQ settings are not saved. VST effect plug-ins are available in VST 3 and VST 2 format. NOTE In this manual, VST presets stands for VST 3 instrument presets, unless stated otherwise. Pattern Banks Pattern banks are presets that are created for the Beat Designer MIDI effect. They behave much like track presets.
Track Handling Track Presets 2. Click Save Track Preset. 3. In the Save Track Preset dialog, type in a name for the new preset. 4. Click OK to save the preset and exit the dialog. RESULT The new sampler track preset is saved. It is displayed in the Preset Name field on the info line. Sampler track presets are saved within the application folder in the sampler track presets folder.
Track Handling Track Presets RELATED LINKS Filters Section on page 580 Loading Multi-Track Presets PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select several tracks. NOTE Multi-track presets can only be applied if track type, number, and sequence are identical for the selected tracks and the track preset. 2. In the track list, right-click the track and select Load Track Preset. 3. In the preset browser, select a multi-track preset. 4. Double-click the preset to load it. RESULT The preset is applied.
Track Handling Track Presets Track Quick Control Presets For audio, instrument, MIDI, FX, and group tracks, you can save and load your own Quick Control assignments as presets or use the factory presets. Saving/Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. For instrument tracks, the track quick controls are set to the 8 default VST quick controls of the loaded instrument by default. 2.
Parts and Events Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase. Events In Cubase, most event types can be viewed and edited on their specific tracks in the Project window. Events can be added by importing or recording. RELATED LINKS Audio Events on page 194 MIDI Events on page 197 Audio Events Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window. You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.
Parts and Events Events • Drag an audio file from the MediaBay, the Audio Part Editor, the Sample Editor or the Find Media window, and drop it in the event display. • Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display.
Parts and Events Events Audio Files and Audio Clips In Cubase, audio editing and processing are non-destructive. When you edit or process audio in the Project window, the audio file on the hard disk remains untouched. Instead, your changes are saved to an audio clip that is automatically created on import or during recording, and that refers to the audio file. This allows you to undo changes or revert to the original version.
Parts and Events Events them into separate audio files. This is necessary since different events that refer to the same clip access the same clip information. RELATED LINKS Pool on page 544 Audio Regions on page 196 Regions List on page 473 Region Operations Regions are sections within a clip. Regions are best created and edited in the Sample Editor. However, to access the following options, select Audio > Advanced.
Parts and Events Parts • Drag a MIDI file from the File Explorer/Mac OS Finder, from one of the MIDI editors, or from the MediaBay, and drop it in the event display. • Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display. RELATED LINKS Basic Recording Methods on page 239 Importing MIDI files on page 1039 MIDI Editors on page 716 MediaBay on page 564 Parts Parts are containers for MIDI or audio events, and for tracks.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Folder Parts A folder part is a graphic representation of events and parts on the tracks in the folder. Folder parts indicate the time position as well as the vertical track position. If part colors are used, these are also shown in the folder part. Any editing that you perform to a folder part affects all the events and parts it contains. Tracks inside a folder can be edited as one entity.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT The track on which you click is played back, starting at the click position. Playback is stopped when you release the mouse button. NOTE When auditioning, audio will be routed directly to the Control Room (Cubase Pro only) if the Control Room is activated. If the Control Room is deactivated, the audio is routed to the default output bus, bypassing the audio channel’s settings, effects and EQs.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE You can also use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, Right Arrow keys on the computer keyboard to select the event on the upper or lower track or the previous or next event on the same track. Select Submenu If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features specific options for selecting events in the Project window. • To open the Select submenu, select Edit > Select. All Selects all events in the Project window.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE When the Range Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features different functions. RELATED LINKS Selection Range Options on page 214 Range Editing on page 469 Removing Events PROCEDURE • To remove an event from the Project window, do one of the following: • Select Erase • Select the events and select Edit > Delete. • Select the events and press Backspace. and click the event.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE To avoid accidentally moving events when you click them in the Project window, the response when you move an event by dragging is slightly delayed. You can adjust this delay with the Drag Delay setting (File > Preferences > Editing). Moving with the Nudge Buttons PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge Palette. The nudge buttons become available on the toolbar. 2.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events • Select the events and type in a new name in the Name field on the info line. • Change the track name, hold down a modifier key, and press Return to rename all events after the track. Resizing Events You can resize events by moving their start or end positions individually. To resize events, you can use the Object Selection, the Trim, or the Scrub tools. IMPORTANT When resizing events, automation data is not taken into account.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents You can move the start or end point of the event and move the content. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection 2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Moves Contents from the popup menu. 3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event. . RESULT The event is resized and the content follows.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge Palette. The nudge buttons become available on the toolbar. 2. Select the event. 3. Do one of the following: • Click Trim Start Left • Click Trim Start Right • Click Trim End Left • Click Trim End Right . . . . RESULT The start or end position of the selected events are moved by the amount set on the Grid Type pop-up menu.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE This splits the selected events at the left and right locator positions. If no events are selected, all events on all tracks that are intersected by the locators are split. RESULT The events are split.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT If you paste an audio event, it is inserted on the selected track, positioned so that its snap point is aligned with the cursor position. If the selected track is of the wrong type, the event is inserted on its original track. Duplicating Events In the Project window, you can duplicate selected events. PROCEDURE • Select the event and do one of the following: • Select Edit > Functions > Duplicate.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE Repeating by dragging only works if the track has a height of at least 2 rows. RELATED LINKS Shared Copies on page 209 Repeat Events Dialog on page 209 Setting the Track Height on page 170 Repeat Events Dialog The Repeat Events dialog allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected events. • To open the Repeat Events dialog, select Edit > Functions > Repeat.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Sliding the Contents of Events You can move the contents of an event without changing its position in the Project window. PROCEDURE • Hold down Alt-Shift, click the event, and drag to the left or right. RESULT The content of the event is moved. NOTE You cannot slide an audio event past the start or end of the actual audio clip. If the event plays the whole clip, you cannot slide the audio at all.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) The Group Editing mode for folder tracks allows you to edit parts and events in a folder as a group. If Group Editing is activated and you select an event, a part or a range on a track inside the folder track, other events, parts, or ranges that have the same start and end time and the same playback priority, are also selected and temporarily grouped.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Locking Events If you want to make sure that you do not edit or move an event by accident, you can lock it. PROCEDURE • Do one of the following: • Select the events and select Edit > Lock to lock the selected events. • Click the padlock symbol in the track list or in the Inspector to lock all events on a track. RESULT The events are locked. This is indicated by a padlock symbol. To unlock an event, select the event and select Edit > Unlock.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Muting Events You can mute events in the Project window. Muted events can be edited as usual (with the exception of adjusting fades), but are not played back. PROCEDURE • Do one of the following: • Select Mute • Select the events and select Edit > Mute. and click the events or drag a selection rectangle around them. RESULT The events are muted and grayed out. You can unmute events by selecting them and selecting Edit > Unmute.
Range Editing Editing in the Project window is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also work with selection ranges, which are independent from the event/part and track boundaries. Creating a Selection Range • To make a selection range, drag with the Range Selection tool. When the Range Selection tool is selected, you can select selection ranges options via Edit > Select.
Range Editing Creating a Selection Range In Loop Makes a selection between the left and right locator on all tracks. From Start to Cursor Makes a selection on all tracks, from the start of the project to the project cursor. From Cursor to End Makes a selection on all tracks, from the project cursor to the end of the project. Equal Pitch - all Octaves This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch in any octave as the selected note.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Editing Selection Ranges Adjusting the Size of Selection Ranges You can adjust the size of a selection range in the following ways: • By dragging its edges. The pointer takes the shape of a double arrow when you move it over an edge of the selection range. • By holding down Shift and clicking. The closest selection range edge will be moved to the position at which you clicked. • By adjusting the selection range start or end position on the info line.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges RELATED LINKS Duplicating Events on page 208 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Selection Ranges You can cut or copy and paste selection ranges, using the functions on the Edit menu. You can also use the Cut Time and Paste Time options. Cut Cuts out the data in the selection range and moves it to the clipboard. The selection range is replaced by empty track space in the Project window, meaning that events to the right of the range keep their positions.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Deleting Data in Selection Ranges • To replace data within the deleted selection range with empty track space, select Edit > Delete or press Backspace. Events to the right of the range keep their position. • To remove the selection range and make the events to the right move to the left to fill the gap, select Edit > Range > Delete Time.
Playback and Transport This chapter describes the methods for controlling playback and transport functions. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1100 Transport Panel The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. • To show the transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Locators Allows you to go to the left or right locator position, and to set the left and right locator position numerically. Punch Points Allows you to activate/deactivate Punch In and Punch Out. The section to the right of the punch buttons allows you to set up the punch positions numerically. For this to work, Lock Punch Points to Locators must be deactivated. You can hide/show that section by clicking the points on the divider.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Marker Shows the basic marker functions. MIDI Activity Allows you to monitor the MIDI input and the MIDI output signals. Audio Activity Allows you to monitor the audio input and output signals. Audio Level Control Shows clipping indicators and allows you to control the output level.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode. Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Fast Rewind Moves backward at a faster speed. Fast Forward Moves forward at a faster speed. Nudge Cursor Left Moves the project cursor position to the left. Nudge Cursor Right Moves the project cursor position to the right. Enter Project Cursor Position Allows you to enter the project cursor position manually.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position Sets the left locator to the project cursor position. Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position Sets the right locator to the project cursor position. Enter Left Locator Position Allows you to enter the position of the left locator manually. Enter Right Locator Position Allows you to enter the position of the right locator manually. Set Locators to Selection Range Sets the locators to encompass the selection.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Enter Punch Out Position Allows you to enter the punch out position manually. Set Punch Points to Selection Range Sets the punch in and the punch out position to the selected event range. Set Project Cursor Position Locate Selection Start Moves the project cursor to the beginning of the selection. Locate Selection End Moves the project cursor to the end of the selection. Locate Next Marker Moves the project cursor to the next marker.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Play until Next Marker Activates playback from the project cursor and stops at the next marker. Play Selection Range Activates playback from the start of the current selection and stops at the selection end. Pre-roll & Post-roll Use Pre-roll Activates/Deactivates the pre-roll. Use Post-roll Activates/Deactivates the post-roll.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Audio Record Mode These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing events. Keep History Keeps existing events or portions of events. Cycle History + Replace Replaces existing events or portions of events by the new recording. In cycle mode, all takes from the current cycle recording are kept. Replace Replaces existing events or portions of events by the last take.
Playback and Transport Transport Auto Quantize in Record Activates automatic quantizing during record. Retrospective MIDI Record Retrospective MIDI Record Allows you to capture MIDI notes that you play in stop mode or during playback. For this to work, you need to enable the Retrospective Record option in the Preferences dialog (Record > MIDI). Metronome Setup Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. Use Metronome Use Metronome Activates/Deactivates the metronome click.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators • To display all transport elements, right-click in an empty area of the transport and select Show All. • To show all controls of a section, click the points to the right of the section and drag all the way to the right. To hide the controls again, drag to the left. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 57 Left and Right Locators The left and right locators are a pair of markers that you can use to set up cycle boundaries.
Playback and Transport Setting the Project Cursor Position • Click, keep the mouse button pressed, and then drag left or right in the upper part of the ruler. To create a new locator range in a range, do the following: • Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt and drag left or right in the upper part of the ruler. To set both locators to the nearest snap position, do the following: • Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt and click at a position in the upper part of the ruler.
Playback and Transport Auto-Scroll Transport Menu on page 221 Transport on page 1100 Left and Right Locators on page 228 Markers on page 306 Arranger Track on page 287 Key Commands on page 1008 Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll allows you to keep the project cursor visible in the window during playback.
Playback and Transport Time Formats Time Formats You can set up different time formats. Selecting the Primary Time Format On the Transport panel, you can select the primary time format. This is the global display format that is used for all rulers and position displays in the program, except the ruler tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the main transport section on the Transport panel, click Select Primary Time Format. 2. Select a time format from the pop-up menu.
Playback and Transport Punch In and Punch Out • By setting a post-roll value you instruct Cubase to play back a short section after automatic punch out before stopping. NOTE This only works if Punch Out is activated on the Transport panel and Stop after Automatic Punch Out is activated. You can access the Stop after Automatic Punch Out option by opening the Preferences dialog and selecting Record.
Playback and Transport Metronome If you do so, the value fields become available and you can use them to set up the punch positions independently from the locator positions. You can also drag the punch in and punch out handles in the ruler to set the punch positions. RELATED LINKS Activating Recording Automatically on page 240 Stopping Recording on page 240 Metronome You can use the metronome click as a timing reference.
Playback and Transport Metronome Metronome Options Section In the Use Click section, the following options are available: In Record Allows you to activate the metronome click during recording. In Play Allows you to activate the metronome click during playback. In Precount Allows you to activate a musical count-in that is played when you start recording from stop mode.
Playback and Transport Chase Hi Note/Velocity Allows you to set the MIDI note number and velocity value for the first beat in a bar, the high note. Lo Note/Velocity Allows you to set the MIDI note number and velocity for the other beats, the low notes. Activate Audio Click Allows you to activate the audio click that sounds via the audio hardware. Beeps Allows you to activate beeps generated by the program.
Playback and Transport Chase RELATED LINKS Chase Events on page 1089 236
Virtual Keyboard The Virtual Keyboard allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your computer keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and you do not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool. When the Virtual Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the Virtual Keyboard.
Virtual Keyboard Virtual Keyboard Options Virtual Keyboard Options 1. Note Velocity Level This slider allows you to adjust the volume of the virtual keyboard. You can also use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key for this. 2. Change Virtual Keyboard Display Type This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display mode. The computer keyboard mode, you can use the two rows of keys that are displayed on the Virtual Keyboard to enter notes.
Recording In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI. Make the following initial preparations: • Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware. • Open a project and set up the project setup parameters according to your specifications. Project setup parameters determine the record format, sample rate, project length, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the project. • If you plan to record MIDI, set up and connect your MIDI equipment.
Recording Basic Recording Methods Activating Recording You can activate recording manually or automatically. Activating Recording Manually • To activate recording, click Record on the Transport panel or on the toolbar. You can also use the corresponding key command, by default Num-*. Recording starts from the current cursor position.
Recording Basic Recording Methods • To stop recording and continue playback, click Record or use the corresponding key command, by default Num-*. • To stop recording automatically when the project cursor reaches the punch out position and continue playback, activate Punch Out on the Transport panel. NOTE If you have unlocked the punch positions from the locator positions, recording is automatically stopped when the project cursor reaches the punch out position.
Recording Basic Recording Methods 2. On the Transport panel, activate Punch In and Punch Out. 3. Activate Pre-roll and Post-roll. 4. Specify a Pre-roll Amount and a Post-roll Amount. 5. Click Record. RESULT The project cursor rolls back and starts playback at the time that has been set as pre-roll amount. When the cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated.
Recording Monitoring NOTE The previous recordings are removed from the project and cannot be retrieved using Undo. However, they remain in the Pool. Monitoring In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while preparing to record or while recording. The following ways of monitoring are available. • Via Cubase. • Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase. • By using ASIO Direct Monitoring. This is a combination of both other methods.
Recording Monitoring PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Preferences > VST. 2. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select Manual. 3. Deactivate Monitor in Cubase. 4. On your mixing desk or mixer application for your audio hardware, activate the Thru or Direct Thru mode to send the input audio back out again. ASIO Direct Monitoring If your audio hardware is ASIO 2.0 compatible, it may support ASIO Direct Monitoring. This feature may also be available for audio hardware with Mac OSdrivers.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics NOTE With Direct Monitoring activated, Direct Routing cannot be used for routing destinations 2-8. Only the first bus can be used for Direct Monitoring. RELATED LINKS VST on page 1102 Monitoring MIDI Tracks You can monitor everything you play and record though the MIDI output and channel that are selected for the MIDI track. PREREQUISITE Local Off is activated on your MIDI instrument. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Preferences > MIDI. 2.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Setting the Audio Record Folder Each Cubase project has a project folder containing an Audio folder. By default, this is where recorded audio files are stored. However, you can select record folders independently for each audio track if needed. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select all tracks that you want to assign the same record folder. 2. Right-click one of the tracks to open the context menu. 3. Select Set Record Folder. 4.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics 2. Select an input bus. RELATED LINKS Setting Up Input and Output Ports on page 21 Audio Bus Setup on page 21 Audio Track Inspector on page 106 Recording Audio You can record audio using any of the basic recording methods. When you finish recording, an audio file is created in the Audio folder within the project folder. In the Pool, an audio clip is created for the audio file, and an audio event that plays the whole clip appears on the recording track.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Cycle History + Replace Existing events or portions of events that are overlapped by a new recording are replaced by the new recording. However, if you record in cycle mode, all takes from the current cycle recording are kept. Replace Existing events or portions of events that are overlapped by a new recording are replaced by the last recorded take.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics RELATED LINKS Routing on page 347 Undoing Recording If you decide that you do not like what you just recorded, you can delete it. • Select Edit > Undo. This removes the events that you just recorded from the Project window and moves the audio clips in the Pool to the trash folder. To remove the recorded audio files from the hard disk, open the Pool, right-click the Trash icon and select Empty Trash.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Recovering Audio Recordings after System Failure Cubase allows you to recover audio recordings after a system failure, because of a power cut or other mishap, for example. When you experience a computer crash during a recording, relaunch the system and check the project record folder. By default, this is the Audio subfolder inside the project folder.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics 3. Click in the Show As column and type in a new name. 4. Click OK. RESULT The new port names appear on the MIDI Input and Output Routing pop-up menus. Setting the MIDI Input In the Inspector, you set the MIDI input for the track. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI input. 2. In the topmost Inspector section, open the Input Routing pop-up menu and select an input.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Selecting a Sound You can select sounds from within Cubase by instructing the program to send Program Change and Bank Select messages to your MIDI device. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a sound. 2. In the track list or the Inspector, open the Program Selector pop-up menu and select a program. Program Change messages give access to 128 different program locations. 3.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics NOTE If you perform a live recording on a VST instrument, you usually compensate the latency of the audio card by playing earlier. In consequence, the timestamps are recorded too early. If you activate ASIO Latency Compensation on the track list, all recorded events are moved by the current latency setting.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics You can record continuous messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to which they belong. As long as you set the two tracks to the same output and MIDI channel, it will appear to the MIDI instrument as if you made the two recordings at the same time.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics MIDI Record Mode New Parts Existing parts that are overlapped by a new recording are kept. The new recording is saved as a new part. Merge Existing events in parts that are overlapped by a new recording are kept. The newly recorded events are added to the existing part. Replace Existing events in parts that are overlapped by a new recording are replaced. NOTE In Merge or Replace mode you can activate Record in Editor to record MIDI data in the editor.
Recording Remaining Record Time Quantizing MIDI Recordings Cubase can automatically quantize MIDI notes on recording. • To enable automatic quantizing, open the Transport panel and in the Record Mode section, click in the MIDI Record Modes field, and activate Auto Quantize. The notes that you record are automatically quantized according to the quantize settings.
Recording Lock Record The available time depends on the current setup, for example, on the amount of tracks that are record-enabled, the sample rate for your project, and the available hard disk space. • To open the display, select Devices > Record Time Max. NOTE The remaining record time is also shown in the status line above the track list. If you use individual record folders to store your tracks on different drives, the time display refers to the medium with the least storage space available.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a creative way. You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove. You can also quantize multiple audio tracks simultaneously. Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Starts Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Advanced Quantize From this submenu you can select the following functions: • Quantize MIDI Event Lengths Cuts off the ends of selected MIDI events so that the events match the length quantize value. The start positions are kept. • Quantize MIDI Event Ends Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions. • Freeze MIDI Quantize Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths 2. Select Edit > Quantize. RESULT The starts of the selected MIDI events or all events of the selected MIDI part are quantized. Events that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid position. The note lengths are maintained. Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths PREREQUISITE You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Audio Event Starts Quantizing Audio Event Starts PREREQUISITE You have set up a quantize grid on the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select an audio event, a sliced loop, or an audio part. 2. Select Edit > Quantize. RESULT The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks (Cubase Pro only) NOTE If you use a quantize value of 1/4 on audio that is based on 16th notes, the warp markers at the 1/4 note positions are quantized to the grid, and the remaining warp markers are moved, keeping the relative distances between the warp markers. RELATED LINKS Quantize Panel on page 263 Slices on page 481 Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks (Cubase Pro only) You can quantize multiple audio tracks at the same time. PROCEDURE 1.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel 3. Select the folder track and activate Group Editing in the track list. 4. On the Project window toolbar, activate AudioWarp Quantize On/Off. 5. Click Open Quantize Panel to open the Quantize Panel. 6. Make your settings in the Warp Marker Creation Rules section of the Quantize Panel, and click Create. 7. Make your settings in the quantize section of the Quantize Panel, and click Quantize.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Presets To the top of the Quantize Panel the quantize presets are shown. Here, you can load and save presets that include all settings for quantizing. Select Preset Allows you to select a preset. Save Preset Allows you to save the current settings as a preset, so that they become available on all Quantize Presets pop-up menus. Remove Preset Allows you to remove the selected preset. Rename Preset Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel The Sample Editor opens. 2. Open the Hitpoints section. The hitpoints for the audio event are detected and displayed automatically. 3. Click Create Groove. The groove is extracted. RESULT The groove is extracted from the audio event and made available in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the Quantize Panel and save the groove as a preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Swing Offsets every second position in the grid, creating a swing or shuffle feel. NOTE Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated. Catch Range Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing affects only audio or MIDI within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display. Non-Quantize Creates a safe zone before and after the quantize positions.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Reset Quantize Resets your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state. IMPORTANT This function has no effect on an event that was moved manually. Auto Applies any changes immediately to the selected parts or events. A way of using this feature is to set up a playback loop and adjust the settings until you are satisfied with the result. Quantize Applies your settings.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Length (MIDI Only) Allows you to specify how much the lengths of the notes are affected by the groove. NOTE For drums, the Length setting is ignored. Non-Q Allows you to create a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you specify a distance in ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events that lie within this zone are not quantized. This way, slight variations are kept. Grid Display Shows the quantize grid.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel your audio or MIDI closer to the quantize grid until you have found the right timing. AudioWarp Quantizes the content of your audio event by applying time stretch. The warp markers are aligned to the defined quantize grid. MIDI CC Moves controllers related to MIDI notes (pitchbend, etc.) automatically with the notes when these are quantized. Reset Quantize Resets your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel tracks. If the zoom factor is high enough, cutting positions are marked in the Project window by vertical lines. Range Allows you to specify the distance in which two hitpoints on different tracks are considered to mark the same beat. Offset Allows you to set an offset that determines how far before the actual hitpoint position an audio event is sliced.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Nudge Crossfade Left/Right Moves the fade area in the audio event to the left or to the right in steps of one millisecond. This is useful if the Offset value in the Slice Rules section was not high enough, and you want to avoid that the crossfade cuts an attack. Length Specifies the length of the crossfade area.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Create Creates warp markers for all the tracks.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or end of audio events or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions. You can create the following fades: • Fade ins/fade outs Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based. Event-based fades are calculated in realtime when you play back audio events.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades There are several ways to create event-based fades: • By using the event handles • By using range selections You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades NOTE To show event handles and fade curves always and not only when you point at events, in the Preferences dialog select Event Display > Audio, and activate Show Event Volume Curves Always. In the upper left and right corners you find triangular fade handles that allow you to change the fade in or fade out length. In the top middle you find a square handle that allows you to change the volume.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades • 3. To create fades on multiple tracks, select a range that spans multiple audio events on multiple audio tracks. Select Audio > Adjust Fades to Range. Removing Event-Based Fades You can remove event-based fades for a whole event or for a range. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Perform one of the following actions: • To remove the fades for an event, select the event with the Object Selection tool.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Creating Clip-Based Fades Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown darker, the current waveform shape is shown lighter. 5. • To add points, click the curve. • To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points. • To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display. Restore Click this button to cancel any changes you have made since opening the dialog. 6.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Creating Clip-Based Fades RESULT The fade is processed. You can remove or modify the fades at any time using the Offline Process History. RELATED LINKS Offline Process History on page 438 On Processing Shared Clips on page 278 Fade Dialog for Clip-Based Fades on page 278 On Processing Shared Clips If several events refer to the same audio clip, this clip is a shared clip.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades 1. Spline Interpolation Applies a spline interpolation to the curve. 2. Damped Spline Interpolation Applies a damped spline interpolation to the curve. 3. Linear Interpolation Applies a linear interpolation to the curve. 4. Fade display Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown darker, the current waveform shape is shown lighter. 5. • To add points, click the curve.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades RELATED LINKS Crossfade Editor on page 280 Creating Crossfades PROCEDURE 1. 2. Perform one of the following actions: • To create a crossfade between two events, select the Object Selection tool, and select two consecutive audio events. • To create a crossfade to a selected range between two events, select the Range Selection tool, and select a range covering the area where you want to apply a crossfade. Select Audio > Crossfade or use the key command X.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades • To change the fade shape, click and drag existing points. • To remove a point, drag a point outside the display. Curve Kind and Shape buttons Determine whether the corresponding fade curve uses Spline Interpolation (left button), Damped Spline Interpolation (middle button) or Linear Interpolation (right button). The curve shape buttons give you quick access to some common curve shapes.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Presets Click Store to the right of the Presets pop-up menu to store the crossfade settings so that you can apply them to other events. • To rename a preset, double-click on the name and type in a new one. • To remove a preset, select it on the pop-up menu and click Delete. Default buttons Click As Default to store the current settings as default. Default settings are used whenever you create new crossfades.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Auto Fades Dialog The Auto Fades dialog allows you to set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project, or separately for each audio track. • To open the global Auto Fades dialog, select Project > Auto Fades Settings. • To open the Auto Fades dialog for a track, right-click in the track list and select Auto Fades Settings. 1. Fades Click this tab to show the settings for auto fades.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Equal Gain allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the summed fade in and fade out amplitudes are the same all along the crossfade region. Equal Power allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the crossfade is constant all along the crossfade region. 3. Length Allows you to specify the length of the auto fades or crossfades. 4. Auto Fade In Allows you to activate auto fade ins. 5.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes Making Auto Fade Settings for Individual Tracks As auto fades use computing power, you might consider to turn auto fades off globally and activate them only for individual tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Perform one of the following actions: • Right-click the track in the track list and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings. • Select the track and in the Inspector, click Auto Fades Settings. The Auto Fades dialog for the track opens. 2.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes RESULT The volume change is created. The waveform image of the event changes according to the volume change. Removing Event Envelopes PROCEDURE • Perform one of the following actions: • To remove a curve point from the envelope, click on it and drag it outside the event. • To remove an event envelope curve from a selected event, select Audio > Remove Volume Curve. Creating Clip-Based Volume Changes PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the event.
Arranger Track The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger track allows you to specify how and when specific sections are played back, even in live performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window. NOTE There can be only one arranger track in a project. To use the arranger functions you must add an arranger track and define arranger events. Arranger events can be of any length.
Arranger Track Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track On the arranger track, you can add arranger events that define specific sections of the project. PREREQUISITE Snap is activated, and Snap Type is set to Events. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Arranger. The arranger track is added. 2. Select the Draw tool and draw an arranger event on the arranger track. An arranger event is added. 3. Draw as many events as you need.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor 1. Arranger Controls Shows the transport buttons, the arranger transport buttons and the arranger tools. 2. Current Arranger Chain NOTE Initially the arranger chain is empty. To fill it up, you must add events from the Arranger Events list. Shows the order in which the events are played back, from top to bottom, and how many times they are repeated. 3. Arranger Events Lists the available arranger events in the order they appear on the timeline.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor 5. Last Repeat of Current Chain Step Navigates to the last repeat of the current entry in the current arranger chain list. 6. Activate Arranger Mode Activates playback in arranger mode. 7. Select Active Chain Allows you to select and activate an arranger chain. 8. Rename Current Chain Allows you to rename the current arranger chain. 9. Create New Chain Creates a new, empty arranger chain. 10.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor In the Source section, you can specify which arranger chains are flattened. Current Chain Flattens the current chain only. Checked Chains Opens a list of the available arranger chains where you can activate the arranger tracks that you want to flatten. All Chains Flattens all arranger chains of the current project. The Destination section allows you to choose where the result of the flattening is saved. Current Project This is only available if Source is set to Current Chain.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events Open New Projects Creates a new project for every flattened arranger chain. If you activate Cascade New Projects, the opened projects are cascaded. RELATED LINKS Flattening the Arranger Chain on page 293 Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events In the Arranger Editor you can set up arranger chains and add events to them. PROCEDURE 1. Click e to open the Arranger Editor. 2. Activate Activate Arranger Mode. 3.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events Editing Arranger Events in the Arranger Chain In the Current Arranger Chain list, you can edit your arranger events. You can perform the following actions: • To select multiple events, Ctrl/Cmd-click or Shift-click them. • To move events in the list, drag them up or down. • To copy events, select them, hold Alt and drag. • To repeat events, click in the Repeats column and enter the number of repeats.
Arranger Track Jump Mode NOTE If you realize that you want to do further adjustments, click Go Back. The activated flatten options are kept. 4. Click Flatten. RESULT The events and parts in the project are reordered, repeated, resized, moved and/or deleted, so that they correspond exactly to the arranger chain. Jump Mode If you have set up an arranger track and play it back, you have live access to the playback order.
Arranger Track Jump Mode AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK • To stop Jump Mode, click Stop. • To continue playback from a specific arranger event, click the arranger event in the Current Arranger Chain list. RELATED LINKS Jump Mode Options on page 295 Jump Mode Options The Jump Mode pop-up menu allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played before jumping to the next one. The following options are available: None Jumps to the next section immediately.
Arranger Track Arranging Music to Video 1 bar Jumps to the next section at the next bar line. 1 beat Jumps to the next section at the next beat. End Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section. Arranging Music to Video When you compose music for video, you can use arranger events to fill a specific video section with music. Here comes an example on how you could do that. PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up an external sync master device to your computer.
Transpose Functions The transpose functions for audio and MIDI in Cubase allow you to change the pitches of audio and MIDI for playback without changing the actual MIDI notes or the audio. You can transpose the following: • An entire project by changing the Project Root Key on the Project window toolbar. • Specific sections of your project by creating a transpose track and adding transpose events. • Individual parts or events by changing their transpose value on the Project window info line.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key RELATED LINKS Transposing with the Project Root Key on page 298 Transposing with the Project Root Key The loops included in Cubase already contain root key information. If you change the project root key, these loops will follow automatically. PREREQUISITE You have opened a project that contains audio loops with different root keys. PROCEDURE 1.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key Assigning the Project Root Key to Parts or Events Some audio or MIDI events that you have created by recording, for example, might not contain root key information. If you want them to follow the transposition changes, you must set them to the Project Root Key. PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, open the Project Root Key pop-up menu and set a root key for the project. 2.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key RESULT All recorded audio events and MIDI parts get the project root key information. On the info line, the Global Transpose setting for recorded events is set to Follow. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Change the project root key. Your events will follow. Changing the Root Key of Individual Audio Events You can change or set the root key information for individual audio events or parts in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. Select Media > Open Pool Window. 2.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track Transpose Track The transpose track allows you to transpose the entire project or sections of it. This function is useful if you want to create harmonic variations. For this function to work, you must add transpose events. These transpose events allow you to transpose specific sections of your project in semitones.
Transpose Functions Keep Transpose in Octave Range 5. Play back your project. RESULT The sections of your project that are situated at the same time positions as the transpose events are transposed. RELATED LINKS Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose on page 304 Muting the Transpose Track You can mute the transpose track. This is useful if you want to compare the effect of the transposition with the original sound, for example.
Transpose Functions Keep Transpose in Octave Range Indicate Transpositions For MIDI parts, you can get a visual feedback that allows you to compare the original sounds and the music transposed for playback. To activate this, open the part in the Key Editor, and activate Indicate Transpositions. • If Indicate Transpositions is activated, the transposed note pitches are shown. • If Indicate Transpositions is deactivated, the original pitches of the notes in the MIDI part are shown.
Transpose Functions Transpose on the Info Line Transpose on the Info Line In the Project window info line, you can change the transpose value for individual parts or events. To do this, change the transpose value in the Transpose field on the info line. The Transpose field also indicates transpositions introduced by changing the Project Root Key. Transposing Individual Parts or Events using the Info Line You can transpose individual audio events and MIDI parts on the info line Transpose field.
Transpose Functions Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose RESULT If you change the project root key or add transpose events, the Independent parts or events are not affected. NOTE Ready-made parts or events that are tagged as drums or FX, are automatically set to Independent.
Markers Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position markers and cycle markers. If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming. Markers are located on the marker track. You can add 1 marker track in Cubase Artist and up to 10 marker tracks in Cubase Pro.
Markers Markers Window RESULT The left and right locators are moved to encompass the cycle marker. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Now you can move the project cursor position to the start or the end of the cycle marker by moving it to the corresponding locator or use cycle markers to export specific ranges of your project with the Export Audio Mixdown dialog. Editing Cycle Markers When editing cycle markers on a marker track, snap is taken into account.
Markers Markers Window 1. Locate arrow Indicates which marker is at the project cursor position. 2. Set focus to marker track Cubase Pro only: Allows you to select the marker track that has the focus. 3. Functions menu Lists all functions available in the Marker window. 4. Marker type Allows you to specify which marker type is shown in the marker list. 5. Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a large number of markers.
Markers Markers Window • To jump to the first/last marker, press the Page Up/Page Down keys. Sorting and Reordering the Marker List You can customize the display of the marker attributes in the marker list by sorting or reordering the columns. • To sort the marker list by a specific attribute, click on the corresponding column header. • To reorder the marker attributes, drag and drop the corresponding column headers.
Markers Markers Window Position In this column you can view and edit the markers’ time positions (or start positions for cycle markers). This column cannot be hidden. End In this column you can view and edit the end positions of cycle markers. Length In this column you can view and edit the length of cycle markers. Description Here you can enter names or descriptions for markers.
Markers Marker Track Marker IDs Each time you add a marker, it is automatically and sequentially assigned an ID number, starting from 1. IDs for cycle markers are shown in brackets and start from 1. ID numbers can be changed at any time – this allows you to assign specific markers to key commands. NOTE Cubase Pro only: If you move a marker from one marker track to another by drag & drop in the Project window and the marker ID is already used on this track, the inserted marker automatically gets a new ID.
Markers Marker Track If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the view zooms to the corresponding cycle marker. 6. Lock Locks the marker track. When a marker track is locked, you cannot edit the track and its markers. 7. Toggle Time Base Sets the track time base. 8. Marker event (inactive) Shows an inactive marker event. 9. Marker event (active) Shows an active marker event. 10. Cycle marker event (inactive) Shows an inactive cycle marker event. 11.
Markers Marker Track The active marker track When you are working with multiple marker tracks, only one track is active. All editing functions affect the markers on the active track only. You activate a track by clicking Activate this track in the track list. The following rules apply: • When you add a new marker track, this track is automatically active. • When you remove an active track, the topmost marker track in the track list is activated.
Markers Marker Track 5. At the position where the first dialogue section should be replaced, trigger Insert and name Marker. The Marker window opens with the Description column is active, so that you can insert a name for the new marker. 6. Enter a name or description for the section, and press Return to confirm. A new marker is created on the active track in the Project window. 7. Activate the track on which you want to insert the next marker using the Activate next/ previous Marker Track key command.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers 2. Select the Range Selection tool and double-click on the marker track between the markers. Everything in the project within the marker boundaries is selected. Any functions or processing you perform now affect the selection only. 3. Click on the marker track in the selected range and drag the range to a new position. If you hold down Alt while you drag the range, the selection in the Project window is copied instead.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers NOTE Cubase Pro only: To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain at least one marker track. Cubase Artist only: To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain a marker track. RELATED LINKS Exporting MIDI files on page 1036 Importing Markers as Part of a Track Archive (Cubase Pro only) You can import position markers and cycle markers by importing track archives containing marker tracks.
MixConsole The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo or surround. It allows you to control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set up the input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time. You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes for an open project at any time. You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone 1. Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. 2. Fader Section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list. 3. Page Selector Allows you to select what page is displayed in the fader section: the channel faders, the insert effects for a channel, or the send effects. The top button allows you to show/ hide the toolbar.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone 4. Activate/Deactivate a dot to the left of a track name. RESULT The track in the track list and the corresponding channel in the lower zone MixConsole are shown/hidden. RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Visibility on page 65 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 66 Visibility on page 65 Determining the Channel Order in the Lower Zone MixConsole You can determine and lock the position of channels in the lower zone MixConsole. PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. Do one of the following: • To lock a channel on the left of the fader section, activate the left dot next to the channel name. • To lock a channel on the right of the fader section, activate the right dot next to the channel name. RESULT The channel is locked. Locked channels are always displayed. RELATED LINKS Opening the Zones Visibility on page 67 MixConsole Window You can open the MixConsole in a separate window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The main MixConsole sections are: 1. Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. 2. Channel Selector (Left Zone) Allows you to set up the visibility and positions of channels in the fader section. 3. Channel Racks (Upper Zone) Allows you to show additional channel controls as needed. 4. Fader Section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Apart from the main sections, you can also access the following sections from within the MixConsole window: 1. Channel Overview Displays all channels as boxes. If you have more channels than can be displayed in the window, you can use the channel overview to navigate to other channels and select them. 2. Meter Bridge Allows you to monitor the levels of your channels. To select a meter type, open the meter bridge context menu and select either PPM or Wave. 3.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Racks on page 330 Track Pictures Browser on page 169 Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel on page 369 Control Room (Cubase Pro only) on page 377 Channel Selector The channel selector contains the following tabs: Visibility and Zones that list all channels contained in your project, and History that lists all MixConsole parameter changes. Visibility Tab The Visibility tab allows you to determine which channels are shown in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window • To lock channels on the left/right of the fader section, activate the left/right dots next to the channel names. Locked channels are excluded from scrolling and are always visible. NOTE The lower zone MixConsole does not follow any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. History Tab The History tab allows you to view and undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes. All MixConsole parameter changes are shown in a list.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. NOTE The toolbar of the lower zone MixConsole contains a limited set of tools. This includes: MixConsole History, Channel Filter Types, Search, Link Group, Zoom Palette, Mixer Functions Menu, and Window Zone Controls. You can show/hide the toolbar by clicking Show/Hide MixConsole Toolbar in the lower zone.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Go to Left/Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the left/right locator positions. Left/Right Locator Position Shows the left/right locator positions. Transport Buttons Shows the transport controls. Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Markers Allows you to set and locate marker positions. State Buttons Allows you to set mute, solo, listen, and automation states.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Mixer Functions Menu Opens the Functions Menu that allows you to make settings in the MixConsole. Window Zone Controls Allows you to show or hide the left zone, the upper zone and the right zone of the MixConsole. The Setup Window Layout pop-up menu allows you to show or hide the status line, the info line, and the overview line. Finding Channels The Find Track/Channel function allows you to find specific channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window • Panorama changes • Changes on the Routing rack • Filter, gain, and phase changes in the Pre rack • Plug-in changes in the Inserts rack • EQ changes • Changes on the Channel Strip rack • Changes on the Sends rack • Cubase Pro only: Changes on the Cue Sends rack • Cubase Pro only: Changes on the Direct Routing rack IMPORTANT The MixConsole history is not saved with the project.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Add Configuration Opens the Add Configuration dialog that allows you to save the configuration and enter a name for it. Update Configuration If you change the active configuration, this is indicated by an asterisk after the configuration name. Use this function to save changes to the active configuration. Rename Configuration Opens the Rename Configuration dialog that allows you to rename the active configuration.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show all Channels Shows all channels of your project. Show Only Selected Channels Shows only channels that are selected. Hide Selected Channels Hides all channels that are selected. Show Channels for Tracks with Data Shows all channels for tracks with events or parts. Show Channels for Tracks with Data at the Cursor Position Shows all channels for tracks with events or parts at the cursor position.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Routing Allows you to set up the input and output routing. For MIDI, you can also select the MIDI channel. Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) For audio-related channels, it contains input filter and gain controls along with Phase and Gain controls. For MIDI channels, it contains an Input Transformer control. Inserts Allows you to select insert effects for your channel. Equalizers (audio-related channels only) Allows you to set the channel EQ.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Link Racks to Configurations If this option is activated, the rack status is taken into account when you save and load a configuration. Show Pre/Filters as Select Combined Label & Setting if you want to show the label and the setting in one line. Select Separate Label & Setting if you want to show the label and the setting in separate lines. Show Inserts as Select Plug-in Names if you want to show the plug-in names only.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The following options are available: Name Allows you to enter a name for the link group. Use VCA Fader Activate this option to assign the link group to a VCA fader. Volume Activate this to link the volume of the linked channels. Pan Activate this to link the panorama of the linked channels. EQ Activate this to link the equalizers of the linked channels. Dynamics (Compressor, Gate, etc.) Activate this to link the dynamics of the linked channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Display Line (Cubase Pro only) Whenever you create a link group, a display line is added on top of the fader section in the MixConsole. The display line shows the number and the name of the created link group and provides a Link Settings pop-up menu that allows you to edit the link group settings. On the display line, you can change the name of the link group by double-clicking and entering a different name.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. In the Link Group Settings dialog, activate the parameters that you want to link. 4. Click OK. RESULT The number and name of the link group is indicated above the channel name in the display line. NOTE • If you link groups, insert and channel strip module linking is applied at the slot level. For example, if you change the settings for insert slot 3 on one channel, these changes are also applied to slot 3 on the other channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RESULT The channel is added to the link group. Removing Channels from Link Groups (Cubase Pro only) You can remove a channel from an existing link group. PROCEDURE 1. On the display line of the channel that you want to remove, open the pop-up menu. 2. Select Included in Link Group: and from the link group list, select None. 3. If the channel is controlled by a VCA fader, specify if the channel keeps the combined automation.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Paste Settings to Selected Channels Pastes the settings to the selected channels. Zoom Opens a submenu where you can increase or reduce the channel width and the rack height. Open VST Connections Opens the VST Connections window. Control Room Cue Channels Opens a submenu where you can activate/deactivate cue channels and change level and panning settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Saving MixConsole Settings You can save MixConsole settings for selected audio-related channels in the MixConsole and load them into any project. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels with the settings that you want to save. 2. Select Functions > Save Selected Channels. 3. In the file dialog, specify the file name and location. 4. Click Save. RESULT The settings for the selected channels are saved with the file extension .vmx. The input/ output routing is not saved.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE If a channel is deactivated in the channel selector or if its channel type is deactivated, it is not shown in the fader section. The lower zone MixConsole does not follow any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. It is linked to the track visibility of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Setting Pan For each audio-related channel with at least a stereo output configuration, you can find a pan control at the top of the fader section. For MIDI channels, the pan control sends out MIDI pan messages. The result depends on how your MIDI instrument is set to respond to pan. The pan control allows you to position a channel in the stereo spectrum. Cubase Pro only: This control is different for stereo and surround configurations.
MixConsole MixConsole Window When panning is bypassed for a channel, the following happens: • Mono channels are panned center. • Stereo channels are panned hard left and right. • Cubase Pro only: Surround channels are panned center. Using Solo and Mute You can silence one or several channels using Solo and Mute. • To silence a channel, click Mute. Click again to deactivate the mute state for the channel. • To mute all other channels, click Solo for a channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The Channel Settings window for audio-related channels is divided into several sections: • Channel Inserts • Channel Faders • Direct Routing • Channel Sends The Channel Strip and Equalizer are always available. The sections are arranged in zones at the left and right of the Channel Settings window. • To show a pane with options to open or close the sections, position the mouse pointer at one of the edges of the Channel Settings window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window • Panning sends This is done on the Panning tab in the Sends section. • Showing the output chain If you click Show Output Chain on the toolbar, the output chain is shown in the Channel Faders section. This allows you to keep track of more complicated output routings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Setting Volume Each channel in the fader section of the MixConsole has a volume fader. The fader levels are displayed below the fader, in dB for audio-related channels and as MIDI volume (0 to 127) for MIDI channels. • To change the volume, move the fader up or down. • To make fine volume adjustments, press Shift while moving the faders. • To reset the volume on its default value, press Ctrl/Cmd and click a fader.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Level Meters The channel meters show the level when you play back audio or MIDI. The Meter Peak Level indicator shows the highest registered level. • To reset the peak level, click the Meter Peak Level value. NOTE Input and output channels have clipping indicators. When they light up, lower the gain or the levels until the indicator is no longer lit.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The signal should be reasonably loud without exceeding 0 dB that is the clipping indicator for the input bus should not light up. 7. If necessary, use the input channel fader to adjust the signal level. Clipping Clipping typically occurs in the audio hardware when an analog signal is too loud and therefore converted to digital in the hardware’s A/D converters. Clipping can also occur when the signal from the input bus is written to a file on your hard disk.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Copying and Moving Rack and Channel Settings You can use drag and drop to copy or move rack and channel settings. NOTE This function is only available in the MixConsole window. Drag and drop works between different channels or different rack slots on the same channel. When you drag, a visual feedback indicates the sections where you can drop your settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Setting up Routing PREREQUISITE Set up busses and group channels in the VST Connections window. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Routing to show the Routing rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the slots of the Routing rack to open the input or the output routing popup menu for a channel. 3. In the routing selector, select an entry.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS Routing on page 347 Input Routing Configurations for Surround Channels (Cubase Pro only) • Surround input busses. • External inputs that are configured on the Studio tab of the VST Connections window. These must have the same input configuration. • Output busses. These must have the same input configuration and should not lead to feedback. RELATED LINKS Routing on page 347 Output Busses For output busses any assignment is possible.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS Input Transformer Window on page 681 Equalizer Settings on page 353 Making Filter Settings Each audio-related channel has separate high-cut and low-cut filters that allow you to attenuate signals with frequencies that are higher or lower than the cutoff frequency. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) to show the Pre rack above the fader section. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Making Phase Settings Each audio-related channel and input/output channel has a Phase button that allows you to correct the phase for balanced lines and microphones that are wired backwards or that are out of phase due to their positioning. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) to show the Pre rack above the fader section. 2. Activate Phase to invert the phase polarity for the signal.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Activating Side-Chain for Inserts Some of the inserts feature side-chain functionality. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click an insert effect. 2. From the context menu, select Activate Side-Chain. Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets You can save and load all insert rack settings using FX chain presets. FX chain presets have the file name extension .fxchainpreset.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Equalizer Settings You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20 kHz). You can specify different filter types for each individual module. 1. Bypass EQ Click to bypass all EQ bands. 2. Curve Display Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Band Settings 1. Activate Band Activates the equalizer band. 2. Gain Set the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB. 3. Frequency Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. You can set the frequency either in Hz or as a note value. If you enter a note value, the frequency is automatically displayed in Hz. For example, a note value of A3 sets the frequency to 440 Hz. When you enter a note value, you can also enter a cent offset.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Strips The Channel Strip rack is only available for audio-related channels. It allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate channels. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window. Channel Strip Modules The channel strips allow you to apply modules directly to specific channels. You can change the position of specific modules in the signal flow via drag and drop. Gate Allows you to silence audio signals below a set threshold level.
MixConsole MixConsole Window State LED Indicates whether the gate is open (LED lights up in green), closed (LED lights up in red), or in an intermediate state (LED lights up in yellow). Attack (0.1 to 1000 ms) Sets the time after which the gate opens when it is triggered. Range Adjusts the attenuation of the gate when it is shut. If Range is set to , the gate is completely shut. The higher the value, the higher the level of the signal that passes through the shut gate.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Attack (0.1 to 100 ms) Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold. If the attack time is long, more of the early part of the signal passes through unprocessed. Release (10 to 1000 ms or Auto mode) Sets the time after which the gain returns to the original level when the signal drops below the threshold. If Auto is activated, the compressor automatically finds the best release setting for the audio material.
MixConsole MixConsole Window VintageCompressor VintageCompressor is modeled after vintage type compressors. Input (-24 to 48 dB) In combination with the Output setting, this parameter determines the compression amount. The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output gain setting, the more compression is applied. Side-chain Activates the external side-chain. Output (-48 to 24 dB) Sets the output gain. Gain Reduction LED Indicates the amount of compression of the signal. Attack (0.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can act as parametric, shelving, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric filters. 3. Gain Sets the amount of cut or boost. 4. Freq Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. 5. Q Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower frequency ranges. Tools Provides various tools.
MixConsole MixConsole Window High-Frequency Allows you to set the high frequency band. Solo Allows you to solo the frequency band to find the appropriate position and width of that band. Diff Allows you to listen to the sounds that the de-esser removes from the signal. EnvelopeShaper This channel strip module can be used to attenuate or boost the gain of the attack and release phase of audio material. You can use the knobs to change parameter values.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Output Allows you to adjust the output level. Saturation Amount LED Indicates the amount of saturation of the signal. Low-Frequency Sets the frequency range of the spectrum band to which the tape effect is applied. To avoid the saturation of lower frequencies, set the value to 200 Hz or 300 Hz. High-Frequency Sets the frequency range of the spectrum band to which the tape effect is applied.
MixConsole MixConsole Window High-Frequency This is a Hi Cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce harshness of the output signal. Tube Saturation This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording of analogue tube compressors. Drive Controls the amount of tube saturation. Output Gain Sets the output gain. Drive Amount LED Indicates the amount of drive of the signal. Low-Frequency This is a low shelving filter with fixed frequency. High-Frequency This is a Hi Cut filter.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Optimize Determines the loudness of the signal. Output (-24 to 6 dB) Determines the maximum output level. Set this to 0 dB to avoid clipping. Gain Reduction LED Displays the amount of gain reduction. Mix (0 to 100) Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal. Standard Limiter This channel strip module is designed to ensure that the output level does not exceed a set output level, to avoid clipping in following devices.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sends The Sends rack for audio-related channels features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects and value sliders that allow you to determine the send level for a channel. For MIDI channels the Sends rack features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects. Adding Send Effects PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Sends to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the send slots to open the send selector. 3.
MixConsole MixConsole Window PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Cue Sends to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the slots to open the send selector. The cue sends are displayed. 3. Click on the left of the slot to activate the cue send. RESULT You can now change the level and pan settings. Direct Routing (Cubase Pro only) The Direct Routing rack allows you to set and activate outputs for all selected channels at once.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Automating Destination Switches PROCEDURE 1. Play back your project and take note of the positions where routing changes are necessary. 2. Write-enable the corresponding track. 3. At the right moment, click on the routing destination to which you want to switch. The new destination is now active, and the switch has been recorded as automation data. 4. Continue to record destination changes for your project.
MixConsole MixConsole Window routing destination even though it is technically possible. Upmixing might lead to unexpected side effects. When performing an automatic downmix from 5.1 to stereo, the levels are adjusted as follows: Automatic Downmixing from 5.1 to stereo L L R 0.0 R 0.0 C Lfe Ls -3.01 -3.01 -6.02 -3.01 -3.01 Rs -6.02 Center and Lfe signals are split to L and R channels, Ls and Rs are sent to L and R respectively, but reduced in volume.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Adding Track Quick Controls PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Track Quick Controls to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the slots to open the Quick Controls selector. 3. Click a parameter to select it. RESULT The selected parameter is loaded and automatically activated as Track Quick Control.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) on page 700 Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel PROCEDURE 1. Position the mouse pointer at the top edge of the MixConsole, and activate Notepad. The Notepad section is shown above the fader section. 2. Select the channel for which you want to add notes, click in the notepad section and type in your notes. 3. To close the notepad, press Esc, or click in another section of the MixConsole.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA faders serve as remote controls for groups of channel faders in the MixConsole. VCA stands for Voltage-Controlled Amplifier. VCA faders were originally found on hardware mixing desks. They allowed the user to control the volume levels of several mixer channels with only one fader. To assign channel faders to a VCA fader, the respective channels must be physically connected with the VCA fader. In Cubase, the VCA fader function is based on the same concept.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Settings 1. Link group number 2. Link group name 3. VCA fader pop-up menu 4. Peak meter that displays the summed up level of all channel meters in the link group 5. Fader cap The VCA fader pop-up menu provides the following options: Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings. VCA Fader Controls Link Group: Shows the link group that the VCA fader controls. You can assign the VCA fader to a different link group.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Creating VCA Faders Creating VCA Faders You can create VCA faders in several ways. VCA faders can be created in the MixConsole and in the Project window. In the MixConsole, you have the following options: • You can create unassigned VCA faders in the fader section. They are placed at the right end of the fader section in front of the output channels and display no fader cap. The VCA faders can be assigned to link groups at a later stage.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups You can link channels and assign VCA faders to control them. PREREQUISITE You have selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Click Link on the MixConsole toolbar. 2. In the Link Group Settings dialog, click in the Name field to enter a name for the link group. 3. Activate Use VCA Fader. The Volume parameter is automatically deactivated. 4.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Nested VCA Faders RESULT The VCA fader is removed from the link group and is deleted from the list of channels. NOTE You can keep the VCA fader in the fader section. In this case, open the VCA fader pop-up menu, select VCA Fader Controls Link Group: , and select None. This removes only the VCA fader assignment. RELATED LINKS Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) on page 332 Nested VCA Faders VCA faders can control other VCA faders.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Automation For the channels, the original automation is adjusted by the volume level of the VCA fader track. EXAMPLE The VCA fader track automation affects an existing volume automation of an audio track. Automation of an audio track The lighter static value line displays the VCA fader automation that has not been written yet. VCA fader track automation The VCA fader track has a different automation curve that affects the automation of the audio track.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Automation 1. Automation curve of the VCA fader 2. Automation curve of the connected channel 3. Combined automation of VCA fader and connected channel. This is what you hear.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) The Control Room allows you to divide the studio environment into the performing area (studio) and the engineer/producer area (control room). To open the Control Room Mixer you have the following options: • To open the Control Room in a separate window, select Devices > Control Room Mixer. • To open the Control Room section in the MixConsole window, click Show/Hide Right Zone . NOTE The Control Room is not available in the lower zone MixConsole.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Output Routing RESULT The Control Room functions are available for use. If you disable the Control Room, the configuration is saved and will be restored when you reenable the Control Room. Output Routing For the Control Room to function correctly, you must assign the Main Mix bus to the set of outputs that contains the mix that you want to hear. If you only have one output bus, it automatically becomes the Main Mix.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Channels other busses or channels are shown in red on the Device Port pop-up menu. If you select a used port, its previous connection is lost. Phones Channel You can use the phones channel in the Control Room to listen to cue mixes. You can create 1 phones channel for a stereo configuration. It allows you to listen to the main mix or cue mixes or to external inputs on a pair of headphones. You can also use it for previewing.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Mixer You can also use talkback channels as input source for audio tracks and record them. You can route them to each cue channel and use different levels. You can insert effects like a compressor or limiter on talkback channels. This ensures that erratic levels do not disturb performers and that clear communication with everyone is possible.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Mixer External The External section allows you to use external inputs for monitoring external devices. It is only shown if you have added more than one external input in the VST Connections window. To switch to another external input, click the input name and select a new external input from the pop-up menu. Cue Channel The Cue Channel section allows you to set up cue channels for sending cue mixes. 1.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Mixer 1. Solo Left and Right Channels Allows you to solo the left and right channels. 2. Solo Front Channels Allows you to solo the front channels. 3. Solo Surround Channels Allows you to solo the surround channels. 4. Listen to Solo Channels on Center Channel Allows you to listen to all soloed speakers in the center channel. If the center channel is not available, the channels are distributed equally to the left and right. 5.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Mixer 1. Assign Downmix Preset Allows you to configure a downmix preset for the monitor that is selected in the Monitors section. 2. Select Output Configuration Allows you to select an output channel configuration. You can also select Open MixConvert to open the MixConvert plug-in. Phones The Phones section allows you to use the phones channel in the Control Room to listen to cue mixes. 1.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Mixer Control Room Channel The Control Room channel is the representation of the bus that is set up as the Main Mix bus on the Outputs tab in the VST Connections window. The following section contains a description of the individual controls. 1. Activate Control Room Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the Control Room channel. 2. Signal Level Allows you to set the volume for the Control Room output.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Mixer Activate this to lower the Control Room level by a fixed amount. This allows a quick reduction in monitor volume without disturbing the current monitor level. Clicking DIM again returns the monitor level to the previous setting. 3. Use Reference Level Enable this button to set the Control Room level to the reference level specified in the Preferences dialog (VST–Control Room page).
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Setup When Talkback is active, this slider controls how much the output of all the channels in the Control Room Mixer is reduced, to prevent unwanted feedback. Control Room Setup The Control Room setup contains additional settings for the channels. • To open the Control Room setup, click the Setup tab at the bottom right of the Control Room. The Control Room setup is divided into a number of sections that you open by clicking their headers.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Setup Input Gain Setting up the input gain can be useful in the following situations: • To balance the level of external inputs, for example, CD players and other sources to the Main Mix level, for A/B comparisons. • To balance the level of your monitor systems, so that switching between sets of speakers does not change the playback volume. Input Phase Reversing the input phase can be useful for external inputs and monitor speaker outputs.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Setting Up a Cue Mix This helps protect performers’ hearing and ensures that everyone can be heard over the talkback microphone. • Use the monitor inserts for surround decoding or brickwall limiting to protect sensitive monitor speakers. Each monitor channel has a set of eight inserts, all of which are post Control Room fader.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level Disable Cue Sends Allows you to disable the cue sends of the selected channels. Reset Cue Sends Allows you to deactivate the cue sends, to change the send level of all selected channels to 0 dB, and to set the signal source to post-fader. This way, any changes to the main mix also change the cue mix. To raise the level of individual cue channels, raise the level on that channel.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Cubase provides a master meter that works as a multi-channel true peak meter, and a loudness meter that allows you to measure the loudness in compliance with the loudness recommendation R 128 of the European Broadcasting Union (EBU). Metering Cubase provides a master meter and a loudness meter that can be shown to the right of the fader section in the MixConsole window or in a separate window in the Control Room Mixer.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Lets you select a scale according to different broadcast standards (Digital, DIN, EBU, British, Nordic, K-20, K-14, or K-12). The headroom is indicated by red lines in the meter scale. 3. Alignment level standards Lets you select an alignment level (offset) for your scale. This is unavailable for digital and K-System scales. The broadcast meter scales DIN, EBU, Nordic, and British have a default alignment level of -18 dBFS. 4.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement • Momentary Loudness Maximum value of all momentary loudness values that are measured every 100 ms in an audio range of 400 ms. Loudness Range The loudness range measures the dynamic range over the whole title in LU (Loudness Units). It reports the ratio between the loudest and the quietest non-silent sections. The audio is divided into small blocks.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement 1. Control Room view Activates the Control Room section. 2. Loudness meter Shows the Integrated value as a triangle in the left meter scale and the Short-Term value as a triangle in the right meter scale. 3. Measure Loudness Activates the loudness measurement. 4. Switch between LU and LUFS Switches the meter scale between LUFS (absolute values) and LU (relative values). 5.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement 9. Integrated Shows the average loudness measured from start to stop. The period of measurement is shown in the Time display. The recommended value for the integrated loudness is -23 LUFS. This absolute value is the reference point for the relative LU scale where -23 LUFS equals 0 LU. 10. Range Shows the dynamic range of the audio measured from start to stop. This value helps you to decide how much dynamic compression you can apply.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the short-term loudness. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red. 4. Integrated Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the integrated loudness. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red. 5.
Audio Effects Cubase comes with a number of effect plug-ins included that you can use to process audio, group, instrument, and ReWire channels. This chapter contains general details about how to assign, use, and organize effect plugins. The effects and their parameters are described in the separate PDF document Plug-in Reference. Insert Effects and Send Effects You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects.
Audio Effects Insert Effects and Send Effects • The Inserts section in the Inspector. Send Effects Send effects can be added to FX channel tracks, and the audio data to be processed can be routed to the effect. This way, the send effects remain outside the audio channel’s signal path. Each audio channel has 8 sends, each of which can be freely routed to an effect (or to a chain of effects).
Audio Effects Insert Effects and Send Effects Smart Plug-In Processing Smart plug-in processing is a technology that allows to disengage the processing for plugins when no signal is present. This reduces the CPU load on silent passages, and allows you to load more effects. To activate smart plug-in processing, select File > Preferences and on the VST-Plug-ins page, activate Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Insert Effects Insert effects can be inserted in the signal chain of an audio channel. This way, the whole channel signal passes through the effect. You can add up to 8 different insert effects independently for each audio-related channel (audio track, group channel track, FX channel track, instrument channel or ReWire channel) or output bus. NOTE You can process mono audio tracks through stereo insert effects.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Rack Settings on page 331 Adding Insert Effects If you add insert effects to audio channels, the audio is routed through the insert effects. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track. 2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings . The Channel Settings window for the audio channel opens. 3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the selector.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels If you add insert effects to group channels you can process several audio tracks through the same effect. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Group Channel to add a group channel track. 2. In the Inspector for the group track, open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select the desired output bus. 3. In the Inspector for the group track, open the Inserts section. 4.
Audio Effects Insert Effects 3. Drag the insert effect, and drop it on an insert slot. RESULT The insert effect is removed from the source slot and placed on the destination slot. If the destination slot already contains an insert effect, this effect is moved to the next insert slot. Deactivating Insert Effects If you want to listen to a track without having it processed by an effect, but do not want to remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can deactivate it.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RESULT The effect is bypassed, but still processing in the background. Removing Insert Effects PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track that contains the insert effect that you want to remove. 2. In the Inspector, click Select Insert. 3. In the effect selector, select No Effect. RESULT The insert effect is removed from the audio channel. Freezing Insert Effects Freezing an audio track and its insert effects allows you to reduce processor power.
Audio Effects Insert Effects • Windows: within the Project folder • Mac OS: User/Documents In the MixConsole, the frozen audio channel is indicated by a snow flake symbol above the channel name. You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings and adjust the effect sends. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To unfreeze a frozen track, click Freeze again.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RESULT The effect is routed through different channels of the audio. NOTE To route a stereo plug-in through all 6 channels of a 5.1 track, add 3 instances of it and use different speaker channels for each instance. RELATED LINKS Routing Editor on page 405 Routing Editor The Routing Editor allows you to set up to what speaker channels the effect is applied to. The Routing Editor shows the channels in the current configuration, with signals passing from top to bottom. 1.
Audio Effects Send Effects Routing Connections In the Routing Editor you can set up the routing connections. NOTE You can only make settings in the Routing Editor if you route multi-channel audio through an effect that supports less channels. The following connections are possible: Routing Connection The audio on the speaker channel is routed through the effect channel and processed by the effect. Bypass Connection The audio on the speaker channel passes the effect without being processed.
Audio Effects Send Effects To do this, you must create FX channel tracks. RELATED LINKS FX Channel Tracks on page 407 FX Channel Tracks You can use FX channel tracks as routing destinations for audio sends. The audio is sent to the FX channel and through any insert effects set up for it. • You can add several insert effects to an FX channel. The signal passes through the effects in series, from the top downward. • You can rename FX channel tracks as any other tracks.
Audio Effects Send Effects RESULT An FX channel track is added to the track list and the selected effect is loaded into the first insert effect slot of the FX channel. Adding Insert Effects to FX Channel Tracks You can add insert effects to FX channel tracks. PREREQUISITE You have added an FX channel track and set up the correct output bus in the Output Routing pop-up menu. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list for the FX channel track, click Edit Channel Settings.
Audio Effects Send Effects RESULT The audio is routed through the FX channel. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK In the Channel Settings window for the audio channel you can hold down Alt and doubleclick to show the send destination. If you have routed the send to an FX channel, the effect control panel is opened. RELATED LINKS Adding FX Channel Tracks on page 407 Pre/Post Fader Sends You can send the signal from the audio channel to the FX channel before or after the audio channel volume fader.
Audio Effects Send Effects • To move a send to post-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, right-click a send and select Move to Post-Fader. The Pre/Post Fader button indicates that the send is in post-fader position. NOTE If you activate Mute Pre-Send when Mute in the Preferences dialog on the VST page, sends in pre-fader mode are muted if you mute their channels. Setting Pan for the Sends (Cubase Pro only) PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track. 2.
Audio Effects Send Effects The send panners will then follow the pan for the channel, making the stereo imaging as clear and true as possible. NOTE In the Preferences dialog on the VST page, you can set this as a default behavior for all channels. 5. Click and drag the pan control for the send. NOTE You can reset the pan control to the center position by Ctrl/Cmd-clicking on the pan control. RELATED LINKS Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) on page 599 Setting Level for the Sends PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input NOTE To determine how much of the signal from the FX channel is sent to the output bus, open the Channel Settings window for the FX channel track and adjust the effect return level. Side-Chain Input Many VST 3 effects feature a side-chain input. Side-chaining allows you to use the output of one track to control the action of an effect on another track.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input The events on the duplicated track are only used to reduce the volume of the effect that is added to the original track. 3. Select the original track. 4. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section and select Delay > PingPongDelay, for example. The control panel for the effect opens. 5. Make the desired effect settings for the effect, and activate Activate Side-Chain. 6. In the track list, select the duplicated track. 7.
Audio Effects Dither Effects The effect is loaded and the effect control panel opens. 4. Make the desired effect settings for the effect, and activate Activate Side-Chain. 5. Select the bass drum track. 6. In the Inspector, open the Sends section. 7. Click the first effect slot and select the side-chain node for the Compressor effect that you set up for the bass guitar track. 8. Click Activate Send, and adjust the Send level.
Audio Effects External Effects (Cubase Pro only) External Effects (Cubase Pro only) You can integrate external effect devices into the sequencer signal flow by setting up external FX busses. An external FX bus is a combination of outputs (sends) and inputs (returns) on your audio hardware, along with a few additional settings. All external FX busses you have created are available on the effect pop-up menus.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 8. Preset Management Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset. 9. Functions menu Opens a menu with specific functions and settings. NOTE For detailed information about the included effects and their parameters, see the separate PDF document Plug-in Reference. Fine-Tuning Effect Settings You can take your effect parameter settings as a starting point for further fine-tuning, and then compare the new settings with the original settings.
Audio Effects Effect Presets • Mac OS: /Users//Library/Audio/Presets// RELATED LINKS Loading Effect Presets on page 418 Loading Insert Presets on page 420 Preset Browser The preset browser allows you to select a VST preset for the loaded effect. • To open the preset browser, click the preset browser field in the effect control panel. NOTE The preset browser contains the Results, and the Previewer sections.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Loading Effect Presets Most VST effect plug-ins come with a number of useful presets that you can instantly select. PREREQUISITE You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an FX channel, and the effect control panel is open. PROCEDURE 1. Perform one of the following actions: • Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Saving Effect Presets You can save your effect settings as presets for further use. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu. 2. Select Save Preset 3. The Save Preset pane opens. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. 4. Optional: Click New Folder to add a subfolder inside the effect preset folder. 5. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector in the bottom left corner of the pane and define attributes for the preset. 6.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Copying and Pasting Presets Between Effects You can copy and paste effect presets between different instances of the same plug-in. PROCEDURE 1. Open the control panel for the effect that you want to copy. 2. Right-click the control panel, and select Copy Setting from the context menu. 3. Open another instance of the same effect. 4. Right-click the control panel, and select Paste Setting from the context menu.
Audio Effects Plug-In Information Window 3. On the Inserts tab, click Preset Management and select Load FX Chain Preset. 4. Select an insert preset. 5. Double-click to apply the preset and close the pane. RESULT The effects of the insert effect preset are loaded and any plug-ins that were previously loaded for the track are removed. Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts rack. PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Effects Plug-In Information Window Update Re-scans the designated plug-in folders for updated plug-in information. The following columns are available: Active Allows you to activate or deactivate a plug-in. Instances The number of plug-in instances that are used in Cubase. Name The name of the plug-in. Vendor The manufacturer of the plug-in. File The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension. Path The path in which the plug-in file is located. Category The category of each plug-in.
Audio Effects Plug-In Information Window NOTE A plug-in may be in use even if it is not activated in the left column. The left column only determines whether or not the plug-in is visible on the effect selectors. Exporting Plug-In Information Files You can save plug-in information as an XML file, for example, for archiving purposes or troubleshooting. • The plug-in information file contains information on the installed/available plug-ins, their version, vendor, etc.
Audio Processing and Functions If you process audio in Cubase, you can always undo changes or revert to the original version. This is possible because processing does not affect the actual audio files. If you process an event or a selection range, the following happens: • A new audio file is created in the Edits folder, within your project folder. This file contains the processed audio, and the processed section of the audio clip refers to it. • The original file remains unaffected.
Audio Processing and Functions Envelope • Pre/Post-Crossfade Preview, Process, and Cancel buttons The preview, process, and cancel buttons have the following functionalities: Preview button Allows you to listen to the result of the processing with the current settings until you click the button again, or until you press Space. You can make adjustments during Preview playback. Process button Allows you to perform the processing and close the dialog. NOTE You can also press Enter or Return.
Audio Processing and Functions Fade In and Fade Out Curve Kind buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation (left button), Damped Spline Interpolation (middle button) or Linear Interpolation (right button). Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone. Click the curve to add points, and click and drag existing points to change the shape.
Audio Processing and Functions Gain 5. Presets In this section you can set up presets for fade in or fade out curves that you want to apply to other events or clips. 6. • To save a preset, click Store, type in a name, and click OK. • To apply a preset, select it from the pop-up menu. • To rename the selected preset, double-click the name and type in a new one. • To remove a preset, select it from the pop-up menu and click Remove.
Audio Processing and Functions Merge Clipboard Merge Clipboard This function allows you to mix audio from the clipboard into the audio that you selected for processing. IMPORTANT This function is only available if you cut or copy a range of audio in the Sample Editor. The available options are: Sources mix Allows you to specify a mix ratio between the original audio that you have selected for processing, and the copied audio from the clipboard.
Audio Processing and Functions Normalize Min. Opening Time Allows you to set the minimum opening time of the gate. If the gate opens and closes too often when processing material that varies rapidly in level, try raising this value. Release Time Allows you to set the time it takes for the gate to close fully after the audio level has dropped below the threshold level. Linked Channels This is available for stereo audio only.
Audio Processing and Functions Pitch Shift Phase Reverse on This pop-up menu is only available for stereo audio files. It allows you to specify which channels are phase-reversed. RELATED LINKS Pre/Post-Crossfade on page 425 Pitch Shift This function allows you to change the pitch of the audio with or without affecting its length. You can also create harmonies by specifying several pitches or apply pitch shift based on an envelope curve.
Audio Processing and Functions Pitch Shift Volume/Amplitude Allows you to lower the volume of the pitch-shifted sound. This is not available if Time Correction is activated. Multi Shift Activate this to specify several transpose keys and create multi-part harmonies. If the intervals you add make up a standard chord, this chord is displayed to the right. • To include the original, untransposed sound, click the root key in the keyboard display so that it is displayed in blue.
Audio Processing and Functions Pitch Shift Envelope-Based Pitch Shift When the Envelope tab is selected, you can specify an envelope curve as a base for the pitch shift. Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope curve over the waveform image of the audio selected for processing. Envelope curve points above the center line indicate positive pitch shift, curve points below the center line indicate negative pitch shift.
Audio Processing and Functions Remove DC Offset RELATED LINKS MPEX on page 447 Example Let’s say that you want to create a pitchbend effect, so that the pitch is raised linearly by exactly 2 semitones in a specific part of the selected audio. PROCEDURE 1. Click Reset to remove all curve points. 2. Click Linear Interpolation to select a linear curve. 3. Set Range to 2 semitones or higher. 4. Set a starting point for the pitchbend by adding a curve point. 5.
Audio Processing and Functions Resample Resample The Resample function allows you to change the length, tempo and pitch of an event. If you resample to a higher sample rate, the event gets longer and the audio plays back at a slower speed with a lower pitch. If you resample to a lower sample rate, the event gets shorter and the audio plays back at a faster speed with a higher pitch. File Sample Rate Shows the original sample rate of the event.
Audio Processing and Functions Time Stretch Subtract Subtracts the left channel information from the right. This function is typically used for karaoke background as it removes the centered mono material from a stereo signal. Time Stretch This function allows you to change the length and tempo of the selected audio without affecting the pitch. The available options are: Define Bars section If you use the tempo setting, you can set the length of the selected audio and the time signature in this section.
Audio Processing and Functions Applying Plug-Ins (Cubase Pro only) Resulting Length section These values change automatically if you adjust the Time Stretch Ratio to stretch the audio so that it fits within a specific time span or tempo. • Samples The resulting length in samples. • Seconds The resulting length in seconds. • BPM The resulting tempo in beats per minute. For this to work, the Original Length must be specified.
Audio Processing and Functions Applying Plug-Ins (Cubase Pro only) NOTE If you apply an effect to mono audio material, only the left side of the effect’s stereo output is applied. RELATED LINKS Audio Effects on page 396 Common settings and features on page 424 The Process Plug-In Dialog The process plug-in dialog contains settings for the actual processing that are common to all plug-ins and described below.
Audio Processing and Functions Offline Process History Offline Process History The Offline Process History dialog allows you to remove and modify audio processing. To open the Offline Process History dialog, select Audio > Offline Process History. NOTE Processes that have no settings cannot be modified. Also, processes that change the length of the clip (such as Cut, Insert, or Time Stretch) can only be modified if they are the most recent processing. This is indicated by an icon in the Status column. 1.
Audio Processing and Functions Freeze Edits In the Pool, processed clips are indicated by a waveform symbol in the Status column. 2. Select Audio > Offline Process History. 3. Select the operation in the list that you want to edit by clicking on it. 4. Perform one of the following actions: 5. • Click Modify to modify the settings of the selected processing. • Select a function from the pop-up menu and click Replace By to replace the selected operation, the selected processing function, or effect.
Audio Processing and Functions Detect Silence 3. Perform one of the following actions: • Select Replace to apply all edits to the original audio file. • Select New File to leave the original audio file unaffected and to create a new file in the Audio folder within the project folder. RESULT The audio clip refers to a new, single audio file, and the list in the Offline Process History dialog for the clip is cleared.
Audio Processing and Functions Detect Silence You can scroll the waveform by using the scrollbar, or by using the mouse wheel. You can adjust the Open Threshold and Close Threshold values by moving the squares at the beginning and at the end of the audio file. Open Threshold When the audio level exceeds this value, the function opens and lets the sound pass. Audio material below the set level is detected as silence.
Audio Processing and Functions Detect Silence Compute Analyzes the audio event and redraws the waveform display to indicate which sections are considered silent. The number of detected regions is displayed above the Compute button. Auto Activate this option to analyze the audio event and update the display automatically every time you change the settings. NOTE If you are working with very long files, consider deactivating the Auto option as this may slow down the process.
Audio Processing and Functions Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer The Spectrum Analyzer analyzes the selected audio, computes the average spectrum, displays it in a two-dimensional graph, with frequency range on the x-axis and level distribution on the y-axis. Spectrum Analyzer Settings To open the Spectrum Analyzer, select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer. The Spectrum Analyzer shows the following settings: Size in Samples Determines a size for the analysis blocks of the audio.
Audio Processing and Functions Spectrum Analyzer Frequency display Allows you to compare the levels between frequencies. Move the pointer to one of the frequencies, right-click and move the pointer to the second frequency. The difference in level between the positions is displayed and labeled D in the upper right corner. NOTE For stereo audio the display in the upper right corner shows the values for the left channel. To see the right channel values, hold down Shift.
Audio Processing and Functions Statistics Analyzing the Audio Spectrum PROCEDURE 1. Select an audio clip, an event, or a range. 2. Select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer. 3. Adjust the settings or use the default values. The default values give good results in most situations. 4. Click Process. RESULT The spectrum is computed and displayed as a graph.
Audio Processing and Functions Statistics Peak Amplitude Shows the largest amplitude in dB. True Peak Shows the maximum absolute level of the audio signal waveform in the continuous time domain. DC Offset Shows the amount of DC offset as a percentage and in dB. Resolution Shows the current calculated audio resolution. Estimated Pitch Shows the estimated pitch. Sample Rate Shows the sample rate. Average RMS (AES-17) Shows the average loudness in accordance with the AES-17 standard. Max.
Audio Processing and Functions Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms RELATED LINKS Remove DC Offset on page 433 Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms In Cubase, time stretching and pitch shifting algorithms are used for numerous operations like for the Time Stretch and Pitch Shift offline processes, in the Sample Editor, or for the Flatten function. Depending on the feature, some or all of the following algorithm presets are available.
Audio Processing and Functions Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms MPEX – Solo Fast For single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Solo Musical Higher quality for single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Poly Fast For monophonic and polyphonic material. This is the fastest setting that gives still very good results. You can use this for drum loops, mixes, chords. MPEX – Poly Musical For monophonic and polyphonic material. This is the recommended MPEX quality setting.
Audio Processing and Functions Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Standard – Solo For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals, monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode preserves the timbre of the audio.
Rendering to Audio You can render existing material to new audio material. You can render the following: • Audio tracks • Instrument tracks • Audio events or parts on audio tracks • MIDI parts on instrument tracks • Range selections on audio or instrument tracks • Range selections on multiple audio or instrument tracks IMPORTANT The rendering function does not support side-chain routing. Render Tracks The Render Tracks dialog allows you to customize the track render settings.
Rendering to Audio Render Tracks As Separate Events One or more tracks are created. These contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events One or more tracks are created. These contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event One or more tracks are created. These contain the events/parts that are combined to one event/part. Every combination is saved as a separate audio file.
Rendering to Audio Render Tracks • The channels that you want to mix down are routed to different targets. • One of the channels has a send. • One track with multiple outputs and either Dry (Transfer Channel Settings), Complete Signal Path, or Complete Signal Path + Master FX are selected. Tail Size Allows you to set a tail size in seconds or bars and beats for the rendered files. This adds time at the end of the rendered file to allow reverb and delay tails to fully fade out.
Rendering to Audio Render Selection Rendering Tracks You can render selected tracks either via the Render Tracks dialog or by directly using the Render (with Current Settings) command. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or more audio, MIDI, or instrument tracks. 2. Select Edit > Render in Place > Render Settings. 3. Specify the render options. 4. Click Render. RESULT All selected source material is processed according to your render settings.
Rendering to Audio Render Selection As Block Events One or more tracks are created. These contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event One or more tracks are created. These contain the events/parts that are combined to one event/part. Every combination is saved as a separate audio file. Dry (Transfer Channel Settings) If this option is activated, all effects and panner settings are copied to the rendered new audio tracks.
Rendering to Audio Render Selection Bit Resolution Allows you to set the bit resolution for the resulting material to 16 bit, 24 bit, or 32 bit float. Name Allows you to enter a custom name for the rendered files. To do this, unlock this option by clicking the lock icon. Path Allows you to select a custom folder to which the resulting .wav files are rendered. Keep Source Events Unchanged If this option is selected, the source events remain unchanged.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, and by processing audio. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. This is useful, if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Window Sample Editor in Lower Zone 457
Sample Editor Toolbar The Sample Editor is divided into several sections: 1. Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio. 2. Info Line Shows information about the audio. 3. Overview Line Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. 4. Inspector Contains audio editing tools and functions. NOTE The Editor Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window. 5.
Sample Editor Toolbar Static Buttons Solo Editor Solos the selected audio during playback. Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. View Options Show Audio Event Highlights the section corresponding to the edited event in the waveform display and the overview line. NOTE This button is not available if you opened the audio event from the Pool.
Sample Editor Toolbar Preview Audition Plays back the edited audio. Audition Loop loops the playback until you deactivate the Audition icon. The Audition Volume slider allows you to adjust the volume. Tool Buttons Range Selection Allows you to select ranges. Zoom Allows you to zoom in the waveform display. To zoom out, hold Alt while clicking. Draw Allows you to edit audio. Play Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release the mouse button.
Sample Editor Toolbar Snap Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. Musical Information Musical Mode Locks audio clips to the project tempo by using realtime time stretching. Musical Information Displays the estimated length of your audio file, the estimated tempo, the time signature, and the warp algorithm. These values are important for using Musical Mode. VariAudio Segment Colors VariAudio Segment Colors Allows you to select a color scheme for VariAudio segments.
Sample Editor Toolbar Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Auto-Scroll on page 230 Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing on page 230 Locating Positions with the Scrub Tool The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in the audio. PROCEDURE 1. On the toolbar, activate the Scrub tool. 2. Click in the waveform display and keep the mouse button pressed. The project cursor moves to the position where you clicked. 3.
Sample Editor Info Line RESULT A range selection covering the edited section is automatically applied. NOTE Cubase Pro only: The Draw tool cannot be used when the VariAudio section is open. Info Line The info line shows information about the audio clip, such as the audio format and the selection range. • To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or deactivate the Info Line option.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector The on/off status of the overview line in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other. 1. Event Start Shows the start of the audio event if Show Audio Event is activated on the toolbar. 2. Selection Shows which section is selected in the waveform display. 3. Event End Shows the end of the audio event if Show Audio Event is activated on the toolbar. 4.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector Definition The Definition section allows you to adjust the audio grid and define the musical context of your audio. You can use the available functions to match an audio file or audio loop to the project tempo. • To open the Definition section, click its tab in the Inspector. AudioWarp The AudioWarp section allows you to perform timing settings for your audio.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector Range The Range section allows you to edit ranges and selections or create a sampler track from the selected range. • To open the Range section, click its tab in the Inspector. Select Opens a menu with functions to select ranges. Start Shows the start position of the selection range. End Shows the end position of the selection range. Length Shows the length of the selection range. Zoom Opens a menu with the zoom functions for ranges.
Sample Editor Ruler Ruler The ruler shows the timeline and display format of the project, the project tempo grid. The ruler is located above the waveform display. It is always shown. When the Definition section is open, an additional ruler is shown below the project tempo grid. It displays the musical structure of the audio file, the audio tempo grid. Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip.
Sample Editor Waveform Display 1. Level Scale Indicates the amplitude of the audio. 2. Level Scale options Allow you to select whether the level is shown as percentage or in dB. 3. Ruler Shows the project tempo grid. 4. Audio waveform Shows the waveform image of the selected audio. 5. Half Level Axis To show the half level axis, open the audio waveform context menu and select Show Half Level Axis. NOTE To set up a wave image style open the Preferences dialog and select Event Display > Audio.
Sample Editor Range Editing Zoom Out Zooms out one step, centering on the project cursor. Zoom Full Zooms out so that the whole clip is visible in the waveform display. Zoom to Selection Zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the waveform display. Zoom to Selection (Horiz.) Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the waveform display. Zoom to Event Zooms in so that the waveform display shows the section of the clip corresponding to the edited audio event.
Sample Editor Range Editing 2. Click at the position in the waveform display where you want the range to start and drag to the position, where you want the range to end. 3. Optional: Perform one of the following actions to resize the selection range: • Drag the left or the right edge of the selection to a new position. • Hold down Shift and click at a new position. RESULT The selected range is highlighted in the waveform display.
Sample Editor Range Editing Select Menu on the Edit Menu If you select Edit > Select, the following functions are available: All Selects the whole clip. None Deselects everything. In Loop Sets the audio between the left and the right locators. From Start to Cursor Selects the audio between the clips start and the project cursor. From Cursor to End Selects the audio between the project cursor and the end of the clip. This option is available if the project cursor is positioned between the clip boundaries.
Sample Editor Range Editing 2. Right-click the selected range and select Audio > Bounce Selection. 3. Perform one of the following actions: • Click Replace if you want to replace the original. • Click No if you want to keep the original. RESULT A new Sample Editor window opens with the new clip. It refers to the same audio file as the original clip, but it contains the audio corresponding to the selection range only.
Sample Editor Regions List Delete Removes the selected range from the clip. The section to the right of the range is moved to the left to fill the gap. Insert Silence Inserts a silent section with the same length as the current range selection at the selection start. The selected range is not replaced, but moved to the right. Event or Range as Region Creates a region from the selected range.
Sample Editor Regions List 1. Region Start/Region End Shows the start and end of the region in the audio waveform. 2. Add Region Allows you to create a region of the current range selection. 3. Remove Region Allows you to remove the selected region. 4. Select Region If you select a region in the list and click this button above, the corresponding section of the audio clip is selected (as if you had selected it with the Range Selection tool) and zoomed.
Sample Editor Regions List PROCEDURE • In the Hitpoints section, click Create Regions. RESULT Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor. Adjusting Start and End Positions of Regions PREREQUISITE You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated the Regions option. You have created regions. PROCEDURE • Perform one of the following actions: • Drag the Region Start or Region End handle in the waveform display.
Sample Editor Snap Point 2. Drag the region to the desired position in the Project window. RESULT An event is created from the region. Snap Point The snap point is a marker within an audio event that can be used as a reference position. • To show the snap point, activate Show Audio Event on the toolbar. The snap point is set at the audio event start. But you can move it to another relevant position in the audio.
Sample Editor Snap Point Adjusting the Snap Point PREREQUISITE The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor and Show Audio Event is activated on the toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: On the Sample Editor toolbar, select the Scrub tool. This allows you to audition the audio while setting the snap point. 2. Move the mouse pointer over the snap point, and drag it to the desired position in the audio event. The mouse pointer becomes a hand symbol and a tooltip indicates that you can set the snap point.
Hitpoints Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio. NOTE All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically detects hitpoints.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Cubase automatically detects hitpoints. NOTE If your audio file is very long, this may take a while. 2. Select the audio event in the Project window and make sure the zoom factor is high enough. RESULT The calculated hitpoints for the selected event are shown in the Project window. NOTE You can disable automatic hitpoint detection by selecting File > Preferences > Editing > Audio and by deactivating Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Editing Hitpoints Manually It is absolutely crucial for any further editing that the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. Therefore, if the automatic hitpoint detection does not meet your expectations, you can edit hitpoints manually. PREREQUISITE The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor and in the Hitpoints section hitpoints are filtered by their peaks, by their distance, or by their musical position. PROCEDURE 1.
Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window The mouse pointer changes to a double arrow and the tooltip Move Hitpoint is shown. Moved hitpoints are locked by default. 7. To make sure that a hitpoint is not accidentally filtered out, lock it by pointing at it and clicking. The tooltip Lock Hitpoint is shown. RESULT The hitpoints are edited according to your settings. NOTE To reset a hitpoint to its original state, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt until the tooltip Enable/Unlock Hitpoints is shown and click.
Hitpoints Slices • The recording quality is good. • The recording is free of crosstalk signals. • The audio is free of smearing effects like delays, for example. Slicing Audio Slicing audio is useful if you want to change tempo and timing of the audio without affecting its pitch and quality. PREREQUISITE The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. NOTE When slicing audio, all events referring to the edited clip are also replaced.
Hitpoints Slices PROCEDURE • Select the folder track, and select Audio > Hitpoints > Divide Audio Events at Hitpoints. RESULT The audio of all tracks in the folder track is sliced. RELATED LINKS Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks (Cubase Pro only) on page 262 Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) on page 211 Slices and the Project Tempo The project tempo affects how the sliced audio is played back.
Hitpoints Creating a Groove Quantize Map Creating a Groove Quantize Map You can use hitpoints to create a groove quantize map. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to extract the timing is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE • In the Hitpoints section, click Create Groove. RESULT The groove is extracted from the audio event and automatically selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar.
Hitpoints Creating Events RESULT Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor. RELATED LINKS Creating Regions on page 474 Creating Events You can create events at hitpoint positions. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to create events is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE • In the Hitpoints section, click Create Events. RESULT Events are created between two hitpoint positions.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes Creating MIDI Notes You can export hitpoints to a MIDI part containing a MIDI note for each hitpoint. This allows you to double, replace, or enrich drum hits by triggering sounds of a VST instrument. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to create MIDI notes is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE 1. In the Hitpoints section, click Create MIDI Notes. 2.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes Destination Allows you to select a destination: • To place the MIDI part on the first selected MIDI or instrument track, select First Selected Track. NOTE Any MIDI parts from previous conversions on this track will be deleted. • To create a new MIDI track for the MIDI part, select New MIDI Track. • To copy the MIDI part to the clipboard, select Project Clipboard.
Tempo Matching Audio In this chapter, warping, that is, tempo or time correction of audio by realtime time stretching is described. NOTE All tempo matching operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. The following functions are described: • Stretch to Project Tempo Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo. • Musical Mode Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo.
Tempo Matching Audio Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo The algorithm preset affects warp changes in Musical Mode, FreeWarp, and Swing. Cubase Pro only: For the VariAudio warping and pitching features Standard – Solo is applied automatically. Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Audio File, select the audio loop that you want to import, and click OK. 2. Select the audio loop in the project. 3.
Tempo Matching Audio Musical Mode 4. On the toolbar, verify that the length in bars corresponds to the length of the imported audio file. If necessary, listen to your audio and enter the correct length in bars and beats. 5. On the toolbar, open the Algorithm pop-up menu, and select a preset. 6. Listen to the loop and if necessary correct the Bars and Beats values on the toolbar. 7. Activate Musical Mode. RESULT The loop is warped and stretched to the project tempo. The rulers reflect the change.
Tempo Matching Audio Auto Adjust RESULT This offsets the grid positions and creates a swing or shuffle feel. If you selected 1/2, every second position in the grid is offset. Auto Adjust The Auto Adjust function is useful if you do not know the tempo of your audio file, or if its beat is not straight. It allows you to extract a definition grid from your audio before tempo matching it to the project tempo with the Musical Mode.
Tempo Matching Audio Manual Adjust Manual Adjust The Manual Adjust function is useful if you need to manually modify the grid and tempo of your audio file. This is the case if the extraction of a definition grid with the Auto Adjust function did not bring satisfying results, for example. The Manual Adjust function allows you to correct the local definition grid. After this, you can match it with the project tempo using Musical Mode.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp 8. For incorrect bar positions, click and drag the green vertical line to the position of the first downbeat of the following bar and release the mouse button. This also moves the bars to the right. The area to the left remains unaffected. 9. Move the mouse pointer over the grid lines for single beats. The tooltip Set Beat Position and a blue vertical line are shown. 10. Click and drag the grid line to align single, incorrect beat positions and release the mouse button.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp A stretch factor higher than 1.0 indicates that the audio preceding the warp marker is stretched, a stretch factor lower than 1.0 indicates that the audio is compressed. NOTE The Free Warp tool snaps to hitpoint positions and warp markers. Correcting the Timing with the Free Warp Tool PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the audio clip or event in the Project window to open it in the Sample Editor. 2. On the toolbar, activate Snap to Zero Crossing.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp Correcting Warp Marker Positions PROCEDURE 1. In the AudioWarp section, activate Free Warp. 2. In the Sample Editor, click the warp marker handle and drag it to a new position. A tooltip is shown to indicate that you can drag to correct the warp marker position. RESULT The warp marker moves to the new position and the audio is stretched or compressed accordingly. Deleting Warp Markers PROCEDURE 1. In the AudioWarp section, activate Free Warp. 2.
Tempo Matching Audio Flattening Realtime Processing Flattening Realtime Processing You can flatten warp modifications. This is useful if you want to reduce the CPU load, optimize the sound quality of the processing, or apply any offline processing. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio events that you want to process. 2. Perform one of the following actions: • Select Audio > Realtime Processing > Flatten Realtime Processing. • In the Process section of the Sample Editor, click Flatten.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) The VariAudio features in Cubase allow you to edit pitch, correct timing and intonation of individual notes in monophonic vocal recordings. Any modifications to the audio material can be undone. NOTE All VariAudio operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. NOTE The VariAudio features are optimized for monophonic recordings of vocals. Other monophonic recordings, such as saxophone, may work well.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segmenting Monophonic Audio • All offline processes in the Process submenu of the Audio menu, except Envelope, Fade In Fade Out, Normalize, and Silence. • Effect processes in the submenu Audio > Plug-ins. • Cutting, pasting, deleting or drawing in the Sample Editor. Segmenting Monophonic Audio To be able to edit the pitch and correct the timing of monophonic recordings, Cubase must analyze the audio and split it into segments. PROCEDURE 1.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segments and Gaps Segments and Gaps Cubase automatically analyzes the audio and splits it into segments that are shown in the waveform image. To understand and edit the segmentation, the following concepts are crucial: 1. Pitch position The pitch position of the segments is indicated by the piano keyboard to the left of the waveform. Pitches represent the perceived fundamental frequency of the sound. The average pitch of a segment is calculated from its micro-pitch curve. 2.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments • Changing the start and end points of segments by resizing segments. • Changing the length of segments by cutting or glueing segments. • Moving segments on the timeline by dragging them to the left or right. • Deleting segments. Navigating and Zooming You can navigate through the segments and zoom in on them. This makes manual editing more comfortable.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments Changing the Start and End Point of Segments If the start and end points of the segments do not match with the waveform envelope, you can change them. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Segments tool in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Compare the start and end positions of the segments with the waveform envelope for each note. 2.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments PROCEDURE 1. Compare the segments with the waveform envelope for each note. 2. Optional: Select one or several segments and on the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Audition to audition the segments. 3. Perform one of the following actions: • If a segment includes more than a note, move the mouse pointer over the lower border of the segment and click to cut the segment.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments 3. Move the mouse pointer over the upper border of the segment, click and drag to the left or to the right. NOTE You can only move the segment until the boundaries of the next segment. Segments cannot overlap. RESULT The segment is moved. The average pitch of the segment is recalculated. NOTE Changing the length of a segment may lead to different average pitch and therefore to a pitch change.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer over the lower border of a segment. An x symbol is shown in the segment. 2. Click the x symbol. RESULT The segment is grayed out to indicate that it is muted. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can unmute the segment by clicking the x symbol again. Segment Colors You can select a color scheme for VariAudio segments.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes Chord Track Segments that match the corresponding chord or scale events on the chord track get a specific color. Pitch Changes The VariAudio features allow you to change the pitch of audio segments for corrective purposes but also creatively. By changing note pitches you can change the melody of the original audio with or without preserving a natural sound. Pitch changes include the following: • Raising or lowering pitches. • Quantizing pitches.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural. You cannot choose note pitches above C5 and below E0. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to your settings. Changing Pitches by MIDI Input You can change segment pitches by pressing a key on your MIDI keyboard or by using the Virtual Keyboard.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes RELATED LINKS Virtual Keyboard on page 237 MIDI Input Modes The MIDI Input function allows you to assign MIDI notes in Still mode or in Step mode. • To switch between Still mode and Step mode, Alt-click MIDI Input. Still mode Use this mode if you want to change the pitches of individual segments or selections. Step mode Use this mode if you want to step through the segments while changing their pitches.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes NOTE In the Sample Editor category of the Key Commands dialog, you can set up a key command for Quantize Pitch. If you use the key command, the segments are immediately quantized to the next semitone position. RELATED LINKS Key Commands on page 1008 Micro-Pitch Changes Sometimes changing the pitch of the whole note segment is not enough. In these cases, you can modify the micro-pitch curves inside the segments.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes Tilting a Micro-Pitch Curve from a Segment Border to an Anchor You can set an anchor point to specify which part of the segment is affected when tilting a micro-pitch curve. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Pitch & Warp tool in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer over the upper border of the segment.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes RESULT The tilt anchor is removed. Rotating a Micro-Pitch Curve around an Anchor PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Pitch & Warp tool in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer over the upper border of the segment. The mouse pointer becomes an I-beam symbol. 2. Click at the position where you want to set an anchor point.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Timing Modifications Straightening Micro-Pitch Curves You can straighten micro-pitch curves to compensate for the rise and fall of notes, that is, the deviation from a representative pitch. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Pitch & Warp tool in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or several segments. 2.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Timing Modifications PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer over the start or end of a segment. The mouse pointer becomes a double arrow and warp markers are displayed below the ruler. 2. Drag the start or end of the segment to the desired time position. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically. If Snap is activated, the segment border snaps to the grid. The timing of the segment and the adjacent segments is changed according to your settings.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Reset Functions The mouse pointer becomes a double arrow and the background is highlighted to indicate which part of the waveform is affected by the change. RESULT Now the beginning of the waveform matches the beginning of the bar. Deleting Warp Markers You can delete warp markers. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Pitch & Warp tool in the VariAudio section.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Extracting MIDI from Audio Pitch Changes Resets pitch changes including micro-pitch modifications with the Tilt Micro Pitches tool either for the selected segments (if available) or for the whole file. Warp Changes Resets warp changes. Pitch + Warp Changes Resets pitch, micro-pitch, and warp changes either for the selected segments (if available) or for the whole file. Reanalyze Audio Resets the segmentation and reanalyzes the audio.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Extracting MIDI from Audio RESULT A MIDI part is created according to your settings. RELATED LINKS Segmenting Monophonic Audio on page 498 Extract MIDI Dialog on page 515 Extract MIDI Dialog The Extract MIDI dialog allows you to specify which audio data is used when creating a MIDI part with the Extract MIDI function. To open the Extract MIDI dialog, open the VariAudio section of the Sample Editor Inspector, activate the Segments tool, and click Extract MIDI.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Extracting MIDI from Audio Notes and NoteExp VST 3 Tuning Curve Extracts VST 3 events for the Tuning parameter. These are created as Note Expression data for the resulting MIDI notes. NOTE This works only with a connected VST instrument that is compatible with Note Expression. Volume Mode Allows you to specify how volume information from the audio is extracted. The following options are available: Fixed Velocity Assigns the same velocity to all created MIDI notes.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Flattening Realtime Processing Project Clipboard Copies the MIDI part into the clipboard. This option allows you to insert it at the desired position on a MIDI or instrument track in the Project window. NOTE If you opened the Sample Editor from the Pool and the audio file is not part of your project, the MIDI part is inserted at the beginning of the project. Flattening Realtime Processing You can flatten VariAudio modifications.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Harmony Voices for Audio 2. Select File > Import > Audio File and import a monophonic audio file. 3. In the Project window, select the audio event. 4. Select Audio > Generate Harmony Voices. 5. Specify the number of voices that you want to create, enter a value for the vibrato reduction, and click OK. RESULT The audio event is analyzed and VariAudio segments are created automatically.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to view, audition and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar Audio Part Editor in Lower Zone 1. Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. 2. Info Line Displays information on the audio parts. 3. Ruler Displays the timeline and the display format of the project.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar Info/Solo Solo Editor Solos the selected audio during playback. Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Auto-Scroll Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors Links timelines, cursors and zoom factors of the lower zone editor and the Project window. NOTE You cannot activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors if Independent Track Loop is active.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar Zoom Allows you to zoom in the waveform display. To zoom out, hold Alt while clicking. Erase Allows you to erase events from audio parts. Split Allows you to split audio parts. Mute Allows you to mute/unmute audio parts. Comp Allows you to assemble takes. Draw Allows you to edit audio. Play Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release the mouse button. Scrub Allows you to locate positions.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the left. Trim Start Right Decreases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the right. Move Left Moves the selected element to the left. Move Right Moves the selected element to the right.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar • Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. • Grid Relative grid. • Events • Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events. • Magnetic Cursor • Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position. • Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position.
Audio Part Editor Info Line NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the lower zone editor. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window.
Audio Part Editor The Ruler • To show or hide the info line, activate Show/Hide Info on the toolbar. The on/off status of the info line in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other. The Ruler The ruler shows the timeline and the display format of the project. You can select a separate display format by clicking on the arrow button on the right. Select an option from the pop-up menu.
Audio Part Editor Operations Auditioning in the Audio Part Editor To audition audio parts you can use one of the following methods: Auditioning Using the Audition Tool You can use the audition tool to directly start a single audition of a selection or loop an audition using the Audition Loop function.
Audio Part Editor Operations NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the lower zone editor. If it is not visible, right-click the toolbar and add the Independent Track Loop Settings section. 2. Ctrl/Cmd-click in the ruler to set the start and Alt-click to set the end of the loop. NOTE You can also edit the loop start and end positions numerically in the fields next to the Loop button.
Audio Part Editor Operations NOTE You can also activate a part by clicking on it with the Object Selection tool. • Edit Active Part Only lets you restrict editing operations to the active part only. If you select Edit > Select > All with this option activated, all events in the active part are selected but not the events in other parts. • You can zoom in on an active part so that it is displayed in its entirety in the window by selecting Edit > Zoom > Zoom to Event.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks The sampler track features allow you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples, and integrate them into an existing project. The sampler track features include: • A sampler track that allows you to control the playback of the audio sample that is loaded in Sampler Control. • Sampler Control that allows you load and edit audio samples.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control NOTE • Audio samples that you load into Sampler Control are not copied to the project audio folder. If you want to archive or share your project including all audio samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control, you must create a self-contained project. • In the Pool, all audio samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control are listed in a dedicated sampler track subfolder in the main audio folder.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sound Parameter Section on page 535 Keyboard Section on page 540 Sampler Control Toolbar The Sampler Control toolbar contains various settings and functions. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Event Received Indicator This LED indicates incoming MIDI messages via the selected MIDI input. The LED lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Tempo Shows the tempo of the sample. Root Key Shows the root key that determines the pitch of the sample. You can change the root key by entering a new value in the value field or by dragging the root key handle on the Sampler Control keyboard. Loop Mode Allows you to select a loop mode for playback via MIDI. • If this is set to No Loop, the sample is played once. • If this is set to Continuous, the sample is played in a continuous loop.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Monophonic Mode Activates monophonic playback. For solo instruments, this usually results in a more naturally sounding performance. If monophonic playback is activated, a note that was stolen by another note is retriggered if you still hold the stolen note when you release the new one. This way, you can play trills by holding one note and quickly and repeatedly pressing and releasing another note, for example.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sustain Loop End Defines where the sustain loop ends. When this marker is reached, playback jumps back to the sustain loop start. Fade-In Length Defines the fade-in length. Fade-Out Length Defines the fade-out length. Sustain Loop Crossfade Length Loop crossfades allow for smoother loops. This marker defines the length for the loop crossfade. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline in the specified display format.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control This mode is suitable for complex material like drum loops and samples of mixed music. It uses considerably more CPU time than Solo mode. NOTE The more the sample is stretched, the higher the CPU load. AudioWarp Sync Mode Allows you to match the playback speed of the sample to the project tempo. • If Off is selected, the playback speed is specified manually, in percent.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Pitch In the Pitch section, you can adjust the tuning and pitch of your audio sample. The pitch envelope allows you to modulate the pitch over time. Coarse Sets the pitch of the audio sample in semitone steps. Fine Fine-tunes the pitch of the audio sample in cents (hundredths of a semitone). Glide Specifies the time that is needed to bend the pitch of the audio sample from one note to the following note.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control RELATED LINKS Envelope Editors on page 538 Amp In the Amp section, you can set volume and pan of the sample. The amplifier envelope allows you to shape the volume over time. Volume Sets the level of the sample. Pan Sets the position of the sample in the stereo panorama. Show/Hide Amp Envelope Shows the amplifier envelope editor.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control cannot be deleted. Next to the release node, the release time of the envelope is shown. Mode Determines how the envelope is played back when it is triggered. • Select Sustain to play the envelope from the first node to the sustain node. The sustain level is held for as long as you play the note. When you release the note, the envelope continues with the stages following the sustain. This mode is suited for looped samples.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control RELATED LINKS Keyboard Focus in the Project Window on page 80 Adding and Removing Nodes You can add up to 128 nodes to an envelope curve. • To add a node, double-click at the position where you want to add the node. • To remove a node, double-click it. • To delete several selected nodes, press Delete or Backspace. NOTE • You cannot remove the attack (A), the sustain (S), or the release node (R).
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions Setting the Key Range on page 542 Sample Editing and Playback Functions All sample editing in Sampler Control is non destructive. Setting Sample Start and End By setting the sample start and end, you can define what range of the sample is played back when you press a key on your MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Drag the Set Sample Start handle to the right to adjust the sample start point. 2.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions RELATED LINKS Keyboard Section on page 540 Setting the Key Range on page 542 Setting the Key Range You can determine the key range for the sample. This is useful for samples that only sound good within a certain key range. PROCEDURE • Adjust the key range by dragging the range handles above the virtual keyboard. RESULT Only keys within the determined key range play a sound when triggered.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments You can transfer audio samples with all settings that you have made in Sampler Control to specific Steinberg VST instruments. Transferring audio samples from Sampler Control to a VST instrument creates a new instrument track in the track list. This new track is added below the sampler track.
Pool Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to this file, a clip, is added to the Pool. The following rules apply to the Pool: • All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool. • Every project has a separate Pool. The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/ Mac OS Finder display folders and file lists.
Pool Pool Window The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders: Audio Folder Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project. If the projects contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated sampler track subfolder is created in the audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control. Video Folder Contains all video clips that are in the project.
Pool Pool Window Lets you import media files to the Pool. 8. Search Lets you search the Pool and connected disks for media files. 9. Project Folder Displays the path to the folder of the active project. 10. Pool Record Folder Displays the path to the record folder of the active project. By default, this is the Audio folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and designate this as your Pool record folder.
Pool Pool Window Tempo Displays the tempo of audio files if available. If no tempo has been specified, the column displays “???”. Sign Displays the time signature, for example, “4/4”. Key Displays the root key if one has been specified for the file. Algorithm Displays the algorithm preset that is used if the audio file is processed. • To change the default preset, click the preset name and select another preset from the pop-up menu.
Pool Working with the Pool Info Line The info line displays additional information regarding the files in the pool. • To activate the info line, click Show Info at the left of the toolbar. The info line shows the following information: Audio Files The number of audio files in the Pool. Used The number of audio files in use. Total Size The total size of all audio files in the Pool. External Files The number of files in the Pool that do not reside in the project folder (for example, video files).
Pool Working with the Pool Duplicating Clips in the Pool You can create duplicates of clips and apply different processing methods to them. NOTE Duplicating a clip does not create a new file on disk, but a new edit version of the clip that refers to the same audio file. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clip that you want to duplicate. 2. Select Media > New Version. RESULT A new version of the clip appears in the same Pool folder.
Pool Working with the Pool If you drag the clip into the Project window, the cross-hair cursor and a tooltip are shown. The tooltip indicates the timeline position where the snap point of the clip is aligned. If you position the clip in an empty area of the track list, that is, where no track exists, a new track is created for the inserted event. NOTE If you press and hold Shift while dragging the clip from the Pool on an event, the clip in this event is replaced.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE You can retrieve a clip or region from the Trash folder by dragging it back into an Audio or Video folder. 2. Depending on whether the clips are used by an event, you have the following options: • If the clips are used by an event, click Remove and then click Trash. • If the clips are not used by an event, click Trash. 3. Select Media > Empty Trash. 4. Click Erase. RESULT The files are deleted from the hard disk.
Pool Working with the Pool RESULT All events that refer to the selected clips are now selected in the Project window. Locating Clips via Events in the Project Window You can find out which clip belongs to a particular event in the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select one or more events. 2. Select Audio > Find Selected in Pool. RESULT The corresponding clips are located and highlighted in the Pool.
Pool Working with the Pool 5. • To audition a file, select it in the list and use the playback controls to the left (Play, Stop, Pause, and Loop). If Auto Play is activated, selected files are automatically played back. • To import a file into the Pool, double-click the file in the list or select it and click Import. To close the search pane, click Search on the toolbar again. Using the Extended Search Functionality Apart from the search criterion Name, additional search filters are available.
Pool Working with the Pool Find Media Window The Find Media window is a stand-alone window that offers the same functionality as the Search Media option in the Pool. • To open the Find Media window, select Media > Search Media. • To insert a clip or region into the project from the Find Media window, select it in the list, select Media > Insert into Project, and select one of the insert options.
Pool Working with the Pool process audio and stored in the Edits folder within the project folder), it may be possible for the program to reconstruct it by recreating the editing to the original audio file. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, locate the clips for which files are missing. 2. Check the Status column. If the status of the files is “Reconstructible”, the files can be reconstructed by Cubase. 3. Select the reconstructable clips and select Media > Reconstruct.
Pool Working with the Pool • When you click Audition to audition a clip, the clip is repeated indefinitely until you stop playback by clicking Audition or Audition Loop again. • When you click in the waveform image to audition, the section from the selected point to the end of the clip is repeated indefinitely until you stop playback. Opening Clips in the Sample Editor The Sample Editor allows you to perform detailed editing on the clip.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE You can also use the commands on the Import submenu of the File menu to import audio or video files into the Pool. RELATED LINKS Wave Files on page 959 Importing ReCycle files on page 1031 Importing compressed audio files on page 1032 Video File Compatibility on page 992 Importing Audio CDs in the Pool You can import tracks or sections of tracks from an audio CD directly into the Pool.
Pool Working with the Pool Split Channels/Split Multi-Channel Files If this option is activated, the stereo or multi-channel audio files are split into a corresponding number of mono files, one for each channel. NOTE If this option is activated, the imported files are copied to the Audio folder of the project’s working directory. If you import files via File > Import, the split files are inserted into the project and into the Pool as separate mono tracks.
Pool Working with the Pool RELATED LINKS Creating Audio Events from Regions on page 475 Changing the Pool Record Folder All audio clips that you record in the project will end up in the Pool Record folder. The Pool Record folder is indicated by the text Record in the Status column and by a dot on the folder itself. By default, this is the main Audio folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and designate this as your Pool Record folder.
Pool Working with the Pool Applying Processing to Clips in the Pool You can apply audio processing to clips from within the Pool in the same way as to events in the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to process. 2. Select Audio > Process and select a processing method. RESULT A waveform symbol indicates that the clips have been processed.
Pool Working with the Pool After the minimizing is finished, the file references in the stored project have become invalid. 4. Do one of the following. • To save the updated project, click Save Now. • To proceed with the unsaved project, click Later. RESULT Only the audio portions that are actually used in the project remain in the corresponding audio files in the Pool Record folder.
Pool Working with the Pool 3. In the Convert Options dialog, make your settings and click OK. Convert Options Dialog In this dialog, you can convert audio files in the Pool. To open the Convert Options dialog, select a clip in the Pool window, and select Media > Convert Files. Sample Rate Allows you to convert to another sample rate. Sample Width Allows you to convert to 16 Bit, 24 Bit, or 32 Bit Float. Channels Allows you to convert to Mono or Stereo Interleaved.
Pool Working with the Pool Conforming Files You can align the file attributes with the project attributes. This is useful if the attributes of the selected files are different from the project attributes. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to conform. 2. Select Media > Conform Files. 3. Select whether to keep or replace the original unconverted files in the Pool. • If you select the Replace option, files in the Pool and in the Audio folder of the project are replaced.
MediaBay The MediaBay allows you to manage all your media files and presets from multiple sources. MediaBay in Right Zone You can open the MediaBay in the right zone of the Project window. This is useful, if you want to access the MediaBay functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window. To open the MediaBay in the right zone, do the following: • Click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar, and at the top of the right zone, click the MediaBay tab.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 6. Presets Tile Click this tile to show the track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets. 7. User Presets Tile Click this tile to show the track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, VST FX presets, and instrument presets that are listed in the folder VST Sound > User Content.
MediaBay MediaBay Window MediaBay The MediaBay is divided into the following sections: 1. Define Locations Allows you to create presets for locations on your system that you want to scan for media files. 2. Locations Allows you to switch between the previously defined locations. 3. Filters Allows you to filter the results list using a logical or an attribute filter. 4. Results Displays all found media files. You can filter the list and perform text searches. 5.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Define Locations Section In the Define Locations section, you can specify which folders or directories you want to include in the scan for media files. To do so, activate/deactivate the checkboxes for the folders. The color of the checkmark helps you to identify which folders and subfolders are scanned: • White indicates that all subfolders are scanned. • Orange indicates that at least one subfolder is excluded from the scan.
MediaBay MediaBay Window The scan result is saved in a database file. When you deactivate the checkbox for a folder that has already been scanned, a message appears, allowing you to keep the gathered scan data in this database file or to completely remove the data for this folder from the database file. • To keep the database entries and exclude the folder from being scanned, select Keep. • To remove the contents from the database, select Remove.
MediaBay MediaBay Window If this option is activated, the media files that are located in the subfolders of the selected location are also displayed in the results list. Browsing the Locations You can quickly switch between different locations. • To change the browse location, select another location from the Select Defined Browse Location pop-up menu.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Results Section The Results list shows all media files that are found in the selected location. NOTE You can set the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list in the MediaBay Settings. Setting Up the Results List Columns For each media type, or for combinations of media types, you can specify the attribute columns that are displayed in the Results list. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay MediaBay Window • To change the order of the columns in the Results list, click on a column header, and drag that header to another position. • To delete a file, right-click it in the list and select Delete. The file is permanently deleted from your computer. IMPORTANT If you delete a file using the File Explorer/Mac OS Finder, it is still displayed in the Results list, although it is no longer available to the program. To remedy this, re-scan the corresponding folder.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Show Media Types Selector You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list. The following media types are available: Audio Files If this option is activated, the list shows all audio files. The supported formats are .wav, .w64, .aiff, .aifc, .rex, .rx2, .mp3, .mp2, .ogg, .sd2 (Mac OS only), .wma (Windows only). MIDI Files If this option is activated, the list shows all MIDI files (file name extension .mid).
MediaBay MediaBay Window Strip Presets If this option is activated, the list shows all strip presets (file name extension .strippreset). These presets contain channel strip effect chains. FX Chain Presets If this option is activated, the list shows all effect chain presets (file name extension .fxchainpreset). These presets contain insert effect chains. Video Files If this option is activated, the list shows all video files.
MediaBay MediaBay Window “Drums 01”, “Drumloop”, “Snare Drum”, etc. In addition, all media files with the Drum&Percussion category attribute or any other attribute that contains “drum” are found. You can also add apostrophes to find exact matches for the entered words and use boolean operators. • To reset the text search, delete the text. RELATED LINKS Logical Filter on page 580 Boolean Text Search You can perform advanced searches, using boolean operators or wildcards.
MediaBay MediaBay Window IMPORTANT When you are searching for files whose name contain a hyphen, put the search text in quotation marks. Otherwise the program treats the hyphen as the boolean operator “not”. NOTE These operators can also be used for logical filtering. RELATED LINKS Applying a Logical Filter on page 581 Resetting the Results List You can reset all filter settings and filter results. • To reset the Results list, click Reset Result Filters in the MediaBay.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 4. Align Beats to Project If this option is activated, the selected file is played back in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position. Note that this can apply realtime time stretching to your audio file. NOTE If you import an audio file into your project for which Align Beats to Project is activated in the Previewer, Musical Mode is automatically activated for the corresponding track. 5.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Previewing MIDI Loops NOTE MIDI loops are always played back in sync with the project. 1. Transport Controls Lets you start and stop the preview. 2. Preview Level Fader Lets you specify the preview level. 3. Auto Play New Results Selection If this option is activated, the selected file is automatically played back. 4. Link Playback to Chord Track If this option is activated, the events of the MIDI loop are transposed to play back in context with the chord track.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 5. Computer Keyboard Input If this option is activated, you can use your computer keyboard to preview the presets. RELATED LINKS Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode on page 578 Virtual Keyboard on page 237 Previewing Presets Via MIDI Input MIDI input is always active, for example, when a MIDI keyboard is connected to your computer and set up properly, you can directly start playing the notes to preview the selected preset.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Previewing Presets Via the Computer Keyboard NOTE If you activate Computer-Keyboard Input, the computer keyboard is used exclusively for the Previewer section. However, you can still use the following key commands: Ctrl/Cmd-S (Save), Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to left locator), Delete or Backspace, Num / (Cycle on/off), and F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel). PROCEDURE 1. Activate Computer-Keyboard Input. 2.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Filters Section With the MediaBay, you can perform very refined file searches. You have two possibilities: Logical or Attribute filtering. Logical Filter The logical filter allows you to set up complex search conditions that must be met to find files. NOTE The Logical Filter is not available in the MediaBay in the right zone. contains The search result must contain the text or number specified in the text field to the right.
MediaBay MediaBay Window in range If this option is selected, you can specify a lower and an upper limit for the search result in the fields to the right. Applying a Logical Filter To quickly find certain audio files, you can search for a specific file attribute value, for example. PREREQUISITE In the Locations section, select the location in which you want to search for files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Filters section, activate Logical. 2.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Advanced Text Search You can perform very advanced text searches using boolean operators. PREREQUISITE In the Locations section, select the location in which you want to search for files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Filters section, activate Logical. 2. Select an attribute on the Select Filter Attributes pop-up menu or leave the setting on Any Attribute. 3. Set the condition to matches. 4.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Displays the attribute values and how often a certain attribute value is available among your media files. NOTE • Some attributes are directly linked to each other. For example, for each category value, there are certain sub category values available. Changing the value in one of these attribute columns displays different values in the other column. • Each attribute column displays only the attribute values found in the selected location.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Resetting the Filter PROCEDURE • To reset the filter, click Reset Filter at the top of the Filters section. This also resets the Results list. Attribute Inspector When you have selected one or more files in the Results list, the Attribute Inspector shows a list of attributes and their values. NOTE The Attribute Inspector is not available in the MediaBay in the right zone. In the Attribute Inspector, you can also edit and add new attribute values.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Select Media Types Lets you select one or several media types. You can then manage which attributes are displayed in the Attribute Inspector for the selected media types. +/Opens the Add User Attribute dialog, where you can add or remove custom user attributes. You can select the Attribute Type and the Display Name. Reset to Default Resets the attribute list to the default settings. Attribute Shows the attribute name. Select Shows whether an attribute is activated or deactivated.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Red One or more files are selected in the Results list, whose values cannot be edited. Information on the meaning of the colors used in the Attribute Inspector are also displayed in a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer over one of the color icons below the Attribute Inspector.
MediaBay MediaBay Window To remove the attribute value from the selected files, right-click in the corresponding Value column and select Remove Attribute from the context menu. Editing Attributes in the Results List You can edit attributes directly in the Results list. This allows you to assign tags to a number of loop files, for example. PREREQUISITE Allow Editing in Results List must be activated in the MediaBay Settings. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay MediaBay Window This is only possible if the file type allows write operations and you have the necessary operation system permission. • When you specify attribute values for a file that is write-protected, this is reflected in the Pending Tags column next to the Write Protection column in the Results list. If you rescan the MediaBay content and a media file on your hard disk has changed since the last scan, the pending tags for this file will be lost.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Defining User Attributes You can define your own attributes and save these in the MediaBay database and the corresponding media files. Cubase recognizes all user attributes that are included in media files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Attribute Inspector, activate Defined. 2. Click Configure Defined Attributes to enter configuration mode. 3. Click +. 4. In the Add User Attribute dialog, specify the Attribute Type and the Display Name.
MediaBay Working With the MediaBay Working With the MediaBay When working with many music files, the most important thing is to find the content that you need quickly and easily. The MediaBay helps you to find and organize your content. After scanning your folders, all media files of the supported formats that have been found are listed in the Results section. The first thing to do is to set up Locations, that is, folders or directories on your system that contain media files.
MediaBay Working With the MediaBay Loading Track Presets PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following • In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Track Presets and select a preset. • In the MediaBay in the right zone, click the Presets > Track Presets tile and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. Do one of the following: • Double-click the track preset to create a new track with the preset loaded.
MediaBay Working With the MediaBay • In the MediaBay in the right zone, click the Presets > VST FX Presets tile and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. 2. In the Project window, select an audio track. 3. Drag the plug-in preset from the MediaBay and drop it on the open Inserts section of the Inspector. RESULT The effect plug-in preset is applied to the audio track and the settings are loaded.
MediaBay Working with MediaBay-Related Windows RELATED LINKS Show Media Types Selector on page 572 Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 363 Loading Pattern Banks PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following • In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Pattern Banks and select a preset. • In the MediaBay in the right zone, click the Presets > Pattern Banks tile and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list.
MediaBay Working with MediaBay-Related Windows Loop Browser, Sound Browser, and Mini Browser The Loop Browser, Sound Browser, and Mini Browser show different views of the MediaBay. The Loop Browser lets you quickly browse your loops, for example, audio files, pattern banks, and MIDI loops. The Sound Browser lets you quickly search sounds. By default, it is set to display track presets and plug-in presets. The Mini Browser is perfect to be placed along instruments like LoopMash or Groove Agent SE.
MediaBay Working With Volume Databases Applying Instrument Presets When working with VST instruments, you can choose from a variety of presets via the Results browser. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, right-click the instrument track and select Load Track Preset. 2. In the Results browser, double-click a preset to apply it. Instrument Presets Results Browser The Results browser for instrument track presets lets you preview VST presets and apply them to your instrument track.
MediaBay Working With Volume Databases To be able to connect the external device and directly browse its contents in the MediaBay without having to scan the device, you have to create a volume database for the external device. Volume databases can be created for drives of your computer or for external storage media. They contain the same kind of information about the media files on these drives as the regular MediaBay database.
MediaBay MediaBay Settings Volume databases are automatically mounted when Cubase is launched. They are shown in the Define Locations section and their data can be viewed and edited in the Results list. Removing a Volume Database If you have worked on another computer using an external hard disk and return to your own computer and connect the external device again as part of your system setup, you do not need a separate volume database for it any more.
MediaBay MediaBay Key Commands If this option is deactivated, the folders are scanned in the background even when the MediaBay window is closed. However, Cubase never scans folders while playing back or recording. Maximum Items in Results List Specifies the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list. This avoids unmanageably long lists of files. NOTE The MediaBay does not warn you if the maximum number of files has been reached.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Cubase has integrated surround sound features with support for several formats. This support goes all the way through the audio path: all audio-related channels (i. e. audio and instrument tracks as well as group channels) and busses can handle multi-channel speaker configurations. A channel in the MixConsole can either carry complete surround mixes, or an individual speaker channel which is part of a surround setup.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Available surround configurations file(s) on your hard disk. Exported surround mixes can either be split (one mono file per speaker channel) or interleaved (a single file containing all the surround channels). Available surround configurations The following surround configurations are supported in Cubase: LRCS LRCS refers to Left Right Center Surround, where the surround speaker is center-rear positioned.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations 6.0 Music This uses 2 (Left/Right) front channels with Left and Right surround channels and Left and Right Side channels. Preparations Output bus configuration Before you can start working with surround sound, you have to configure a surround output bus, through which all the speaker channels of the selected surround format are routed. RELATED LINKS Adding Input and Output Busses on page 34 Child busses A child bus is a bus within a (wider) bus.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner directly to that stereo speaker pair of the surround bus (e. g. to route a music track directly to the left and right front speakers in a surround channel). Input bus configuration To work with surround sound in Cubase, it is often not necessary to configure a surround format input bus. You can record audio files via standard inputs, and easily route the resulting audio channels to surround outputs at any stage.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner • In the Inspector, a miniature surround pan control can be displayed in the Surround Pan section. This panner view offers click and drag panning as well as speaker channel icons reflecting the solo/mute and deactivation states. NOTE In all miniature panner views you can scale down your movements by holding the Shift key while moving the sound source. This allows you to make fine adjustments.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner Plug-in panel Double-click on any of the miniature panner controls to open the plug-in panel in a separate window. The VST MultiPanner plug-in offers numerous possibilities to position a mono or stereo sound source. If you work visually oriented, you can simply drag the sound source around in the pan area. To help you execute very exact movements you can use modifier keys to limit the movement direction (e. g. for straight front/rear panning).
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner When you release the mouse button, the sound source jumps to that position (with the positioning handle, i. e. the circle located in the center of the sound source, ending up where you clicked). • By clicking and dragging the positioning handle. Note that you do not have to click exactly on the handle in order to move it. You can click anywhere in the pan area and start moving the mouse, the handle then moves in the same direction as the mouse.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner This speaker is disabled. • Alt-click on a speaker symbol to disable that speaker (the speaker symbol is grayed out) so that no audio will be routed to this surround channel. The signal that would otherwise be sent to this speaker is distributed to the other speakers instead. Note that the signal is distributed in such a way that the power level stays constant all the time.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner Icon Modifier key(s) Description miniature display in the channel, for example. Ctrl/Cmd Horizontal movements only. Ctrl/Cmd-Shift Vertical movements only. Alt Diagonal movements only (bottom left to top right). Alt-Shift Diagonal movements only (bottom right to top left). Shift-Ctrl/Cmd-Alt In this mode the mouse pointer immediately jumps to the positioning handle even if it is located outside the pan area (only visible in Overview Mode).
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner IMPORTANT • When panning in independent positioning mode, automation data is written for several parameters. Due to this, special automation rules apply. • Automation data for the independent positioning mode is always written for the complete sound source, not for individual channels. This means it is not possible to record automation for one stereo channel and then add automation for the other stereo channel in a second go, for example.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner Left-right and front-rear panning These controls are used to pan the sound source from left to right and front to rear, and vice versa. NOTE This is the same as restricting the movement direction using the Ctrl/Cmd and Ctrl/ Cmd-Shift modifiers. Rotating signals The Rotate Signal control is used to rotate the source channels around the positioning handle.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner a) Radius = 141.4 b) Radius = 116.5 The gray circle shows the theoretical path of the sound source when orbiting the center. Since the sound source cannot leave the pan area, it moves along the perimeter instead.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner Center Distribution The Center Distribution control is used to distribute part or all of the center signal to the left and right front speakers. For example, this can be useful in the following situation: The center signal is panned directly to the center speaker and the Center Distribution is set to 0 %. However, the signal is too discrete for your liking, and you want to add part of the signal to the left and right front speakers to widen it.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using VST MultiPanner Scaling The Scale controls allow you to control the horizontal (Width) and vertical (Depth) expansion of the sound source. 100 % corresponds to the complete width or depth of the surround field. If you reduce both values to 0 %, the distance is reduced to zero and all source channels are centered in one spot. These controls influence the perception of spatiality and ambience, as well as the traceability of signals.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Using the MixConvert V6 plug-in Automation Most of the parameters in the VST MultiPanner plug-in can be automated just like any other channel or insert parameter. Recording automation for the Orbit controls and the independent positioning mode is handled differently, however. Automation data for these parameters is written as a combination of the front-rear panning, left-right panning and the Rotate Signal parameters. For the independent positioning mode, Scaling is added.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Exporting a surround mix together by equal amounts. With the pan set all the way to the left, only the left channel can be heard, and vice versa. Exporting a surround mix When you have set up a surround mix, you can choose to export it using the Export Audio Mixdown function. You have the following export options when working with a surround configuration: • Export to “split” format, resulting in one mono audio file for each surround channel.
Automation In essence, automation means recording the values for a particular MixConsole or effect parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control. Automation Curves Within a Cubase project, the changes in a parameter value over time are reflected as curves on automation tracks. There are different kinds of automation curves: 1.
Automation Writing Automation Data The R and W buttons for a track in the track list are the same as the R and W buttons in the MixConsole. NOTE R is automatically enabled when you enable W. This allows Cubase to read existing automation data at any time. You can separately deactivate W if you only want to read existing data. There are also global read and write indicator buttons Activate/Deactivate Read/Write for All Tracks on the MixConsole toolbar and at the top of the track list.
Automation Writing Automation Data and the delta indicator in the automation track shows the relative amount by which the new parameter setting deviates from any previously automated value. 5. Stop playback and return to the position where you started playback. 6. Click W to disable the writing of automation data. 7. Start playback. RESULT All actions that you recorded are reproduced exactly.
Automation Writing Automation Data Tools for Drawing Automation Data Apart from the Draw tool, you can use the following tools to draw automation events. If you click with any of these tools on the automation track, R is activated automatically. • Object Selection If you click on an automation track with the Object Selection tool, an automation event is added. If you hold down Alt, you can draw several automation events.
Automation Editing Automation Events Editing Automation Events Automation events can be edited much like other events. NOTE If you move an event or part on a track and you want the automation events to follow automatically, select Edit > Automation Follows Events. Any automation events at the new position are overwritten. • You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to edit automation events. • You can use the automation event editor to edit selected automation events on ramp automation curves.
Automation Editing Automation Events 1. Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards. 2. Compress Left If you Alt-click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress the left part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the start of the curve. 3.
Automation Automation Tracks NOTE Snap is taken into account when you move automation curves horizontally. To turn it off temporarily, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and any other modifier, and drag. Moving Multiple Automation Events • To move a selection of automation events, click inside the selection rectangle and drag to the left or to the right. If you made a continuous selection of automation events, events at the destination range are overwritten.
Automation Automation Tracks Showing/Hiding Automation Tracks • Position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of the track and click the arrow icon (Show/Hide Automation) that appears. • Right-click the track in the track list and select Show/Hide Automation from the context menu. • To open another automation track, position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of an automation track, and click + (Append Automation Track).
Automation Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value (Cubase Pro only) Muting Automation Tracks By muting an automation track you turn off automation for a single parameter. • To mute individual automation tracks, click Mute in the track list. Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value (Cubase Pro only) For parameter automation, Cubase works either with an initial value or with virgin territory.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) NOTE If you define the last automation event of an automation curve as terminator point, any automation data to the right of this event (as defined by an initial value) is deleted. Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) The Automation panel is a floating window, similar to the MixConsole and Transport panel, and can be left open while you work. To show the Automation panel, do one of the following: • Select Project > Automation Panel.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) You can change the automation mode at any time, for example, in play or stop mode or during an automation pass. You can also assign key commands to the automation modes. The current automation pass will always punch out as soon as one of the following conditions is met, independent of which automation mode is selected: • If you disable Write. • If you stop playback. • If you activate Fast Forward/Rewind.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Auto-Latch Auto-Latch is useful in situations where you want to keep a value over a longer period of time – for example when making EQ settings for a particular scene. In Auto-Latch mode, there is no specific punch out condition other than those that are valid in all modes. • Once your pass has started, the writing of automation data continues for as long as playback lasts or Write is enabled.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) • When you re-touch the fader and move it towards the original value, punch out occurs automatically as soon as you cross the original curve. RELATED LINKS Automation Settings on page 632 Trim Trim allows you to modify the automation curve from a previous pass. If you activate Trim, a trim curve is positioned in the middle of the automation track. NOTE Trim works for channel volume and cue send level adjustments.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) • To freeze your trim curve automatically when Trim mode is switched off, open the Automation Settings and select On Leaving Trim Mode in the Freeze Trim pop-up menu. • To freeze your trim curve manually, open the Automation Settings and select Manually in the Freeze Trim pop-up menu. To freeze a specific parameter for the track click the parameter name and from the pop-up menu select Freeze Trim.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) You can also combine the various Fill options. Activating To Punch PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate To Punch as Fill option. 2. Start playback. 3. Move the fader until you have found the volume setting that you need and release the fader to punch out. The volume curve is set from the point of punch out back to where you punched in.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Activating Gaps PREREQUISITE You have set up virgin territories. NOTE When Trim is active, Gap has no effect. This is because Trim only modifies already existing data. PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate Gaps to activate it as Fill option. 2. Start playback. 3. Move the fader until you have found the volume setting that you need and release the fader to punch out.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) NOTE This procedure can be used with all the Fill options. Suspend Options This section on the Automation Panel allows you to exclude specific parameters from the reading or writing of automation data. This way, you have full manual control of these parameters. Suspend Read If you suspend the reading for a specific parameter during automation gives you full manual control of it.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) these tracks, this mute state is also automated during the next automation pass – a classic situation in mixing. To avoid inadvertently excluding whole tracks from your mix in this way, you can exclude Mute from all automation writing. Simply click Mute in the Suspend Write category on the Automation Panel. Show Options The Show options allow you to open all automation tracks for a specific parameter. This gives you an overview of the automated parameter.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Reveal Parameter on Write If you activate this option, the corresponding automation track is revealed on writing automation parameters. This is useful if you want to have a visual control of all parameters changed on writing. Return Time This determines how fast the automated parameter returns to any previously automated value when you release the mouse button.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Automation Merge Modes This pop-up menu is only available for controllers that can be recorded both for a part and a track. The settings that you make for a controller are applied to all MIDI tracks that use this controller. Use Global Settings When this is selected, the automation track uses the global automation Merge Mode that is specified in the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation MIDI Controller Automation Setup In the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog, you can specify how existing MIDI automation is handled on playback and new automation data is recorded in a MIDI part or as track automation. All settings that you make in this dialog are saved with the project.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Automation Merge Mode Click in the Automation Merge Mode column for a MIDI controller to specify what happens with data for this specific controller on playback. Save As Default Allows you to save the current settings as default settings. When you create a new project, the default settings is used. Load Default Allows you to load the default settings.
VST Instruments VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are contained within Cubase. They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments. Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways: • By adding a VST Instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it. • By creating an instrument track. This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track.
VST Instruments Creating Instrument Tracks NOTE In the Preferences dialog (VST–Plug-ins page), you can specify what happens when you load a VST instrument. • A folder with the name of the instrument that is added within a VST Instruments folder. The instrument folder contains two automation tracks: one for the plug-in parameters and one for the synth channel in the MixConsole. Creating Instrument Tracks You can create instrument tracks that hold dedicated VST instruments. PROCEDURE 1.
VST Instruments VST Instruments Window NOTE The VST Instruments in the right zone are just another representation of the VST Instruments window. All features are the same. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Zones on page 46 VST Instruments Window The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument tracks. All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access to up to 8 quick controls for each added instrument.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls • Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls exclusively for the selected instrument. • MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with multitimbral instruments. • Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls follows track selection ensures that the VST Quick Control remote-control focus follows the track selection.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument. NOTE If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/ Output Options pop-up menu. 9. Read/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings. 10. Select Quick Control Layer Allows you to select a program.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments Presets for Instruments You can load and save presets for instruments. These contain all the settings that are required for the sound that you want. The following presets for instruments are available: • VST presets include the parameter settings of a VST instrument. These are available from the VST instruments window, from the instrument control panels, and from the Programs field in the Inspector.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments Loading Track Presets You can load track presets for instrument tracks from the Inspector. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: • Select the instrument track and in the Inspector, click the Load Track Preset field. • Right-click the instrument track and from the context menu, select Load Track Preset. In the preset browser, select a preset from the list and double-click it to load it. RESULT The track preset is applied.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments VST Instruments and Processor Load VST instruments can consume a lot of CPU power. The more instruments you add, the more likely you will run out of processor power during playback. If the CPU overload indicator in the VST Performance window lights up or you get crackling sounds, you have the following options: • Activate Freeze for instruments. This renders the instrument into an audio file and unloads it.
VST Instruments About Latency Freeze Instrument Options The Freeze Instrument Options dialog opens when you click Freeze. It allows you to specify exactly what should happen if you freeze an instrument. The following controls can be found in the Freeze Instrument Options dialog: Freeze Instrument Only Activate this option if you still want to be able to edit insert effects on the synth channel after freezing the instrument.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options Constrain Delay Compensation To avoid Cubase to add latency when you play a VST instrument in realtime or record live audio, you can activate Constrain Delay Compensation. This minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation, while maintaining the sound of the mix as far as possible. Constrain Delay Compensation is available on the Project window toolbar and in the Transport zone. You can also find it as a menu item in the MixConsole on the Functions menu.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options NOTE You can also drag MIDI loops onto existing instrument or MIDI tracks. However, this only imports the part information. This means this part only contains the MIDI data (notes, controllers) that is saved in the MIDI loop, but no inspector settings or instrument parameters.
VST Instruments VST Quick Controls RELATED LINKS Exporting MIDI files on page 1036 VST Quick Controls VST Quick Controls allow you to remote-control a VST instrument from within the VST Instruments window. To show the VST Quick Controls on the VST Instruments window, activate Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls. The following controls are available on each rack: 1. Show/Hide VST Quick Controls Allows you to show/hide the VST Quick Controls for the instrument. 2.
VST Instruments VST Quick Controls 4. Click Apply. 5. Activate Learn. 6. In the Control Name column, select QuickControl 1. 7. On your remote control device, move the control that you want to use for the first quick control. 8. Select the next slot in the Control Name column and repeat the previous steps. 9. Click OK. NOTE In addition to using the Learn function to set up the table in the Quick Controls section, you can modify the values manually.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments You can send audio into VST 3 instruments that feature a side-chain input. Side-chaining allows you to use the output of one track to control the action of an instrument on another track. Depending on the instrument, activating its side-chain input allows you to: • Use the instrument as an effect plug-in on audio events. • Use the side-chain signal as a modulation source.
VST Instruments External Instruments (Cubase Pro only) NOTE For this to work, your MIDI keyboard must be installed and set up. RESULT When a note is played, the drum loop is played back through Retrologue. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Use Retrologue to modify the sound of your drum loop. For example, you can do the following: • Use the filter and distortion settings on the Synth page. • Modulate the input signal. To do this, select Modulation Matrix > Destination > Oscillator > Audio Input.
Installing and Managing Plugins Installing VST plug-ins Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments that comply with these formats. A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins. Effect or instrument plug-in normally have their own installation application. Read the documentation or readme files before installing new plug-ins.
Installing and Managing Plug-ins Plug-in Manager Plug-in Manager Window You can manage your effects and VST instruments in the Plug-in Manager window. • To open the Plug-in Manager window, select Devices > Plug-in Manager. The Plug-in Manager window shows the following: VST Effects This tab lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. You can sort the list by name, vendor, category, etc. by clicking the corresponding column heading.
Installing and Managing Plug-ins Plug-in Manager Collection list By default, the window section to the right shows the Default collection, which contains all effects or VST instruments loaded by the program. The Default collection cannot be changed. You can compile your own collections of effects or VST instruments by clicking New Collection and dragging and dropping items from the list of all effects or VST instruments to the collection list.
Installing and Managing Plug-ins Compiling a New Effects Collection the plug-in that you have selected first is shown. In this section, you can also deactivate selected plug-ins. Deactivated plug-ins are no longer available in collections. This is useful if you have plug-ins installed that you do not want to use in Cubase. Plug-in Manager Settings Opens a section at the bottom of the window in which all current paths to VST 2 plug-ins are listed.
Track Quick Controls Cubase can give you instant access to up to 8 different parameters, for example, track, effect, or instrument controls. This is done with the aid of the Quick Controls, set up in the Quick Controls section of the Inspector for the corresponding track. The Quick Controls section can be used as a kind of track control center, an area in which your most important parameters are assembled in one place.
Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls 1. QC Learn Mode 2. Get default QCs from Plug-in 3. Remove all QC Assignments Assignment via the Learn Function Using QC Learn Mode in the Quick Controls section in the Inspector, you can assign a parameter by moving the corresponding control. This procedure applies to all automatable controls. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. 2. Activate QC Learn Mode. 3.
Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls NOTE These options are only available for VST 3 plug-ins that support this function. PROCEDURE • Right-click the parameter. • To assign the parameter to the next empty slot, select Add “x” to Quick Controls (where x is the name of the parameter). • To assign the parameter to a specific slot, select Add “x” to Quick Controls Slot (where x is the name of the parameter). Then select the slot from the submenu.
Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls Automatic Assignment of VST Instrument Parameters When you create an instrument track or load a VST instrument via the VST Instruments window including creating an associated MIDI track, the main parameters of the instrument are automatically assigned to the slots in the Quick Controls section in the Inspector. NOTE This only works if the VST instrument supports this feature.
Track Quick Controls Connecting Quick Controls with Remote Controllers Saving/Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets You can save and load your own Quick Control assignments as presets for audio, instrument, MIDI, FX, and group tracks. You can also use the factory presets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. For instrument tracks, the Track Quick Controls are automatically set to the 8 default VST Quick Controls of the loaded instrument by default.
Track Quick Controls Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls 9. Click OK. NOTE In addition to using the Learn function to set up the table in the Quick Controls section, you can modify the values manually. The available options are identical to the ones available for the Generic Remote device. RESULT The quick controls are now associated with control elements on your external remote controller.
Track Quick Controls Quick Controls and Automatable Parameters section of a dedicated track as a kind of “mini mixer”, controlling parameters on other tracks. IMPORTANT Use this function with caution, however, as you might accidentally modify parameters on other tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Create a new, empty audio track and open the Quick Controls section. This track has no events or parts. 2. Hold down the Ctrl/Cmd key and click on the slot for Quick Control 1.
Remote controlling Cubase It is possible to control Cubase via MIDI. A large number of MIDI control devices is supported. This chapter describes how to set up Cubase for remote control. The supported devices are described in the separate PDF document Remote Control Devices. There is also a Generic Remote Device option, allowing you to use any MIDI controller to remote control Cubase.
Remote controlling Cubase Setting Up Selecting a remote device PROCEDURE 1. Open the Device Setup dialog from the Devices menu. 2. If you cannot find the remote device you are looking for, click on the plus sign in the top left corner and select the device from the pop-up menu. The selected device is added to the Devices list. NOTE Note that it is possible to select more than one remote device of the same type.
Remote controlling Cubase Operations IMPORTANT Sometimes communication between Cubase and a remote device is interrupted or the handshaking protocol fails to create a connection. To re-establish communication with any device in the Devices list, select it and click the Reset button in the lower part of the Device Setup dialog. The “Send Reset Message to all Devices” button at the top left of the dialog next to the “+” and “-” buttons will reset every device in the Devices list.
Remote controlling Cubase Operations Therefore, when you are using a device without touch-sensitive controls and want to replace existing automation data, pay attention to the following: • If you activate Write mode and move a control on the remote control device, all data for the corresponding parameter is replaced from the position where you moved the control, up to the position where playback is stopped.
Remote controlling Cubase The Generic Remote device • Steinberg Houston • Mackie Control • Mackie HUI • Yamaha DM 2000 • CM Motormix • SAC2K These remote control devices provide an extra display page in the Inserts section for the selected channel. This page is called User and is displayed as the 9th insert page for audio channels and as the 5th insert page for MIDI channels. It allows you to control the parameters assigned to your user device panel from your remote control device.
Remote controlling Cubase The Generic Remote device 4. Use the MIDI Input and Output pop-up menus to select the MIDI port(s) to which your remote device is connected. 5. Use the pop-up menu to the right to select a bank. Banks are combinations of a certain number of channels, and are used because most MIDI devices can control only a limited number of channels at a time (often 8 or 16).
Remote controlling Cubase The Generic Remote device Column Description is a special version of a Continuous Controller where the 3rd byte of a MIDI message is used as address instead of the 2nd byte (a method supported by various JL-Cooper remote devices). For a description of the Ctrl-Houston status value, see the Steinberg Houston hardware manual. MIDI Channel Clicking in this column opens a popup menu, allowing you to select the MIDI channel on which the controller is transmitted.
Remote controlling Cubase The Generic Remote device pop-up menu. This allows you to use the different values of a Program Change parameter to control different parameters in Cubase. If this does not give you the result you want, try using the “Prog. Change” value instead. 7. Use the table at the bottom to specify which Cubase parameters you want to control. Each row in the table is associated to the controller in the corresponding row in the first table (as indicated by the Control Name column).
Remote controlling Cubase Track Quick Controls Column Description is received. The combination of Push Button and Toggle is useful for remote controls which do not latch the state of a button. One example is controlling mute status with a device on which pressing the Mute button turns it on, and releasing the Mute button turns it off. If Push Button and Toggle are activated, the Mute status will change between on and off whenever the button is pressed on the console. • 8.
Remote controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor RELATED LINKS Connecting Quick Controls with Remote Controllers on page 648 The Remote Control Editor Often, the automatic mapping of plug-in parameters to remote control devices appears rather random, and not very intuitive. The Remote Control Editor allows you to define your own mapping of VST plug-in parameters to the controls of the supported hardware controllers.
Remote controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor • Change the name in the text label • Set up the cells • Arrange the order of cells and pages When you open the editor for the first time, the Standard Layout is shown. Inspector Section The Inspector contains the settings and the parameter assignment for the selected cell. The upper section contains settings for the text label. The lower section contains settings for the knob and the switches.
Remote controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Setting up the Standard Layout Click the “Set up Cell Layout” button to open the Cell Layout Configuration panel. Here, you can make the following settings: • Use the pop-up menu to specify the number of cells per page. • In the lower section, select the switch layout that you want to use for the pages. You can specify the number of switches for a cell by activating/deactivating them.
Remote controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Toggle Switch This is best used for parameters with 2 states, like On/Off buttons. LED Ring An LED ring is shown around the knob. The setting increases clockwise. LED Ring (counter-clockwise) An LED ring is shown around the knob. The setting increases counter-clockwise from right to left. Center Width The LED ring starts at the top center position and when the settings increase, an LED is shown growing in both directions.
Remote controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Decreasing Stepwise (cycle) Pressing the switch steps through the available settings in reverse order, starting over with the maximum value when the minimum is reached. Smart Switch This changes between 2 states every time you press the switch, like an On/ Off button. Furthermore, if you keep the switch pressed, you enter Momentary mode, that is, the corresponding function stays active for as long as the button is pressed.
Remote controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Editing the Layout In the Layout section, you can perform a number of editing operations and arrange the pages to your liking. Making Name Settings for the Cells The top 3 text fields in the Inspector can be used to specify the names for a cell. This is useful if you are working with hardware devices that have value fields that only display a limited number of characters, for example. The first text field shows the long name, as it is shown in the cell.
Remote controlling Cubase Apple Remote (Macintosh only) NOTE A layout always contains at least one page. Adding/Removing a New Hardware Layout • To add a hardware layout for a particular hardware type, click the “+” button to the right of the tabs. • To remove a hardware layout, click the “x” icon of a tab. Changing the Settings in a Layout • To modify an existing layout, save the new settings by clicking the Apply button in the top right corner of the editor.
Remote controlling Cubase Apple Remote (Macintosh only) By default, the Apple Remote always controls the application that has the focus on your Macintosh computer (provided that this application supports the Apple Remote). NOTE When the “Disable when application is not in front” option is not selected, the Apple Remote will control Cubase even if it does not have the focus.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is played back. The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI realtime changes are not reflected in any MIDI editor.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters Input Transformer The Input Transformer allows you to filter out and change MIDI data coming to a MIDI track before it is recorded. Use the Input Transformer for the following purposes: • Set up split keyboard combinations for recording left and right hands separately. • Convert a controller like a foot pedal into MIDI notes (for playing bass drum the right way). • Filter out a specific type of MIDI data on one MIDI channel only.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters 1. Select Preset Allows you to select a preset for the Input Transformer. 2. Module selector Allows you to view and edit a module. 3. Filter conditions list Allows you to set up the filter conditions, determining which elements to find. The list can contain one or several conditions, each on a separate line. 4. Action list Allows you to specify any changes that are made to the found events. 5.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers MIDI Modifiers MIDI modifiers allow you to modify MIDI events during playback. You can use them for the following purposes: • To modify already existing MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks. • To modify MIDI events that you play live. NOTE For live playing, select and record-enable the track, and activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog, MIDI page.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers IMPORTANT Remember that the maximum velocity is always 127 no matter how much you try to expand. NOTE Combine this setting with the Velocity Shift parameter. Length Compression Allows you to add a multiplier to the length of all notes on the track. The value is set with a numerator and a denominator. Random Allows you to introduce random variations to various properties of MIDI notes.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Deactivate the random function by opening the Random pop-up menu and selecting OFF. Setting up Ranges You can filter out pitches or velocities that do not match a specified range, or force them to fit a specified range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section. 3. Open the Range pop-up menu, and select a mode. 4.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers relationship between keys and notes. The retuning is a continuous process and takes the musical context into account. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section. 3. Activate HMT: Follow. 4. Activate HMT: Use for Analysis to use the notes you play to calculate retuning. NOTE If you use tracks with acoustic piano, activate HMT: Use for Analysis and deactivate HMT: Follow.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Reference (pure 3/5) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. Classic (pure 3/5 equalized) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied. This tuning type is suitable for all kinds of music. Pop Jazz (3/5/7) Tunes pure thirds and fifths, and natural sevenths. This tuning type should not be applied to polyphonic music. Try this with pop or jazz. Baroque (3/5 adaptive) Tunes pure thirds and fifths.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Open/Close Insert Effect Editor Allows you to open/close the control panel for the selected effect. Depending on the effect, this may appear in a separate window or below the insert slot in the Inspector. Select Effect Type Allows you to select and activate an effect and open its control panel. To remove an effect, select No Effect. Record Output to Track Allows you to record the output of the MIDI insert effect on a MIDI or instrument track.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects 7. On the Transport panel, activate Record and use your MIDI keyboard or the virtual keyboard to play some notes. RESULT The notes that you play are modified by the MIDI insert effect and recorded directly on the track. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can edit the recorded MIDI events, in the Key Editor, for example. MIDI Sends If you use a send effect, the MIDI events are sent both to the output of the MIDI track and to the send effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Open/Close Send Effect Editor Allows you to open/close the control panel for the selected effect. Depending on the effect, this may appear in a separate window or below the sends slot in the Inspector. Select Effect Type Allows you to select and activate an effect and open its control panel. To remove an effect, select No Effect. MIDI Send Destination Allows you to determine to which MIDI output the processed MIDI events are sent.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line You can edit the transposition and the velocity for selected MIDI parts on the info line. This only affects the notes on playback. • Use the Transpose field to transpose the selected parts in semitone steps. The value is added to the transposition set for the whole track. • Use the Velocity Offset field to offset the velocity for the selected parts.
Using MIDI devices The MIDI Device Manager allows you to specify and set up your MIDI devices, making global control and patch selection easy. But the MIDI Device Manager also features powerful editing functions that can be used to create MIDI device panels (Cubase Pro only). MIDI device panels are internal representations of external MIDI hardware, complete with graphics.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Unfortunately, different instrument manufacturers use different schemes for how Bank Select messages are constructed, which can lead to some confusion and make it hard to select the correct sound. Also, selecting patches by numbers this way seems unnecessarily cumbersome, when most instruments use names for their patches nowadays.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Open Device (Cubase Pro only) This button opens the selected device. Output Here you specify to which MIDI output the selected device is connected. Commands (Cubase Artist only) This pop-up menu lets you edit the selected device (provided that “Enable Edit” is ticked). The patch structure for the selected device is shown on the left side of the dialog.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling 4. Enter a name for the device at the top of the dialog, and click OK. The device appears in the Installed Devices list, and the device node structure for the device is automatically shown in a new window. 5. Select Patch Banks from the pop-up menu at the top of the window. As you can see, the list is empty. 6. Make sure that the Enable Edit checkbox is activated.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling 5. If you are using Cubase, click the Open Device button. A separate window opens for the selected device, showing a node structure in the left half of the window. At the top of this structure is the device itself, and below it the MIDI channels used by the device. For more information about the Device window, see the separate PDF document MIDI Devices. 6. Select Patch Banks from the pop-up menu at the top of the window.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Cubase Artist only: Devices with several banks have an additional tab “Bank Assignment”. Select this tab to specify for each MIDI channel which bank it should use. The selection here will affect which bank is displayed when you select programs by name for the device in the track list or Inspector.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Renaming patches in a device The pre-configured devices list is based on the factory-preset patches, i. e. the patches included in the device when you first bought it. If you have replaced some of the factory presets with your own patches, you need to modify the device so that the patch name list matches the actual device: PROCEDURE 1. In the MIDI Device Manager, select the device in the Installed Devices list. 2.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling New Preset This adds a new preset in the selected bank or folder. You can rename the preset by clicking it and typing a new name. When the preset is selected, the corresponding MIDI events (Program Change, Bank Select, etc.) are shown in the event display to the right.
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) If you instead specify a value range (a start value and an end value, separated by a dash, e. g. 0–63), the first added preset will have an event set to the start value, the next value will be incrementally raised by one and so on, up to and including the end value. NOTE The number of added presets depends on the Range setting. 3. Specify a Default Name below the event display. The added events will get this name, followed by a number.
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) Basic concept The panel editing features in the MIDI Device Manager can be seen as a separate application or entity within Cubase. It allows you to build device maps complete with control panels, including all parameters controllable from within Cubase. Building more complex device maps requires that you are familiar with SysEx programming (see the separate PDF document MIDI Devices).
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) NOTE Note that Ctrl/Cmd-clicking the Open Device Panels button allows you to open a subpanel via the panel browser pop-up menu. Showing panels in the Inspector PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Device Panel section and click on the arrow on the right. A “Panels” folder is shown with the selected device in a node structure below it.
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) The panel is shown in the Channel Racks section of the MixConsole. Automating device parameters Automation works just like for normal audio and MIDI tracks: PROCEDURE 1. Open the device panel by clicking the Open Device Panels button in the Inspector. 2. Activate Write automation on the device panel.
MIDI Processing This chapter describes the various MIDI processing functions available on the MIDI menu. They offer various ways to edit MIDI notes and other events, either in the Project window or from within a MIDI editor. MIDI functions vs. MIDI modifiers In some cases, the result of a MIDI function can also be obtained by using MIDI modifiers and effects. For example, the operations “Transpose” and “Quantize” are available both as MIDI modifiers and as MIDI functions.
MIDI Processing Transpose • In the MIDI editors, the MIDI functions apply to all selected events. If no events are selected, all events in the edited part(s) will be affected. Transpose The “Transpose Setup…” option on the MIDI menu opens a dialog with settings for transposing the selected notes. NOTE You can also use the transpose track for transposing. Semitones This is where you set the amount of transposition.
MIDI Processing Making your settings permanent OK and Cancel Clicking OK performs the transposition. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog without transposing. RELATED LINKS Transpose Functions on page 297 Making your settings permanent The settings described in the chapter “MIDI realtime parameters” do not change the MIDI events themselves, but work like a “filter”, affecting the music on playback. Therefore, you may want to make them permanent, i. e.
MIDI Processing Making your settings permanent 4. On the MIDI menu, select “Merge MIDI in Loop…”. The MIDI Merge Options dialog opens. 5. Activate the desired options and click OK. A new part is created between the locators on the destination track, containing the processed MIDI events. NOTE If you only want to include events from a single track in the merge operation, you may want to solo the track.
MIDI Processing Dissolve Part 2. Set the locators to encompass the part. An easy way to do this is to select the part and choose Set Locators to Selection Range from the Transport menu (or use the corresponding key command, by default P). 3. Make sure that the track holding the part is selected in the track list. 4. On the MIDI menu, select “Merge MIDI in Loop…”. The MIDI Merge Options dialog opens. 5. Activate the desired options, making sure that “Erase Destination” is activated, and click OK.
MIDI Processing Dissolve Part The Dissolve Part function scans MIDI parts for events on different MIDI channels and distributes the events into new parts on new tracks, one for each MIDI channel found. This allows you to work with each musical part individually. PROCEDURE 1. Select the parts containing MIDI data on different channels. 2. Select “Dissolve Part” from the MIDI menu. 3. In the dialog that opens, select the “Separate Channels” option.
MIDI Processing Bounce MIDI Dissolving to lanes In the lower right section of the Dissolve Part dialog, you will find the “Dissolve to Lanes” option. If this option is activated, the part will not be dissolved onto different tracks but onto different lanes of the original track, allowing for a better management of MIDI material that “belongs together”. This is useful when working with drums for example, as it allows you to split up a part into different drum sounds and edit these independently.
MIDI Processing Other MIDI functions You can specify a gap or overlap for this function with the “Legato Overlap” setting in the Preferences dialog (Editing–MIDI page). When using Legato with this setting, each note will be extended to end 5 ticks before the next note. When you activate “Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes Only”, the length of the note will be adjusted so that it reaches the next selected note, allowing you to apply Legato only to your bass line, for example.
MIDI Processing Other MIDI functions MIDI instruments (a new Note On is transmitted before the Note Off is transmitted). This command can then be used to automatically solve the problem. Delete Overlaps (poly) This function shortens notes when required, so that no note begins before another ends. This happens regardless of which pitch the notes have. Velocity This function opens a dialog that allows you to manipulate the velocity of notes in various ways.
MIDI Processing Other MIDI functions Fixed Velocity This function sets the velocity of all selected notes to the Insert Velocity value on the toolbar in the MIDI editors. Delete Doubles This function removes double notes, i. e. notes of the same pitch on the exact same position from the selected MIDI parts. Double notes can occur when recording in Cycle mode, after Quantizing, etc. Delete Notes Allows you to delete very short or weak notes.
MIDI Processing Other MIDI functions OK and Cancel Clicking OK performs the automatic delete according to the rules set up. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog without deleting notes. Delete Controllers This function removes all MIDI controllers from the selected MIDI parts. Delete Continuous Controllers This function removes all “continuous” MIDI controller events from the selected MIDI parts. Therefore, “on/off” events such as sustain pedal events are not removed.
MIDI Processing Other MIDI functions RESULT NOTE In the MIDI editors, the controller data will automatically be removed from the controller lane. This function can only be used for continuous controllers. Data such as Aftertouch, Pitchbend, or SysEx cannot be converted to MIDI track automation data. NOTE MIDI controller automation is also affected by the Automation Merge Mode.
MIDI Editors There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI editors. • The Key Editor presents notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also allows for detailed editing of non-note events such as MIDI controllers.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions RELATED LINKS Ruler Display Formats on page 54 Zooming in MIDI Editors The MIDI editors provide several zooming options: • Zoom sliders • Zoom tool • Select Edit > Zoom. When you use the Zoom tool for zooming, you can determine if you want to zoom horizontal only or horizontal and vertical at a time.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Handling Note Events Coloring Notes and Events You can select different color schemes for the note events in the MIDI editor. The following options are available on the Event Colors pop-up menu on the toolbar: Velocity The note events get different colors depending on their velocity values. Pitch The note events get different colors depending on their pitch. Channel The note events get different colors depending on their MIDI channel value.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions • Use the Object Selection tool to drag a selection rectangle around the note events that you want to select. You can also click individual events. • Select Edit > Select and select one of the options. • To select the previous or next note event, use the Left Arrow/Right Arrow key. • To select several notes, press Shift and use the Left Arrow/Right Arrow key.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions NOTE This function requires that a single note event is selected. Select Controllers in Note Range Selects the MIDI controller data within the range of the selected note events. RELATED LINKS Deleting Note Events on page 720 Muting Note Events You can mute individual note events in a MIDI editor. Muting individual notes allows you to exclude note events from playback. Do one of the following: • Click on a note event with the Mute tool.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Editing Note Events on the Info Line You can move, resize, or change the velocity of note events on the info line using regular value editing. • To apply a value change to all selected note events, press Ctrl/Cmd and change a value on the info line. • To adjust the pitch or velocity of note events via your MIDI keyboard, click in the Pitch or Velocity fields on the info line, and play a note on your MIDI keyboard.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Value changes are applied to all selected notes. For this, a tool modifier must be assigned for the Edit Velocity action. To see or edit the tool modifier, select File > Preferences > Editing > Tool Modifiers > Select Tool. • Open the Insert Velocity pop-up menu and select a velocity value. On this menu, you can also select Setup and specify custom velocity values for the pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Looping MIDI Parts The Independent Track Loop function allows you to loop a MIDI part independent of the project playback. When you activate the loop, the MIDI events within the loop are repeated continuously while other events on other tracks are played back as usual. Every time the cycle restarts, the independent track loop also restarts. PROCEDURE 1. Activate Independent Track Loop on the toolbar.
MIDI Editors Key Editor NOTE If you select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors page. Make your settings to specify, if you want the editors to open in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. Key Editor Window Key Editor in Lower Zone The Key Editor is divided into several sections: 1. Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2. Status line Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. 3.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note. 4. Ruler Displays the time line. 5. Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 6. Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes. 7. Controller display The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Links timelines, cursors and zoom factors of the lower zone editor and the Project window. NOTE You cannot activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors if Independent Track Loop is active. Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. The Switch Auto-Scroll Settings pop-up menu allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing. Switch Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to specify the auto-scroll settings.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Zoom Allows you to zoom in/out. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Line Allows you to create a series of contiguous events. Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to drag a musical position to a certain position in time. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part, within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Indicate Transpositions Indicate Transpositions Allows you to display the transposed pitches of MIDI notes. Insert Velocity Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave. Snap Snap On/Off Activates/Deactivates the snap function.
MIDI Editors Key Editor • Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position. Quantize Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize. Quantize Presets Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset. Apply Quantize Applies the quantize settings. Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes. Record NoteOn Velocity Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST Instrument that the track is routed to. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. Status Line The status line shows information about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Status Line. The on/off status of the status line in the Key Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor Inspector In a MIDI editor, the inspector is located left of the note display. The inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to load an expression map. Expression maps are useful for working with articulations. Note Expression (Cubase Pro only) Contains functions and settings related to Note Expression. Chord Editing Allows you to enter chords instead of single notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Setup Allows you to open a dialog to edit the Inspector settings for the editor. Click Setup Inspector , and from the pop-up menu select Setup. NOTE These sections are also featured by the editor Inspector for the editor in the lower zone.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations • Program Change events • System Exclusive events • Any type of continuous controller event Velocity values are shown as vertical bars in the controller display. Each velocity bar corresponds to a note event in the note display. Higher bars correspond to higher velocity values. Events other than velocity values are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a curve point.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RESULT A note is inserted at the position where you double-clicked with the length that you have set up in the Length Quantize pop-up menu. Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool The Draw tool allows you to insert single note events in the note display. When you move the cursor inside the note display, its position is indicated on the status line. Its pitch is indicated both on the status line and on the piano keyboard to the left.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations • To restrict movement to horizontal, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag. The notes have the same pitch. If Snap is activated, the note events and controller events are positioned and sized according to the Quantize and Length Quantize values. RELATED LINKS The Line Tool Modes on page 737 The Line Tool Modes The Line tool allows you to create a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes. You can also edit multiple controller events simultaneously.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations • To move a note event via the info line, select a note event and edit the Position or Pitch on the info line. • To transpose note events, select the note events and use the Transpose Palette buttons on the toolbar or the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys. Transpose is also affected by the global transpose setting. • To transpose note events via the Transpose Setup dialog, select the note events and select MIDI > Transpose Setup.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Using the Trim Tool The Trim tool allows you to change the length of note events by cutting off the end or the beginning of notes. Using the Trim tool means moving the note-on or the note-off event for one or several notes to a position defined with the mouse. PROCEDURE 1. Select Trim on the toolbar. The mouse pointer changes to a knife symbol. 2. To edit a single note, click on it with Trim .
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Changing the Pitch of Chords You can use the chord type buttons to change the pitch of chords. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Chord Editing section. 2. In the note display, select the notes that you want to edit. If the chord is recognized, the root note, chord type, and tensions are indicated in the Chord Type field. This also works with arpeggiated notes. 3. In the Chord Editing section, activate one of the Triads buttons or 4-Note Chords buttons.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Add to Chord Track Adds the chord indicated in the Chord Type field to the chord track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds to the position of the MIDI notes. Any existing chord events at this position are overwritten. Match with Chord Track Applies the chord events from the chord track to the selected notes in the MIDI editor.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Inserting Chords You can use the tools in the Chord Editing section of the Inspector to insert and edit chords. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Chord Editing section. 2. Select the Insert tool 3. Click in the note display, drag to the left or right to determine the length of the chord. Drag up or down to determine its pitch. to the right of the chord type that you want to insert.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations • On the info line in the Articulations field. • On the controller lane. • In the note event if the vertical zoom factor is high enough. Note Expression Data (Cubase Pro only) The Key Editor is the main editor for working with Note Expression. RELATED LINKS Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) on page 811 Editing Note Events via MIDI Input You can directly hear your editing results.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 3. Click anywhere in the note display to set the start position of the first note event or chord. The step input position is shown as a vertical line in the note display. 4. Specify the note event spacing and length with the Quantize and Length Quantize popup menus. The note events that you insert are positioned according to the Quantize value and have the length of the Length Quantize value.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations The controller display with lanes. • To add a controller lane, click Create Controller Lane or open the Controller Selection and Functions menu and select Create Controller Lane. • To remove a controller lane, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Remove this Lane. This hides the lane from view. It does not affect the events in any way. If you remove all lanes, the controller display is hidden.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Setting up Available Continuous Controllers In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, you can specify which continuous controllers are available for selection. NOTE The MIDI Controller Setup dialog can be opened from different areas in the program. The settings are global, that is, the setup you choose here affects all areas of the program where MIDI controllers can be selected. PROCEDURE 1. Select Controller Selection and Functions > Setup. 2.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 3. In the Type In Preset Name dialog, enter a name for the preset. 4. Click OK. RESULT Your controller lane setup is now available as a controller lane preset. NOTE To apply a saved preset, open the Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu and select the preset. NOTE To remove or rename a preset, open the Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu and select Organize Presets. A dialog opens, where you can remove and rename presets.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations When you move the pointer inside a controller lane, the event type value changes corresponding to the pointer movement. The event type value is displayed below the event type name, left of the controller display. • If there is more than one note at the same position, their velocity bars overlap on the controller lane. If none of the notes are selected, all notes at the same position are set to the same velocity value when you draw.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the parabola curve. • To reverse the parabola curve, press Ctrl/Cmd. • To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt. • To increase or decrease the exponent, press Shift. NOTE If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created controller curves. For very smooth curves, use a small Length Quantize value or deactivate Snap.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Editing Events using the Draw Tool You can draw and edit events in the controller display with the Draw tool. The Draw tool has the same functionality as the Line tool in Paint mode. • To change the velocity of a single note, click on its velocity bar and drag the bar up or down. NOTE When you move the pointer inside a controller lane, the event type value changes corresponding to the pointer movement.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Moving Events in the Controller Display on page 754 Working with mapped dynamics on page 1311 Using Continuous Controllers When a continuous controller is selected for a controller lane, additional data is displayed on the controller lane. This is due to the fact that MIDI controller data can be recorded or entered either for an automation track or for a MIDI part.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Poly Pressure Events Poly Pressure events are events that belong to a specific note number (key). That is, each poly pressure event has the following editable values: the note number and the amount of pressure. When Poly Pressure is selected on the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, value fields for the note number and for the amount are shown to the left of the controller display. Adding Poly Pressure Events PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 1. Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards. 2. Compress Left If you Alt-click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress the left part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the start of the curve. 3.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Editing Selection Ranges The controller lane editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection ranges on existing controller curves. • To open the controller lane editor, use the Object Selection tool to create a selection rectangle on the controller lane, encompassing the controller events that you want to edit. For velocity lanes, press Alt to get the Object Selection tool.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Deleting Events in the Controller Display IMPORTANT If there is more than one note at the same position, there is only one visible velocity bar. Make sure that you delete only the notes that you want to delete. • To delete events, click on them with the Erase tool or select them and press Backspace. You can also delete notes by deleting their velocity bars in the controller display.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Score Editor Window Score Editor in Lower Zone The Score Editor is divided into several sections: 1. Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2. Status line Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. 3. Info line Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note. 4. Extended toolbar Contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) If you have selected parts on several tracks, you get one staff for each track. The staves are tied together by bar lines and placed in the order of the tracks in the Project window. • To rearrange the staves, close the editor and in the Project window, rearrange the tracks. Then reopen the Score Editor.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Glue Allows you to glue together events of the same pitch. Insert Text Allows you to insert text. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Insert Velocity Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Snap Snap Type Allows you to select one of the following snap types: • Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. • Grid Relative grid.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of the Project window. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Info Line The info line shows values and properties of the selected MIDI notes. If several notes are selected, the values for the first note are displayed in color. To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Info Line. The on/off status of the info line in the Score Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Score Display The main area of the Score Editor window shows the notes in the edited parts on one or several staves. Parts on different tracks are shown on different staves. • If you are editing one or several parts on the same track, as much of them as possible is shown on several staves, comparable with a score on paper. • If you are editing parts on several tracks, they are put on a grand staff.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) To open the Staff Settings dialog, double-click in the area to the left of the staff, or select a staff and select MIDI > Scores > Staff Settings. NOTE The time signature follows the time signatures that are set in the Tempo Track editor. These settings are common to all tracks/staves in the score. Staff Mode The Staff Mode determines how the staff is shown. • In Single mode, all notes in the part are shown in the same staff.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Notes Determines the smallest note value to be displayed and the smallest position to be recognized and properly displayed. Set this to the smallest significant note position used in your music. For example, if you have notes on odd 16th note positions, set this value to 16. The T values are for triplet note values. This setting is partly overridden by Auto Quantize. Rests This value is used as a recommendation.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Auto Clef If this option is activated, Cubase attempts to guess the correct clef, judging from the pitch of the music. Display Transpose In this section, you can specify a separate display transpose setting for each staff (track). This transposes the notes in the score without affecting how the notes are played back. This allows you to record and play back a multi staff arrangement and still score each instrument according to its own transposition.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Shuffle If this option is activated and you have played a shuffle beat, the beat is displayed as straight notes, not as triplets. This is very common in jazz notation. Quantize Value When you move the mouse pointer over the score, the Mouse Time Position field on the status line tracks your movement and shows the current position in bars, beats, 16th notes, and ticks. The quantize value controls the positioning on screen.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) NOTE If the notes that you enter appear to have the wrong note value you may have to adjust the Display Quantize settings. For example, you enter a 1/32 note that is displayed as a 1/16 note. RELATED LINKS Setting Velocity Values on page 721 Display Quantize on page 763 Moving and Transposing Notes PROCEDURE 1. Open the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the toolbar and select a quantize value. 2.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Splitting and Gluing Note Events • To split 2 notes that are strung together by a tie, click on the tied note head with the Cut tool. • The note is divided into 2, with the respective length of the main and the tied note. • To glue a note to the next note with the same pitch, click on a note with the Glue tool. Enharmonic Shift You can perform an enharmonic shift on notes that are not displayed with the accidentals you wish. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) This opens the text for editing. Use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, Right Arrow keys to move the cursor, delete characters with the Delete or Backspace keys, press Return when your are finished. • To delete text blocks, select them with the Object Selection tool and press Backspace or Delete. • To move text blocks, drag them to a new position. • To duplicate text blocks, press Alt and drag them to a new position.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Frame Allows you to enclose the text in a rectangular (box) or oval frame. Font Options Determine whether the text is formatted bold, italic, and/or underlined. Printing the Score PROCEDURE 1. Open the parts that you want to print in the Score Editor. 2. Select File > Page Setup and make sure that all your printer settings are correct. IMPORTANT If you change your setting for paper size, scale, and margins now, the score may change its look. 3. Click OK. 4.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Drum Editor Window Drum Editor in Lower Zone The Drum Editor is divided into several sections: 1. Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2. Status line Informs about the mouse time position and the mouse note position.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor 3. Info line Displays information about the selected event. 4. Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 5. Drum sound list Lists all drum sounds. 6. Drum map Lets you select the drum map for the edited track or a list of drum sound names. 7. Ruler Displays the time line. 8. Note display Contains a grid in which notes are displayed. 9. Controller display The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Drum Sound Visibility Drum Visibility Agents Allows you to determine which drum sounds are displayed in the drum sound list. Auto-Scroll Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors Links timelines, cursors and zoom factors of the lower zone editor and the Project window.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Allows you to delete events. Zoom Allows you to zoom in/out. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Mute Allows you to mute events. Line Allows you to create a series of contiguous events. Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to drag a musical position to a certain position in time. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part, within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Insert Velocity Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Notes Length Insert Length Allows you to determine a length for newly created notes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor • Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position. • Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position. • Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position. Quantize Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes. Record NoteOn Velocity Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST Instrument that the track is routed to. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important mouse information. To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Status Line.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Drum Editor Inspector The Inspector is located to the left of the note display. The inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map Allows you to load an expression map. Expression maps are useful for working with articulations. Quantize Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the functions on the Quantize Panel. Length Contains length-related options, similar to the Functions submenu of the MIDI menu.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Opening the Editor Inspector on page 61 Note Display The note display of the Drum Editor contains a grid in which note events are shown. The notes are displayed as diamond symbols. If you activate Show Note Length On/Off on the toolbar, notes are displayed as boxes and show the note length. The vertical position of the notes corresponds to the drum sound list to the left, while the horizontal position corresponds to the note’s position in time.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Events other than velocity values are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a curve point. When you select a line in the drum sound list, only the velocity controller events that belong to the note events on this line are displayed in the controller display. If you select more than one line in the drum sound list, the controller lane shows all velocity controller events for all notes on the selected lines.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or not. Pitch Note number of the drum sound. Instrument Name of the drum sound. Quantize This is used when entering and editing notes. Mute Allows you to mute drum sounds. I-Note Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch setting for the sound.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Show Drum Sounds with Events Shows only the drum sounds for which events are available in the selected MIDI part. Show Drum Sounds in use by Instrument Shows all drum sounds for which a pad etc. is in use for the instrument. This option is only available if the instrument can provide this information. Reverse Drum Sound List Reverses the order of the sounds displayed in the drum sound list.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations RESULT A note event is inserted. Inserting Multiple Note Events You can insert multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool. PREREQUISITE You have set up the Insert Length on the toolbar to determine the length of the inserted note. If Insert Length is set to Drum-Map Link, the note gets the length of the quantize value for the drum sound.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Changing the Note Length You can change the note length in the drum editor with the Object Selection tool or with the Drumstick tool. PREREQUISITE You have activated Show Note Length On/Off on the drum editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the beginning or the end of the note that you want to edit. The mouse pointer turns into a double arrow. 2. Drag to the left or to the right to adjust the length.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations RESULT The note events are deleted. Moving and Transposing Note Events There are several options to move and transpose note events. • To move note events in the editor, select the Object Selection tool and drag them to a new position. All selected note events are moved, maintaining their relative positions. Snap is taken into account. • To allow only horizontal or only vertical movement, hold down Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps • To mute all other drum sounds, click Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map) on the toolbar. RELATED LINKS Selecting a Drum Map for a Track on page 791 Drum Maps A drum kit in a MIDI instrument is most often a set of different drum sounds with each sound placed on a separate key. For example, the different sounds are assigned to different MIDI note numbers. One key plays a bass drum sound, another a snare, and so on. Different MIDI instruments often use different key assignments.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps The list on the left shows the loaded drum maps. The sounds and settings of the selected drum map are displayed on the right. NOTE The settings for the drum sounds are the same as in the Drum Editor. Use Head Pairs (Cubase Pro only) If this option is activated, 2 head symbols for each drum sound are displayed in the drum sound list. Edit in Scores (Cubase Pro only) If this option is activated, you can change the settings for the score drum map directly in the score.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps New Copy Adds a copy of the selected drum map to create a new drum map. You can then change the drum sound settings of the copy and rename the drum map in the list. Remove Removes the selected drum map from the project. Load Allows you to load drum maps into your project. Save Allows you to save the drum map that is selected in the list on disk. Drum map files have the extension .drm. Edit head pairs Allows you to customize the note pairs.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps PROCEDURE 1. Load a drum kit in Groove Agent SE. 2. In the Inspector for the track, open the Drum Maps pop-up menu and select Create Drum Map from Instrument. The drum map is created for the kit that is assigned to the MIDI port and channel selected in the Inspector. 3. Open the Drum Maps pop-up menu again and select Drum Map Setup. 4. In the list on the left, select the kit that you have loaded in the instrument.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps About I-Notes, O-Notes and Pitches Going through the following theory helps you make the most out of the drum map concept – especially if you want to create your own drum maps. A drum map is a kind of filter that transforms notes according to the settings in the map. It does this transformation twice; once when it receives an incoming note that is when you play a note on your MIDI controller, and once when a note is sent from the program to the MIDI sound device.
MIDI Editors List Editor Setting Pitches of Notes According to their O-Note Settings You can set the pitch of notes according to their O-note settings. This is useful if you want to convert a track to a regular MIDI track with no drum map and still have the notes play back the correct drum sound. It’s a typical use case to export your MIDI recording as a standard MIDI file. If you first perform an O-note conversion, you make sure that your drum tracks play back as intended when they are exported.
MIDI Editors List Editor 5. Ruler 6. Event display 7. Value display NOTE The filters, the status line, and the value display can be activated/deactivated by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options. Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the List Editor. • To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements.
MIDI Editors List Editor Erase Allows you to delete events. Zoom Allows you to zoom in/out. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Mute Allows you to mute events. Trim Allows you to trim events. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
MIDI Editors List Editor Insert Type Insert Event Type Allows you to determine an event type for newly created events. Insert Velocity Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left. Trim Start Right Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right. Move Left Moves the selected event to the left. Move Right Moves the selected event to the right.
MIDI Editors List Editor Allows you to select one of the following snap types: • Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. • Grid Relative grid. • Events • Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events. • Magnetic Cursor • Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position.
MIDI Editors List Editor Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors List Editor Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST Instrument that the track is routed to. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Right Zone Allows you to show/hide the right zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Using the Setup options on page 1051 Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar.
MIDI Editors List Editor Filters Bar The filters bar allows you to hide events from view, based on their type and other properties. To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Filters. Show Section The Show section allows you to set up filters. No Focus No filter is applied. Event Types Only events of the same event type as the selected type will be shown. This is the same as activating event types in the Hide section.
MIDI Editors List Editor > An arrow in this column indicates the event that starts closest before the project cursor position. You can use this column for auditioning when you are editing in the list. • To move the cursor to the start of the event, click in the auditioning column of an event. • To move the cursor position and start/stop playback, double-click in the column for an event. Type Event type. Cannot be changed.
MIDI Editors List Editor Event Display The Event Display displays events graphically. The vertical position of an event in the display corresponds to its entry in the list, that is, to the playback order. The horizontal position corresponds to the actual event position in the project. In the event display, you can add new parts or events, drag events to another position.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations List Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the List Editor. Drawing Events The Draw tool allows you to insert single events in the event display. When you move the cursor inside the event display, its position is indicated on the status line. The snap function is taken into account. • To change the event type that you want to draw, select it from the Insert Event Type pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Editing in the Event List • To edit the values of several events, select the events and edit the value for one event. The values of the other selected events are also changed. Any initial value differences between the events are maintained. • To set the values of all selected events to the same value, press Ctrl/Cmd and edit the value for one event. • For SysEx events, you can only edit the Start position in the list.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations SysEx Messages SysEx (System Exclusive) messages are model-specific messages for setting various parameters of a MIDI device. This makes it possible to address device parameters that would not be available via normal MIDI syntax. Every major MIDI manufacturer has its own SysEx identity code. SysEx messages are typically used for transmitting patch data, for example, the numbers that make up the settings of one or more sounds in a MIDI instrument.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Transmitting a Bulk Dump Back to a Device PREREQUISITE Route the MIDI track with the System Exclusive data to the device. Check your device’s documentation to find details about which MIDI channel should be used, etc. PROCEDURE 1. Solo the track. 2. Make sure that the device is set up to receive SysEx messages. 3. If necessary, put the device in Standby to Receive System Exclusive mode. 4. Play back the data.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations 4. Record. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK In the List Editor, check if the events were recorded properly. MIDI SysEx Editor While SysEx events are displayed in the List Editor/Project Browser (Cubase Pro only), it is not their entire content that is displayed. Only the beginning of the message is displayed in the Comment column for the event. The event is not editable. You can only move the event, the same way you would move it in the List Editor.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Editing Byte Values You can edit the selected byte value in the main display of the MIDI SysEx Editor, or in the ASCII, decimal, and binary displays. • To edit the selected value, open the MIDI SysEx Editor, click on a byte, and type in the value. Importing and Exporting SysEx Data You can import SysEx data from disk and export the edited data to a file. The file has to be in MIDI SysEx (.syx) binary format. Only the first dump in a SYX file will be loaded.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and settings for the In-Place Editor. To open the toolbar, click on the triangle in the upper right corner of the track list for the edited track. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Multiple Part Controls Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Introduction About articulations Musical articulations, or expressions, define how certain notes “sound”, i. e. how they are sung or performed on a given instrument. They allow you to specify that a string instrument is bowed (not plucked), a trumpet muted (not played open), and so on. Articulations also define the relative volume of notes (to play some notes louder or softer than the others) or changes in pitch (create a tremolo).
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Introduction Program Change Program Change messages can be used to instruct a connected VST instrument to switch from one program to another. Depending on the instrument, this can be used to play a different articulation. MIDI channel Multi-timbral instruments, such as Steinberg’s HALion, feature programs, usually representing different articulations. These can be accessed via MIDI channel messages.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Using expression maps NOTE You can also use the Note Expression functions to add articulations directly on your MIDI notes in the Key Editor. RELATED LINKS Creating and editing expression maps on page 817 Groups on page 821 Note Expression on page 823 Using expression maps Expression maps and their related functions can be found in different locations in Cubase. To be able to use these functions, an expression map or a track preset containing such a map has to be loaded.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Using expression maps 2. In the Expression Maps section on the left, click the Load button. A file dialog appears. 3. Locate and select an expression map and click Open. The expression map is added to the Maps list. 4. Repeat the steps for all the maps that you want to make available, and close the dialog. All loaded maps are available on the Expression Map pop-up menu in the Inspector.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Using expression maps • To insert a symbol, click on it in the Expression Map section, and click at the desired position in the note display. • To delete an articulation symbol from the score, select it and press Delete or Backspace. You can also click on it with the Eraser tool. NOTE In the Preferences dialog (Score–Colors for Additional Meanings page), you can specify a color for Expression Map symbols.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Using expression maps The different groups (1 to 4) are also reflected here. They are separated by lines. Articulations belonging to the same group are shown in the same color. • Directions are displayed as bars in the controller lane. They begin at the insertion point of a direction and end at the insertion point of the next articulation from the same group (or at the end of the part if no more directions follow). Attributes are inserted at the note beginning.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and editing expression maps • If you select another attribute from the same group for a note, the attribute replaces the previous attribute. RELATED LINKS Groups on page 821 Expression maps in the List Editor In the List Editor, the Articulations can be viewed and edited in the Comment column. The options are the same as on the Key Editor info line. Directions can be shown either as Text or as Graphic Symbols (like in the Score Editor).
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and editing expression maps Creating expression maps based on the key switches used in an instrument You can automatically extract mapping information from your connected VST instruments and convert it into a new expression map. This makes it very easy to set up expression maps for the instruments you often work with. PROCEDURE 1. Load the VST instrument you want to use and assign it to a MIDI or instrument track. 2.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and editing expression maps 4. To create a complex articulation, made of several different single articulations, click in the other Articulation columns (Art. 2-4) for the sound slot and add the corresponding articulations. For each new articulation, an additional entry is added in the Articulations section. • Apart from creating combined articulations, the Articulation columns also allow you to prioritize articulations, by sorting them into different groups.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and editing expression maps Channel Here you can specify the MIDI channel. When using HALion Symphonic Orchestra for example, this allows you to switch to a different program. Length Here you can specify the note length. This way, you can create staccato or tenuto sounds. Velocity Here you can specify the desired velocity. This allows you to create accents, for example. Min.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and editing expression maps Groups You can sort the different articulations you define for an expression map into one to four groups. Groups can be used to combine directions and attributes in more complex musical expressions by choosing articulations from the different groups, for example to play a note arco AND staccato AND with an accent. The groups themselves are exclusive. This means articulations residing within the same group cannot be used together.
Expression maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and editing expression maps If you use key switches, these keys are used to insert articulations instead of notes. Latch Mode This setting determines whether the remote key function reacts to note-off messages. • If Latch Mode is deactivated, the key you press on your MIDI input device is valid for as long as the key is held, i. e. the sound slot plays until the key is released. On release, the default (first) sound slot is played again.
Note Expression Introduction Note Expression offers a very intuitive way of controller editing in Cubase. As an alternative to working with controller lanes in the Key Editor, controller data can be viewed and edited directly on the associated MIDI note events in the event display. With Note Expression, a note and its associated controller data are treated as a unit. When you quantize, move, copy, duplicate, or delete notes, all their associated controller information will follow.
Note Expression Introduction for polyphonic contexts. Articulating each note in a chord individually creates a much more natural feel. Furthermore, VST 3 controllers allow for a value range that exceeds the MIDI range of 0 to 127, which offers a more comfortable value editing and fine-tuning. To be able to work with VST controllers, you need a VST instrument that offers this kind of controller parameters and is capable of playing back these controller messages.
Note Expression Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section • You can draw in Note Expression events for MIDI notes in the Note Expression event editor. RELATED LINKS Recording on page 829 Overdubbing on page 830 Recording Note Expression data via MIDI input on page 831 Editing Note Expression data on page 831 Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section To be able to work with Note Expression, you have to set up the parameters first.
Note Expression Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section Parameter name and color selector By clicking on the colored square to the right of the parameter name, you can specify which color is used for the parameter in the Inspector and in the note display. You can also define a Note Expression color set.
Note Expression Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section Channel Rotation on page 829 Overdubbing on page 830 Latch mode on page 830 Showing/hiding controllers You can specify which parameters are displayed in the Note Expression event editor and in the event display by activating/deactivating them in the leftmost column in the list. When you want to edit a single parameter, it might be best to hide the data for the other parameters.
Note Expression Mapping controllers Mapping controllers External keyboards have no controls or faders for VST 3 parameters, which can therefore not be recorded directly. To remedy this, you have the possibility to assign a certain MIDI controller (or Pitchbend and Aftertouch) to any of the Note Expression parameters in the list. The MIDI assignment is shown in the CC column in the Inspector.
Note Expression Recording Using mapping presets When you have set up the mapping for a connected MIDI device, you can save these settings as mapping presets for future use, e. g. when working again with this device. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Parameter pop-up menu and select “Save MIDI Input Assignment”. 2. In the file dialog that appears, specify a name and a location for the file. A file with the extension “*.neinput” is created.
Note Expression Recording that belong to this note event are created with the same MIDI channel. This allows a 16 voice polyphony, which is sufficient for most performances. The Channel Rotation mode allows a correct mapping of these data as Note Expression data per note event. This reduces the amount of data in comparison to the MIDI to Note Expression conversion method. IMPORTANT In order to use the Channel Rotation mode, the input controller must support channel rotation.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data 2. Click here to activate Latch mode. RELATED LINKS Mapping controllers on page 828 Resetting the Latch buffer Whenever data is present in the Latch buffer, the “Reset Latch buffer” button becomes available. If you click this button, all the memorized values are removed from the Latch buffer. NOTE When you are using Latch mode in combination with cycle recording, the Latch Buffer is automatically reset at the end of the cycle.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data editor, you can add Note Expression data from scratch. All parameters that are marked as visible in the Inspector are displayed as curves in the editor. NOTE When several notes are selected in the Key Editor and you double-click any of them, the Note Expression event editor opens for all these notes. This is useful if you want to edit all notes in a chord in the same way, for example.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data • You can move selections by dragging them in the editor. • To copy a selection in the editor, click on it, keep the mouse button pressed, then press Alt and drag. Editing functions Drawing in data You can enter or modify curves using the Draw tool or the line tool. The editing is the same as in the controller lanes. If the Object Selection tool is selected and the editor is open, you can press Alt to get the Draw tool.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data Deleting Note Expression data To delete all or the selected Note Expression data, use the Delete command on the Edit menu or press Backspace. Moving Note Expression data • To move all or the selected data of the active parameter, click with the Object Selection tool in the editor (not in the stretch area at the bottom of the window) and drag. You can restrict the direction to vertical or horizontal by pressing Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data The note expression event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes: 1. Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards. 2. Compress Left If you Alt-click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress the left part of the curve.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data in the release section of the editor. To add a release phase, click and drag the release length handle in the lower right corner of the editor. 1. Note 2. Release phase 3. Release length handle When Note Expression data are displayed in the Key Editor, the release phase of a note is also shown. Setting the length of the release phase To determine the length of the release phase, drag the release length handle or enter the value manually on the info line.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI Editing multiple notes simultaneously When you have opened the editor for several notes, any editing (e. g. entering Note Expression data, applying time stretch or modifying the length of the release phase) affects all the notes that are present at the time position where you perform the editing.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog The dialog contains the following options: Controller Activate this option if you want to use MIDI controllers when working with Note Expression. In the table below, activate the MIDI controllers you want to use and deactivate the MIDI controllers that should be disregarded in the Note Expression context. If MIDI controller data for a deactivated controller is received in Cubase, it will end up on the controller lane.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI Controller Catch Range This allows you to associate controllers with a note, although they were sent slightly before the note-on message. Specify the number of ticks in the value field. For example, this might be necessary when working with some electronic drums for which the drum head position message is sent before the note.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI NOTE When converting MIDI controllers into Note Expression data, release phases are automatically created where necessary, so that no controller data is lost during this process. IMPORTANT When you are editing the MIDI notes after the conversion, it might be necessary to consolidate the controller data.
Note Expression HALion Sonic SE Dissolving Note Expression data • To convert Note Expression data into MIDI controller data on controller lanes, select the “Dissolve Note Expression” option from the Note Expression submenu on the MIDI menu. Note that this applies only to Note Expression data that consists only of MIDI controllers (i. e. not the VST 3 controller data).
Chord Functions The chord functions provide you with many possibilities for working with chords. The chord functions allow you to: • Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track. • Convert chord events to MIDI. • Use the chord track to control audio playback (Cubase Pro only) or MIDI playback. • Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI. • Extract chord events from MIDI data to get an overview of the harmonic structure of a MIDI file.
Chord Functions Chord Events Chord Events Chord events are representations of chords that control or transpose playback on MIDI, instrument, and audio tracks (Cubase Pro only). Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes and VariAudio segments (Cubase Pro only) if their tracks are set up to follow the chord track. Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the next chord event. They can have a root note, a type, a tension, and a bass note: 1.
Chord Functions Chord Events NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. 3. Chord definition buttons Activate these buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note for your chord event. NOTE If you do not select a separate bass note, the setting is linked to the root note, so that no extra bass note is heard. 4. Keyboard display Shows the notes of the chord event, considering the current voicing settings. 5.
Chord Functions Chord Events • Define a root note, for example, C, D, E. • Define accidentals, for example, # or b. • Define the chord type, for example maj, min, dim, sus, or aug. • Define a chord extension, for example 7, 9, or 13. NOTE If you have activated Solfège in the Note Name pop-up menu (File > Preferences > Event Display > Chords), you can also enter chords in this format. You must capitalize the first letter and write “Re” instead of “re”, for example.
Chord Functions Chord Events 1. Go to Previous/Go to Next Chord Allow you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing. 2. Add Chord Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track. NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. 3. Suggestions Shows suggestions for the next chord. Click a chord suggestion to select it. 4. Complexity Filter Allows you to increase the complexity and thus the number of suggestions.
Chord Functions Chord Events Allows you to select a cadence type for the suggestions. This way, only the chords with specific harmonic functions are suggested. 8. Chord Assistant tabs Click the tabs to open one of the chord assistant modes. Chord Assistant – Proximity (Cubase Pro only) The Proximity mode of the Chord Assistant takes a set of harmonic rules into account to offer suggestions that match the origin chord.
Chord Functions Chord Events 2. Click Chord Assistant. 3. Click Add Chord. 4. Do one of the following: 5. • To display the suggestions in a list, click the List tab. • To display the suggestions in a graphic, click the Proximity tab. Click a suggestion to select it. RESULT The suggested chord is added as chord event to the chord track. Repeat the steps above to create as many chord events as required by your harmonic structure.
Chord Functions Chord Events Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths The Circle of Fifths mode of the Chord Assistant shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of fifths. The origin chord that defines the current key is shown in the center of the Chord Assistant and is marked as tonic (I). The outer circle shows the twelve major chords ordered in intervals of fifths. The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords.
Chord Functions Scale Events 3. In the chord track Inspector, activate Acoustic Feedback. 4. From the Select Track for Auditioning pop-up menu, select the track that you want to use for auditioning. RESULT The chord events on the chord track now trigger the sound of the assigned instrument on the MIDI or instrument track. Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed You can change how chord events are displayed.
Chord Functions Voicings PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, activate Show Scales. The scale lane is displayed. 2. Select the chord event. A scale event is shown on the scale lane. 3. Do one of the following: • Click the first scale event on the chord track, and on the info line, select a Root Key and Type. • Double-click the scale event, and in the keyboard that appears, select a Root Key and Type of the scale. The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted.
Chord Functions Voicings Setting up Voicings To set up voicings for the entire chord track, you can use the chord track Inspector. 1. Voicing library Allows you to select Guitar, Piano, or Basic as a voicing library. 2. Voicing library subset NOTE This is only available if Guitar or Piano is set as voicing library. Allows you to select a preset voicing library subset. 3. Configure voicing parameters Allows you to configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme. 4.
Chord Functions Voicings Triads with maj9 Sets a triad with a major ninth, but without root note. Chords with more than 3 notes are not changed. Triads with maj9 and min9 Sets a triad with a major and a minor ninth, but without root note. Chords with more than 3 notes are not changed. 4-note chords Sets a 4-note chord without root note. Chords with less than 3 notes are not changed. 4-note chords (Open Jazz) Sets a 4-note chord without root note and without fifth.
Chord Functions Converting Chord Events to MIDI Modern Jazz Sets 4-note, 5-note, and 6-note chords, partly without root note, but with tensions. For Basic voicings only Octave Offset from C3 is available. This allows you to determine an offset value for the octave range. Converting Chord Events to MIDI You can convert chord events to MIDI for further editing or for printing a lead sheet in the Score Editor. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Add an instrument track or a MIDI track.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback using the Chord Track Assigning Chord Events to HALion Sonic SE Pads PREREQUISITE Create a chord progression on the chord track and add an instrument track with HALion Sonic SE as VST instrument to your project. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, select the chord events and drag them to the HALion Sonic SE pads. The first chord event is mapped to the pad where you dropped it, and all subsequent chord events are mapped to the following pads. 2.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback using the Chord Track NOTE If this is the first time that you open this pop-up menu for the track, the Follow Chord Track dialog opens. 4. In the Follow Chord Track dialog, make your settings. 5. Click OK. RESULT The events on your track now match the chord progression on the chord track. NOTE If you matched your MIDI track to the chord track, some of the original MIDI notes may be muted.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback using the Chord Track Root Notes This transposes MIDI notes to match the root note of the chord event. The effect corresponds to using the transpose track. This option is suitable for bass tracks. Voicings This transposes MIDI notes to match the voices of the selected voicing library. Single Voice Maps MIDI notes and VariAudio segments (Cubase Pro only) to the notes of a single voice (soprano, tenor, bass, etc.) of the voicing.
Chord Functions Assigning Voices to Notes Using Map to Chord Track This allows you to match individual parts or events to a chord progression on the chord track. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the events or parts that you want to map to the chord track. 2. Select Project > Chord Track > Map to Chord Track. 3. From the Mapping Mode pop-up menu, select a mapping mode. NOTE If you select Voicings and no voices are found, Auto mode is used instead. 4. Click OK.
Chord Functions Extracting Chord Events from MIDI Extracting Chord Events from MIDI You can extract chords from MIDI notes, parts, or tracks. This is useful if you have a MIDI file and want to show its harmonic structure, and use this file as starting point for further experimenting. PREREQUISITE Add the chord track and create MIDI notes that can be interpreted as chords. Drums, monophonic bass, or lead tracks are not suitable. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard Create Chord Symbols Dialog This dialog allows you to determine, which MIDI data should be taken into account when extracting chord events from MIDI. Include Bass Notes Activate this if you want your chord events to contain a bass note. Include Tensions Activate this if you want your chord events to contain tensions.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard NOTE The chord track uses its own voicing settings. The recorded chord events may therefore sound different.
Chord Pads Chord pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. In terms of harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to composition than the chord track functions. You can: • Perform with chords in realtime via a MIDI keyboard. • Record your performance as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the chord track. NOTE We assume that you have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Shows the current player and opens a menu where you can select another player. 2. Current Mode Shows the current player mode and opens a menu where you can select another player mode. 3. Chord Pad Each chord pad can contain a chord symbol. To change it, click the Open Editor control on the left edge of the chord pad. 4. Keyboard Shows which keys are played when you trigger a chord pad. To zoom the keyboard, click a key and drag up or down.
Chord Pads Chord Pads 1. Open Editor Opens the chord editor that allows you to select a chord for the chord pad. 2. Voicing Indicators Shows the voicing used for the chord. Voicing indicators can only be displayed if the horizontal zoom level for the chord pads is high enough. 3. Adaptive Voicing Reference/Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant When the active chord pad is set as adaptive voicing reference, its borders are shown in yellow.
Chord Pads Functions Menu Removes the chord assignment from the current pad. Functions Menu • Show Voicing Indicators Allows you to activate/deactivate the voicing indicators that can be displayed at the bottom of each chord pad. • Assign Pads from Chord Track Assigns the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads in the same order as they appear on the chord track. Chord events that have more than one occurrence are only assigned once.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant RESULT You can now click the chord pads or press some of the assigned keys on your MIDI keyboard to trigger the preassigned chords. Chord Assistant The Chord Assistant allows you to use a chord as a starting point for suggestions for the next chord. It assists you in finding the right chords for creating a chord progression for your song. • Click Show/Hide Chord Assistant on the left side of the chord pads area to open the Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant Chord Assistant – Proximity Mode (Cubase Pro only) The proximity mode of the Chord Assistant window uses a set of harmonic rules to offer suggestions that match the origin chord. The origin chord in the bottom center of the Chord Assistant window marks the tonal center. The farther away a chord suggestion is situated from this chord, the more complex the suggestion. The suggested chords are triads or 4-note chords. • To play a suggested chord, click it.
Chord Pads Assigning Chords to Chord Pads • To play a chord, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown with a highlighted border. • To assign a chord to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord and select Assign to Pad. You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad. • To assign a suggestion to the next unassigned chord pad and use this chord as origin, right-click the chord and select Assign to Pad and Use as Origin.
Chord Pads Assigning Chords to Chord Pads Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the chord editor. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the chord pad, and click Open Editor. 2. In the chord Editor window, use the chord definition buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note. The new chord is triggered automatically to give an acoustic feedback.
Chord Pads Assigning Chords to Chord Pads Assigning Chords with the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for a chord progression, but you do not know how to create such a progression, you can use the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths window. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use as a starting point and activate Use x as Origin for Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Moving and Copying Chord Pads The borders of the chord pad change their color to indicate that it is now ready for recording. 2. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys for the chord that you want to assign. The chord and its voicing is assigned to the chord pad, and you hear an acoustic feedback of the chord. NOTE The assigned voicing can be changed by the Adaptive Voicing setting.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords NOTE When you move or copy chord pads, the chord is moved or copied together with its settings, except for the Adaptive Voicings Reference. Playing Back and Recording Chords Playing Back Chord Pads with your MIDI Keyboard PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Instrument. 2. In the Add Instrument Track dialog, select a VST instrument. 3. Click Add Track.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control RESULT The triggered chords are recorded on the track. The note events are automatically assigned to different MIDI channels according to their pitches. Note events that correspond to the soprano voice are assigned to MIDI channel 1, alto is assigned to MIDI channel 2, and so on. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can now open the Key Editor and fine-tune your recorded MIDI parts using the chord editing functions, for example.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control 1. Show/Hide Settings Opens the settings for the chord pads. 2. Pad Control Allows you to set up remote keys for the chord pads and for voicings, tensions and transpose control. On the keyboard, these are highlighted in blue and in green. 3. Player Control Allows you to set up remote keys for the section player. On the keyboard, these are highlighted in brown. 4.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control Allows you to set the start and end note for the remote range. By default, Range Start is set to C1 and Range End to B1. This is indicated by the corresponding keys on the keyboard in the chord pads being highlighted in blue. You can trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads by hitting the keys that correspond to this note range on your MIDI keyboard. 2.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control 2. Subsections Allows you to assign remote keys for up to 5 subsections. You can use the subsection remote keys together with a pad remote key to trigger the chord notes that correspond to the section transposed by the offset that is specified by its subsection. There are no default remote keys for subsections. If you set remote keys for subsections, the corresponding keys on the keyboard in the chord pads are highlighted in light green. 3.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control Action Description Remote Note played chord of all chord pads. Transpose: Down Plays back the last played chord and transposes it downwards. E2 Transpose: Up Plays back the last played chord and transposes it upwards. F2 Transpose all chord pads The wheel position Pitchbend wheel determines the transposition value for the next played chords of all chord pads. Moving the wheel all the way up or all the way down corresponds to +/-5 semitones.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players RESULT On the keyboard, the indication for pads remote range is changed. Chord Pad Settings – Players On the Players tab in the chord pad Settings, you can change the voicing that is used for the chord pads. You can select different players with specific voicing settings that are typical for that kind of player. By default, the Piano Player option is active. By selecting Plain Chords, Pattern, or Sections, you can determine how the notes of a chord are played.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players • Select Off to filter nothing. • Select From MIDI Thru to filter unassigned keys, and keys that are assigned as remote keys for voicings, tensions, and transpose. • Select From Chord Pads to filter keys that are assigned as remote keys for chord pads, voicings, tensions, and transpose. • Select All to filter everything.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players Play Modes • Sections On your MIDI keyboard, first press a key that is assigned to a chord pad, then press the remote key for a specific section to hear the chord notes that correspond to the section. • Chord Pads On your MIDI keyboard, first press the remote key for a specific section, then press a key that is assigned to a chord pad to hear the chord notes that correspond to the section.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players NOTE To set Play Modes, Chord Note Distribution, and Mute Sections to their default settings, close the Custom Settings for Section Player pane and click Default. Playing Back Chord Sections You can play back single chord notes or chord sections of a chord pad. PREREQUISITE You have added an instrument track with an instrument assigned to your project. You have record-enabled the instrument track. You have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players If you want to set the voicing of a specific chord pad manually, and do not to want it changed automatically, you can use the voicing control to the right of a chord pad. When you assign your own voicing, adaptive voicing is deactivated for that chord pad, so that the pad does no longer follow the voice leading rules of the voicing reference. To activate adaptive voicing again, right-click the chord pad and activate Adaptive Voicing.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Pad Layout AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you have a pattern that you want to use in other projects, you can save it using the presets section in the pattern player. RELATED LINKS Assigning Voices to Notes on page 858 Setting Up the Results List Columns on page 570 Using Different Players on Multiple Tracks You can set up different players with different sounds on different tracks. If you recordenable these tracks and play the chord pads, each track uses a dedicated player.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Presets 1. Show/Hide Settings Opens the settings for the chord pads. 2. Keyboard Activate this to show the chord pads in a keyboard layout. You can display 1 or 2 octaves, and you can select if the first chord pad starts with C, A or E. 3. Grid Activate this to show the chord pads in a grid layout. You can display up to 4 rows and 16 columns. 4. Layout display Shows how the active chord pad layout is displayed.
Chord Pads Creating Events from Chord Pads 2. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. NOTE You can also define attributes for the preset. 3. Click OK to save the preset and exit the dialog. Creating Events from Chord Pads You can use the chords assigned to the chord pads to create chord events or MIDI parts in the Project window. • To create a chord event, drag a chord pad and drop it on the chord track.
The Logical Editor Introduction Most of the time you will perform your MIDI editing graphically in one of the MIDI editors. But there are times when you want more of a “search and replace” function on MIDI data, and that’s where the Logical Editor comes in. IMPORTANT The Logical Editor is only available in Cubase Pro. However, the Transformer MIDI effect and the Input Transformer that share many of the functions with the Logical Editor are also available in Cubase Artist.
The Logical Editor Opening the Logical Editor RELATED LINKS Working with presets on page 902 Opening the Logical Editor PROCEDURE 1. Select the desired parts or events. What will be affected by the operation depends on the current selection. • In the Project window, edits using the Logical Editor are applied to all selected parts, affecting all events (of the relevant types) in them. • In the MIDI editors, edits using the Logical Editor are applied to all selected events.
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions • To add a new condition, click the “+” button below the list. A new line is added at the bottom of the list. If there are many lines, you may need to use the scrollbar to the right to view them. • To remove a condition, select it and click the “-” button below the list.
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions Right bracket This is used for “bracketing” several lines together. bool This allows you to insert the boolean operators And/Or, when creating conditions with multiple lines. You can also set up filter conditions by dragging MIDI events directly into the upper list. If the list contains no entries, a MIDI event dragged into this section will form conditions including the state and type of the event.
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions Inside Bar Range (Logical Editor only) …is within the “zone” set up in the Bar Range/Time Base column (Position only), in each bar within the current selection. Outside Bar Range (Logical Editor only) …is outside the “zone” set up in the Bar Range/Time Base column (Position only), in each bar within the current selection. Before Cursor (Logical Editor only) …is before the song cursor position (Position only).
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions The Logical Editor will then find all elements inside or outside this position range. • If you select one of the Bar Range options in the Condition column, the Bar Range/ Time Base column will show a graphic bar display. You specify the range within the bar by clicking and dragging in the bar display (the specified Bar Range is highlighted).
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions Event type Value 1 Value 2 a higher resolution, you can make use of the “VST 3 Value Operation” parameter. NOTE System Exclusive events are not included in the table above, because they do not use value 1 and 2. Because value 1 and 2 have different meanings for different events, searching for value 2 = 64 would both find notes with the velocity 64 and controllers with the amount 64, etc.
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions RELATED LINKS Combining multiple condition lines on page 914 Searching for controllers There is similar extended functionality when searching for controllers: If you have added an additional “Type = Controller” condition line, the Logical Editor will “know” you are searching for controllers. The Parameter 1 column will then show the names of the MIDI controllers (Modulation, Volume, etc.) when Value 1 is selected as Filter Target.
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions Here, the Logical Editor will find all muted events. Here, the Logical Editor will find all events that are selected and muted. Cubase Pro only: Here, the Logical Editor will find all Note Expression data. Cubase Pro only: Here, the Logical Editor will find all MIDI controller events that form part of Note Expression data.
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions Filter Target Condition Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Last Event Equal Value 1 36/C1 Cubase Pro only: In this example, the action will be performed for Note Expression VST 3 Tuning events that are attached to a C1 note when C1 is pressed: Filter Target Condition Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Type is Equal VST 3 Event Tuning Last Event Equal MIDI Status 144/Note On Last Event Equal Value 1 36/C1 Searching for Chords (Logical Editor only) NOTE A not
The Logical Editor Setting up filter conditions Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Searches for… No. of Voices (Part) Enter a number for the number of voices of the chord. …chords with the specified number of voices in the selected MIDI part. Position in Chord (Part) Select the position (interval) in the chord. …the specified chord interval in the selected MIDI part. Note Number in Chord (lowest = 0) Enter a number for the voicing number of chord. …the specified voicing number in the selected MIDI part.
The Logical Editor Selecting a function The Logical Editor will find all events that are notes (regardless of their position) and all events starting at the beginning of the third bar (regardless of their type).bar. When you add a new condition line, the boolean setting defaults to And.
The Logical Editor Specifying actions Delete Deletes all elements found by the Logical Editor. In the case of the Transformer, this function will remove (or “mute”) all found elements from the “output stream” – the actual elements on the track are not affected. Transform Changes one or several aspects of the found elements. You set up exactly what is changed in the action list. Insert This will create new elements and insert these into the part(s) (Logical Editor) or the output stream (Transformer).
The Logical Editor Specifying actions The handling of the action list is similar to the filter condition list, but without the brackets and booleans. You simply add lines by clicking the “+” button below the list, and fill out the columns as required. To remove a superfluous action line, select it and click the “-” button. Action Target This is where you select the property that is changed in the events: Option Description Position (Logical Editor only) Adjusting this value will move the events.
The Logical Editor Specifying actions RELATED LINKS Searching for properties on page 913 Searching for Value 1 or Value 2 on page 891 Operation This setting determines what to do with the Action Target. The options on this pop-up menu are different depending on the selected Action Target. Below, all available operations are listed: Add Adds the value specified in the Parameter 1 column to the Action Target. Subtract Subtracts the value specified in the Parameter 1 column from the Action Target.
The Logical Editor Specifying actions Add Length (Logical Editor only) This is only available when Action Target is set to Position. Furthermore, it is only valid if the found events are notes (and thus have a length). When Add Length is selected, the length of each note event will be added to the Position value. This can be used for creating new events (using the Insert function) positioned relative to the end positions of the original notes.
The Logical Editor Applying the defined actions value ramp is then added to the existing values for the events within the loop range. For example, if you apply this to note velocities with Parameter 1 set to 0 and Parameter 2 set to -100, you create a velocity fade-out, keeping the original velocity relations: Cubase Pro only: NoteExp Operation – Remove Note Expression (Logical Editor only) This option is only available for notes. It allows you to remove all Note Expression data from a note.
The Logical Editor Working with presets This allows you to apply a preset to the selected MIDI part, without having to open the Logical Editor. • It is also possible to select and apply Logical Presets from within the List Editor (from the Mask menu). • It is also possible to set up a key command for a preset. That way you can conveniently apply the same operation to several selected events in one go.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) On the Edit menu you will find the function “Project Logical Editor…”. This opens a Project Logical Editor for the entire project. It works similar to the Logical Editor on the MIDI menu. The most important difference is that the Logical Editor for MIDI works at the event level, whereas the Project Logical Editor works at the project level and is therefore a very powerful tool for “search and replace” functions in your entire project.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Opening the Project Logical Editor IMPORTANT The Project Logical Editor allows all kinds of settings that may not always make sense. Experiment a bit before applying your edits to important projects. You can undo the operations by using the Undo command on the Edit menu. RELATED LINKS Working with presets on page 920 The Logical Editor on page 886 Opening the Project Logical Editor PROCEDURE 1. Open the desired project.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Setting up filter conditions General procedure The upper list is where you set up the filter conditions, determining which elements to find. The list contains one or several conditions, each on a separate line. • To add a new condition, click the “+” button below the list. The new line is added at the bottom of the list. If there are many lines, you may need to use the scrollbar to the right to view them.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Bar Range/Time Base This column is only used if the Filter Target is set to “Position”. If one of the “Bar Range” options is selected in the Condition column, you use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify “zones” within each bar (allowing you to find all elements on or around the first beat of every bar, for example).
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Marker If no container type is specified, this finds marker events and marker tracks. Transpose If no container type is specified, this finds transpose events and transpose tracks. Arranger If no container type is specified, this finds arranger events and arranger tracks. Tempo If no container type is specified, this finds tempo events and tempo tracks.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions …it will find all Folder tracks in the project. Container type filter When the Filter Target is set to Container Type, the pop-up menu lists the available container types. Folder Track This finds all folder tracks, included FX Channel and Group Channel folders. Track This finds all track types. Part This finds audio, MIDI, and instrument parts. Folder parts will not be found.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Here, the Project Logical Editor will find all MIDI and instrument parts (not tracks) or all audio events (not parts or tracks) in the project that are muted. Searching for Names PROCEDURE 1. Select Name on the Filter Target pop-up menu. 2. Enter the desired name, or a part of a name in the Parameter 1 column. 3. Open the pop-up menu in the Condition column and select the desired condition.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Parameter 2 column. You can also change the time base using the Bar Range/ Time Base column. The Project Logical Editor will then find all elements inside or outside this position range. • If you select one of the Bar Range options in the Condition column, the Bar Range/Time Base column will show a graphic bar display.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Inside Bar Range …is within the “zone” set up in the Bar Range/Time Base column, in each bar within the current selection. Outside Bar Range …is outside the “zone” set up in the Bar Range/Time Base column, in each bar within the current selection. Before Cursor …is before the song Project position. Beyond Cursor …is after the song Project position. Inside Track Loop …is inside the set track loop. Inside Cycle …is inside the set cycle.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Unequal …has any value other than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Bigger …has a value higher than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Bigger or Equal …has a value that is the same as or higher than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Less …has a value lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Less or Equal …has a value that is the same as or lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Setting up filter conditions Here, the Project Logical Editor will find all selected audio parts that are empty. NOTE Note that “event” in this context refers to all the Project window elements that can be modified, e. g. MIDI parts, audio events and parts, or transpose, arranger, and automation events. Combining multiple condition lines As described above, you can add condition lines by clicking the “+” button below the list.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying actions • Without brackets, the conditional expressions are evaluated according to their order in the list. Here, the Project Logical Editor will find all audio parts and events whose name contains perc as well as other parts and events (e. g. MIDI parts) whose name contains drums.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying actions Add Adds the value specified in the Parameter 1 column to the Position. Subtract Subtracts the value specified in the Parameter 1 column from the Position. Multiply by Multiplies the Position value with the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Divide by Divides the Position value by the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Round by This “rounds” the Position value using the value specified in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying actions Round by This “rounds” the Length value using the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. In other words, the Length value is changed to the closest value that can be divided by the Parameter 1 value. Set to fixed value This sets the Length to the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Set Random Values between This will add a random value to the current length.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying actions Lanes Active Enables, disables or toggles the lanes active status. Hide Track Enables, disables or toggles the track visibility status. Time Domain Sets the track time domain to Musical, Linear or toggles the status. Name This lets you rename the found elements. Replace Replaces names with the text specified in the Parameter 1 column. Append Names will be appended with the string specified in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Selecting a function Selecting a function The left pop-up menu at the bottom of the Project Logical Editor is where you select the function – the basic type of editing to be performed. The available options are: Delete Deletes all elements found by the Project Logical Editor. NOTE When you delete automation tracks and undo this operation by selecting Undo from the Edit menu, the automation tracks will be restored, but the tracks will be closed.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Working with presets Working with presets The Presets section in the upper left section of the window allows you to load, save and manage Project Logical Editor presets. A preset contains all settings in the window, which means you can simply load a preset, edit the settings (if necessary) and click Apply. • To load a preset, select it from the Presets pop-up menu. If available, an explanatory text appears to the right of the menu.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Working with presets Setting up key commands for your presets If you have stored Project Logical Editor presets, you can set up key commands for them: PROCEDURE 1. Open the File menu and select “Key Commands…”. The Key Commands dialog opens. 2. Use the list in the Commands column to navigate to the category “Process Project Logical Editor” and click the “+” sign to display the items in the folder. 3.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Project Tempo Modes For every project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed tempo or if it changes throughout the project. On the Transport panel you can set the following tempo modes: • Fixed Tempo Mode If you want to work with one fixed tempo that does not change throughout the project, deactivate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel. You can change the tempo value to set a fixed rehearsal tempo.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor NOTE For audio events on audio tracks that are set to musical time base, the tempo changes on the tempo track affect only the start position and not the actual audio. • Linear Use this mode for material with a linear, time-related time base. RELATED LINKS Instrument Track Inspector on page 114 MIDI Track Inspector on page 121 Audio Track Inspector on page 106 Tempo Track Editor The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events. The following tools are available: Activate Tempo Track Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode. Show/Hide Info Opens/Closes the info line. Tools Contains tools to select, erase, zoom, and draw. Auto-Scroll Allows the tempo event display to scroll during playback, keeping the project cursor visible in the editor.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Open Process Bars Dialog Opens the Process Bars dialog. Tempo Track You can use the tempo track to create tempo changes within a project. • To add a tempo track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Tempo. • You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to add and edit tempo events. • You can use the tempo event editor to edit selected tempo events. • To select a tempo event, click it with the Object Selection tool.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the values of the event values of the curve. 5. Compress Right If you Alt-click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the right part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the end of the curve. 6.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects • Tempo Detection Panel (Cubase Pro only) • Time Warp tool (Cubase Pro only) • Process Bars dialog (Cubase Pro only) • Process Tempo dialog (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes on page 927 Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes When you create a new project, the project tempo is automatically set to fixed tempo mode.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects RESULT The tempo event is added to the tempo curve. Setting up a Tempo Track by Recording Tempo Changes (Cubase Pro only) You can set up a complete tempo track by recording tempo changes. This is useful if you want to create natural sounding ritardandos, for example. PROCEDURE 1. Open the project for which you want to set up a tempo track and start playback. 2. Select Project > Tempo Track. 3.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects 9. Optional: To start the calculation of the tempo curve at the beginning of a bar, activate Begin at Bar Start. 10. Click OK. RESULT The project tempo is set to the tapped tempo. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the Tempo Track Editor to see and edit the new tempo curve.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects PROCEDURE 1. Play back the track with the analyzed material from the beginning and listen to the click. 2. Optional: If you work with an audio event, zoom in on the waveform so that you can compare the transients with the tempo events on the tempo track. 3.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo Adjusting the Tempo of a Range (Cubase Pro only) You can adjust the tempo of a range to match a specific length or end time. PROCEDURE 1. Set the left and right locator to specify the start and the end of the range you want to adjust. 2. Select Project > Tempo Track. 3. Click Open Process Tempo Dialog. 4. Open the Time Display Format pop-up menu and select a time display format for the new range. 5.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, select the Range Selection tool. 2. In the event display, make a selection that covers an exact number of beats of the recording. 3. Select Project > Beat Calculator. 4. In the Beats value field, enter the number of beats that the selection encompasses. The calculated tempo is shown in the BPM field. 5. In the Insert Tempo into Tempo Track section, click At Tempo Track Start.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Beat Calculator Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop You can set the project tempo from the tempo of an audio loop. PREREQUISITE Your project contains an audio loop that is not in Musical Mode. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window ruler, set the left locator to the beginning of the audio loop. 2. Set the right locator to the end of the last bar. This does not need to match with the end of the audio loop, but to its number of bars. 3. Select the audio loop. 4.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Detection (Cubase Pro only) If your project is in tempo Track mode, the calculated tempo is set as the first tempo curve point. If your project is in fixed tempo mode, the calculated tempo is set for the entire project. 5. Insert Tempo into Tempo Track At Selection Start If your project is in tempo track mode, the calculated tempo is set as a new tempo event at the start of the selection. 6. Refresh Allows you to recalculate the tempo.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Exporting a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) 4. Divide by 2 Allows you to halve the detected tempo. This is useful if your material is half as fast as the detected tempo. 5. Multiply by 4/3 Allows you to adjust the detected tempo with a factor of 4/3. This is useful if your material contains dotted notes or triplets and the algorithm detects 3 beats where 4 are expected. 6. Multiply by 3/4 Allows you to adjust the detected tempo with a factor of 3/4.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Tempo (Cubase Pro only) 3. Click Open. RESULT The tempo track is imported to your project together with signature events. All tempo track data in the project is replaced. Process Tempo (Cubase Pro only) The Process Tempo dialog allows you to set a range to a specific length or to adjust its end time by automatic adjustment of the tempo track.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Bars (Cubase Pro only) Shows the scaling value. Process Bars (Cubase Pro only) The Process Bars dialog allows you to insert, delete, replace, or reinterpret the signature events for a specified bar range by automatic adjustment of the signature and tempo events. • To open the Process Bars dialog, select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor, and click Open Process Bars Dialog. The following options are available: 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) NOTE The Time Warp tool can create tempo values up to 300 BPM. If you activate Time Warp on the toolbar, the ruler shows tempo events as flags with tempo values. If you click the Time Warp on the Project window toolbar, and click again, a pop-up menu opens where you can select one of the following modes: • Warp Grid If you use the Time Warp tool in this mode, the absolute time positions for all tracks that are set to musical time base are kept.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Set Definition From Tempo RESULT The musical position is adjusted to the time position, and the tempo value of the last tempo event before the click position is changed. If later tempo events exist, a new tempo event is created at the click position.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Set Definition From Tempo RESULT The tempo information is copied to the audio and the tracks are set to musical time base. This is achieved by applying warping to the events. Musical Mode is activated for the audio events. The audio tracks now follow any tempo changes in the project.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Window Overview The Project Browser window provides a list-based representation of the project. This allows you to view and edit all events on all tracks by using regular value editing in a list. 1. Project Structure list 2. Time Format pop-up menu 3. Add pop-up menu and Add button 4. Filter pop-up menu 5. Event display Opening the Project Browser You open the Project Browser by selecting “Browser” from the Project menu.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Window Overview • Items with hierarchical substructures can be folded out by clicking the “+” symbols or the “closed folder” symbols in the Project Structure list. When the substructure of an item is revealed, a “-” symbol or an “open folder” symbol is shown instead – click this to hide the substructure. • To reveal or hide all substructures in the Project Structure list, use the buttons “(+) All” and “(–) All” above the list.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks About the Sync Selection option If the “Sync Selection” checkbox is activated on the Project Browser toolbar, selecting an event in the Project window automatically selects it in the Project Browser, and vice versa. This makes it easy to locate events in the two windows. Editing tracks Editing audio tracks Audio tracks can have two “subitems”: Track Data and Automation.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Length The length of the event. Offset This determines “where in the audio clip” the event starts. Adjusting this value is the same as sliding the contents of the event in the Project window. You can only specify positive Offset values, because the event cannot start before the start of the clip. Likewise, it cannot end after the end of the clip. If the event already plays the whole clip, the Offset cannot be adjusted at all.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Setting a positive Offset value is the same as sliding the contents to the left, while a negative Offset corresponds to sliding the contents to the right. Mute Click in this column to mute or unmute the part. Creating audio parts When the “Audio” item of an audio track is selected in the Project Structure list, you can create empty audio parts on the track by clicking the Add button on the toolbar. This will insert a part between the left and right locator.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks • For controller events, this is the type of controller, displayed in words. Note that you can edit this by entering a number – the corresponding controller type is automatically displayed. • For pitchbend events, this is the fine adjustment of the bend amount. • For poly pressure events, this is the note number (pitch). • For VST 3 events, this is the event parameter (e. g. Volume). • For other event types, this is the value of the event.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Mute Click in this column to mute or unmute the part. NOTE For SysEx (system exclusive) events, you can only edit the position (Start) in the list. However, clicking the Comment column opens the SysEx Editor, in which you can perform detailed editing of system exclusive events.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Creating MIDI parts When a MIDI track is selected in the Project Structure list, you can create empty MIDI parts on the track by clicking the Add button. This will insert a part between the left and right locator. Creating MIDI events You can use the Project Browser to create new MIDI events. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI part in the Project Structure list. 2. Move the project cursor to the desired position for the new event. 3.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks You can use the two columns in the list to edit the position of the events and their values. Editing the video track When the video track is selected in the Project Structure list, the event display lists the video events on the track, with the following parameters: Name The name of the video clip that the event refers to. Start The start position of the event. Editing this value is the same as moving the event. End The end position of the event.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks to that marker. By editing these values, you can assign the most important markers to key commands. You can insert markers on the selected marker track by selecting “Marker” or “Cycle Marker” from the Add pop-up menu and clicking the Add button. Regular markers will be added at the current project cursor position while cycle markers will be added between the current left and right locator positions.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Deleting events The procedure for deleting events is the same for all different track types: PROCEDURE 1. Click on an event (or a part) in the Event display to select it. 2. Select Delete from the Edit menu or press Delete or Backspace. IMPORTANT Note that you cannot delete the first tempo event or the first time signature event.
Export Audio Mixdown The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export all audio that is contained between the left and right locators of a project. Cubase Pro only: You can also export audio that is contained in different ranges defined by cycle markers. To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown. The Export Audio Mixdown dialog is divided into several sections: 1.
Export Audio Mixdown Mixing Down to Audio Files Cubase Pro only: Allows you to export sections of your project that are defined by cycle marker ranges of the active marker track. 3. File Location Allows you to set up the naming scheme and to select a path for the exported file. 4. File Format Allows you to select a file format and make additional settings for the file to be created. This includes codec settings, meta data, sample rate, bit depth, etc.
Export Audio Mixdown Available Channels for Export Available Channels for Export The Channel Selection section of the Export Audio Mixdown dialog contains a list of channels that you can export as an audio mixdown. The channels are organized in a hierarchical structure. Channels of the same type are grouped. This allows you to easily identify and select the channels for export. NOTE MIDI tracks are not available for export. To include MIDI in a mixdown, you must record MIDI to audio tracks.
Export Audio Mixdown File Location Activate this option if you want to mix down several channels simultaneously. An individual file is created for each channel. If you activate a channel type in the list, all channels of this type are selected. 2. Channels available for export In the list, activate the channels that you want to include in the mixdown. Only the sound of the activated channels is included in the mixdown. MixConsole settings, record enable, and insert effects are taken into account. 3.
Export Audio Mixdown File Location Specifies the name of the mixdown file. 2. Naming Options Opens a pop-up menu with naming options: 3. • Set To Project Name inserts the project name into the Name field. • Auto Update Name adds a number to the file name and increments the number every time you export a file. Path Opens a dialog that allows you to browse for a file location. 4. Path Options Opens a pop-up menu with the following options: 5.
Export Audio Mixdown File Location 1. Scheme Allows you to select, create, save, and delete naming schemes. 2. Attributes Shows the available naming scheme attributes. 3. Result Allows you to drag and drop attributes to this field and rearrange them by dragging. 4. Settings Allows you to make separator and counter settings. 5. Preview Displays a preview of your current naming scheme.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format Always Ask Always asks if an existing file should be overwritten or if a new unique file name should be created by adding an incremental number. Create Unique File Name Creates a unique file name by adding an incremental number. Always Overwrite Always overwrites the existing file. File Format The File Format section allows you to select a format and make additional settings for the mixdown file.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format files. They are especially suited for long recordings with file sizes over 2 GB. The files have the extension .w64. Wave Files Wave files have the extension .wav and are the most common file format on the PC platform. If you select the Wave File format for the exported file, you can make the following settings: 1. Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format AIFC Files AIFC files support compression ratios as high as 6:1 and contain tags in the header. AIFC files have the extension .aifc and are used on most computer platforms. 1. Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format. NOTE By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may not be able to handle these files.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format 3. Insert iXML Chunk Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and project frame rate. 4. Insert Tempo Definition This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include tempo information from the tempo track or from the Definition section of the Sample Editor in the iXML chunk of the exported files. MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) files MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format Windows Media Audio File Settings - General The General tab in the Windows Media Audio File Settings dialog allows you to specify sample rate, bit rate, and channels for the encoded file. 1. Sample Rate Allows you to set the sample rate to 44.100, 48000, or 96000 kHz. Set this to match the sample rate of the source material or use the closest available value that is higher than the actual value. 2. Bit Depth Allows you to set the bit depth to 16 bit or 24 bit.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format Windows Media Audio File Settings - Advanced The Advanced tab in the Windows Media Audio File Settings dialog allows you to specify the dynamic range control, that is, the difference in dB between the average loudness and the peak audio level (the loudest sounds) of the audio for the encoded file. 1. Dynamic Range Control The dynamic range is automatically calculated during the encoding process. If you activate this option, you can specify the dynamic range manually.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format Flac Files Free Lossless Audio Codec files are audio files that are typically 50 to 60 % smaller than regular Wave files. 1. Compression Level Sets the compression level for the FLAC file. Since FLAC is a lossless format, the level has more influence on the encoding speed than on the file size.
Export Audio Mixdown Audio Engine Output NOTE Activating this option creates a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may not be able to handle Broadcast Wave files. If you get problems using the file in another application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk and export the file again. 2. Edit Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter embedded information. 3. Insert iXML Chunk Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and project frame rate. 4.
Export Audio Mixdown Import Into Project Allows you to export the mixdown file in realtime. This takes at least the same time as regular playback. Some VST plug-ins, external instruments, and effects require real-time export in order to have enough time to update correctly during the mixdown. Consult the plug-in manufacturers for further information. Cubase Pro only: During the real-time export of a single channel, the Audition Volume fader is displayed in the progress dialog.
Export Audio Mixdown Post Process Imports the resulting audio file automatically back into the Pool as a clip. Deactivating this option also deactivates the Audio Track option. 2. Audio Track Creates an audio event that plays the clip on a new audio track, starting at the left locator. Activating this option also activates the Pool option. 3. Pool Folder Allows you to specify a Pool folder for the clip. 4.
Export Audio Mixdown Post Process 4. Post Process If WaveLab 7.0.1 or higher is installed on your computer, you can select Open in WaveLab to open your mixdown file in this application after export. Select Upload to SoundCloud to launch SoundCloud, connect to your user account, and upload your mixdown.
Synchronization Background What is synchronization? Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same exact speed and position. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines to digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video devices. Synchronization basics There are 3 basic components of audio/visual synchronization: position, speed, and phase.
Synchronization Timecode (positional references) also refer to the device that is generating the position and speed references. Care must be taken to differentiate between the 2. Master and slave Calling one device the “master” and another the “slave” can lead to a great deal of confusion. The timecode relationship and the machine control relationship must be differentiated in this regard.
Synchronization Timecode (positional references) and frame rates. The reasons for this confusion are described in detail below. The timecode format can be divided into 2 variables: frame count and frame rate. Frame count (frames per second) The frame count of timecode defines the standard with which it is labeled. There are 4 timecode standards: 24 fps Film (F) This frame count is the traditional count for film. It is also used for HD video formats and commonly referred to as “24 p”.
Synchronization Clock sources (speed references) 25 fps This is the frame rate of PAL video. 29.97 fps This is the frame rate of NTSC video. The count can be either non-drop or dropframe. 30 fps This frame rate is not a video standard anymore but has been commonly used in music recording. Many years ago it was the black and white NTSC broadcast standard. It is equal to NTSC video being pulled up to film speed after a 2-3 telecine transfer. 59.98 fps (Cubase Pro only) This rate is also referred to as “60 p”.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog AES/SPDIF Digital Audio An audio clock source is embedded within AES and SPDIF digital audio signals. This clock source can be used as a speed reference. Preferably, the signal itself does not contain any actual audio (digital black), but any digital audio source can be used if necessary. ADAT Lightpipe ADAT Lightpipe, the 8-channel digital audio protocol developed by Alesis, also contains audio clock and can be used as a speed reference.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog Timecode Source The Timecode Source setting determines whether Cubase is acting as timecode master or slave. When set to “Internal Timecode”, Cubase is the timecode master, generating all position references for any other device in the system. The other options are for external timecode sources. Selecting any of these, makes Cubase a timecode slave if “Use External Synchronization” is activated in the Transport menu.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog Lock Frames This setting determines how many full frames of timecode it takes for Cubase to try and establish sync or “lock”. If you have an external tape transport with a very short start-up time, try lowering this number to make lock-up even faster. This option can only be set to multiples of 2. Drop Out Frames This setting determines the amount of missed timecode frames it takes for Cubase to stop.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog MC Master Active If this option is activated, transport commands are routed or sent to any device while sync is enabled. Additional routing options become available, see below. Deactivating this option does not affect the operation of the individual MMC Device panels. They can still function regardless of the machine control destination.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog Machine Control Input (Cubase Pro only) Cubase can respond to machine control commands from external MIDI devices. Cubase can follow incoming transport commands (locate, play, record) and respond to record-enabling commands for audio tracks. This allows Cubase to easily integrate into larger studio systems with centralized machine control and synchronization such as theatrical mixing stages.
Synchronization Synchronized operation MIDI Timecode Follows Project Time Activate this option to ensure that the MTC output follows Cubase’s time position at all times including looping, locating, or jumping while playing. If not, MTC will continue on without changing locations at a loop or jump point until playback stops. MIDI Clock Destinations Some MIDI devices like drum machines can match their tempo and location to incoming MIDI clock. Select any MIDI ports that you want to output MIDI clock.
Synchronization Example Scenarios (Cubase Pro only) Sync mode If you activate “Use External Synchronization” on the Transport menu, the following happens: • Cubase Pro only: Transport commands are routed to the machine control destination output as specified in the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Locate, Play, Stop, and Record commands will now be sent to an external device.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link When recording from the hard disk recorder into Cubase, Cubase will be the machine control master and the timecode slave, locking to incoming MTC. 3. In the “Machine Control Output Destination” section, select the “MIDI Machine Control” option. Cubase will now send MMC commands to the hard disk recorder to locate and start playback. 4.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link • 2 or more computers. These can be of the same type or use different operating systems – it does not matter. For example, you can link an Intel-based PC to an Apple Macintosh without problems. • Each computer must have audio hardware with specific ASIO drivers. • The audio hardware must have digital inputs and outputs. To be able to connect the computers, the digital connections must be compatible (i. e.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link The clock mode or sync mode is set up in the ASIO control panel of the audio hardware. Proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. From the Devices menu, open the Device Setup dialog. 2. On the VST Audio System page, select your audio interface from the ASIO Driver popup menu. In the Devices list, the name of the audio interface now appears as a subentry to the “VST Audio System” entry. 3. In the Devices list, select your audio interface. 4.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link However, the latency time of a VST System Link network is the total latency of all the ASIO cards in the system added together. Therefore it is extra important to minimize the latency times for each computer in the network. IMPORTANT The latency does not affect the synchronization – it is always perfectly in time. But it can affect the time it takes to send and receive MIDI and audio signals, or make the system seem sluggish.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link NOTE From this point on in this chapter, we refer to the busses connected to the digital inputs and outputs as “VST System Link busses”. Settings for the audio hardware When you exchange VST System Link data between computers, it is important that the digital information is not changed in any way between the programs.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link 3. Use the ASIO Input and ASIO Output pop-up menus to define which channel is the networking channel. 4. Activate the Active checkbox at the top left of the panel. 5. Repeat the steps above for every computer in the network. RESULT As the computers are made active, you should see the Sending and Receiving indicators flashing on each active computer, and the name of each computer should appear in the list at the bottom of the pane.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link NOTE Note that any computer can control any and all of the others – VST System Link is a peer-topeer network and there is no absolute “master” computer. To put all computers online, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. For all computers, activate the Online checkbox on the VST System Link page. 2.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link Using MIDI As well as supplying transport and sync control, VST System Link also supplies up to 16 MIDI ports, with 16 channels each. PROCEDURE 1. Use the MIDI Inputs and MIDI Outputs value fields to specify the number of MIDI ports you need. The default value is 0 MIDI In and 0 MIDI Out ports. 2. In the Project window, create a MIDI track and open the Inspector (top section). 3.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link Hearing the network audio If you are using an external mixing desk, hearing your audio really is not an issue – just plug the outputs of each computer into the desired channels on the external mixing desk, start playback on one of the computers, and you are good to go. However, many people prefer to mix internally inside the computer and just use a desk for monitoring (or maybe not use any external mixer at all).
Synchronization Activating VST System Link Internal mixing and latency One problem with mixing inside the computer is the latency issue we mentioned earlier. The VST engine always compensates for record latencies, but if you are monitoring through computer 1 you will hear a processing delay while you listen to signals coming from your other computers (not on your recording!). If your audio card in computer 1 supports ASIO Direct Monitoring you should definitely turn this on.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link 4. Route the VST instrument channel to the desired output bus. If you are using computer 1 as your main mixing computer, this would be one of the VST System Link output busses, connected to computer 1. 5. Create a new MIDI track in the Project window of computer 2 and assign the MIDI output of the track to the VST instrument you created. 6. Assign the MIDI input of the track to be VST System Link port 1.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link RESULT The signal will be sent to the track on computer 2 and processed through its insert effect, without using any processor power on computer 1. You can repeat the steps above to add more effects to the “virtual effect rack”.
Video Cubase supports the integration of video files in your project. You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within Cubase, edit your music to the video, extract the audio material from a video file, and replace the audio later with different audio material. Before You Start When working on a project involving a video file, you first need to set up your system according to your equipment and your demands.
Video Before You Start Format Description MOV This is a QuickTime movie. QT This is also a QuickTime movie, but it is only used on Windows systems. MPEG-1 This is the first standard of the Moving Picture Experts Group for video and audio compression, used for making video CDs. Files of this container format can have the extensions “.mpg” or “.mpeg”.
Video Before You Start Frame Rates Cubase is capable of working with different types of video and film frame rates. RELATED LINKS Frame rate (speed) on page 971 Video Output Devices Cubase supports several ways to play back video files. Viewing video files onscreen in the Video Player window may work just fine for many applications, but often it is necessary to display video in a large format for viewing small details and so others involved in the session can also see the video.
Video Preparing a Video Project FireWire DV Output You have the option to use FireWire ports on the computer to output DV video streams to external converters such as various camcorders and standalone FireWire to DV conversion units. These units can be connected to a television or projector for large format viewing. The FireWire protocol is capable of transporting data at high speed and is the most common standard for communicating with video-related peripheral equipment.
Video Preparing a Video Project IMPORTANT In Cubase, you may work with multiple video files of differing frame rates and formats on the same video track. Assuming you have the proper codecs installed, all video files can be played back in one project, but note that proper synchronization of audio and video events is ensured only if the frame rate of the video file matches the project frame rate.
Video Preparing a Video Project • If you have more than one video file in a project, it is advisable that all video files have the same frame rate consistent with the project frame rate. Nevertheless, you can work with multiple video files of differing frame rates, but in this case you should always change the project frame rate to the frame rate of the video file that you are editing at the moment.
Video Playing Back Video A thumbnail cache file is created, or, in case there already existed a thumbnail cache file for the video file, it is “refreshed”. • In the Project window, open the context menu for the video event, and select “Generate Thumbnail Cache” from the Media submenu. • Open the Media Menu and select “Generate Thumbnail Cache”. NOTE • “Refreshing” an already existing thumbnail cache file can be done only from within the Pool.
Video Playing Back Video All devices in your system that are capable of playing back video are listed. The Onscreen Window device serves for playing back the video file on your computer monitor. 3. From the pop-up menu in the Format column, select an output format. For the Onscreen Window output, only a “fixed” format is available. For the other output devices, you can select different output formats for playback depending on the device. 4. Adjust the Offset setting to compensate for processing delays.
Video Playing Back Video Video Player The Video Player window is used for playing back video on your computer screen. • To open the Video Player window, open the Devices menu and select the “Video Player” option. Setting the Window Size and Video Quality To resize the Video Player window and/or change the playback quality of the video, select the appropriate option on the context menu of the Video Player window. Fullscreen Mode The window is enlarged to occupy the whole (computer) screen.
Video Editing Video Internal The Video Player window can be resized at will, but the aspect ratio of the video is kept and borders are displayed around the video image to fill the window. External The resizing of the Video Player window is limited according to the aspect ratio of the video image, i. e. the video image always fills the full window and its aspect ratio is kept. NOTE When the video is played back in full screen mode, the aspect ratio of the video is always kept.
Video Replacing the Audio in a Video File • By using the “Audio from Video File” option on the Import submenu of the File menu. This will insert an audio event starting at the project cursor position on the selected audio track. If no audio track is selected, a new one will be created. • By activating the “Extract Audio on Import Video File” option in the Preferences dialog (Video page). This will automatically extract the audio stream from any video file during import.
ReWire Introduction ReWire is a special protocol for streaming audio between two computer applications. Developed by Propellerhead Software and Steinberg, ReWire provides the following possibilities and features: • Realtime streaming of up to 256 (Cubase Artist: 128) separate audio channels, at full bandwidth, from the synthesizer application into the mixer application. In this case, the mixer application is of course Cubase. An example of a synthesizer application is Propellerhead Software’s Reason.
ReWire Activating ReWire channels 2. Enable one or several ReWire channels in the ReWire Device dialog for the other application. 3. Launch the other application. It may take slightly longer for the application to start when you are using ReWire. RELATED LINKS Activating ReWire channels on page 1004 Quitting a ReWire session When you are finished, you also need to quit the applications in a special order. PROCEDURE 1. First quit the synthesizer application. 2. Then quit Cubase.
ReWire Using the transport and tempo controls 3. If desired, double-click on the labels in the right column, and type in another name. These labels will be used in the Cubase MixConsole to identify the ReWire channels. Using the transport and tempo controls IMPORTANT This is only relevant if the synthesizer application has some sort of built-in sequencer or similar. Basic transport controls When you run ReWire, the transports in the two programs are completely linked.
ReWire Routing MIDI via ReWire When you write automation, channel automation tracks will automatically appear in the Project window. This allows you to view and edit the automation graphically, just as with VST instrument channels, etc. • You can mix down the audio from ReWire channels to a file on your hard disk with the Export Audio Mixdown function. You can export the output bus to which you have routed the ReWire channels.
ReWire Considerations and limitations ASIO drivers ReWire works well with ASIO drivers. By using the Cubase bus system you can route sounds from the synthesizer application to various outputs on an ASIO compatible audio card.
Key Commands Introduction Most of the main menus in Cubase have keyboard shortcuts for certain items on the menus. In addition, there are numerous other Cubase functions that can be performed via key commands. These are all default settings. You can customize existing key commands to your liking, and also add commands for many menu items and functions that have no key command assigned.
Key Commands Setting up key commands Setting up key commands Adding or modifying a key command In the Key Commands dialog you will find all main menu items and a large number of other functions, arranged in a hierarchical way similar to the File Explorer and Mac OS Finder. The function categories are represented by a number of folders, each containing various menu items and functions.
Key Commands Setting up key commands For a description of how to use the search function, see below. 6. When you have found and selected the desired item, click in the “Type in Key” field and enter a new key command. You can choose any single key or a combination of one or several modifier keys (Alt, Ctrl/Cmd, Shift) plus any key. Just press the keys you want to use. 7. If the key command you enter is already assigned to another item or function, this is displayed below the “Type in Key” field.
Key Commands Setting up key commands Removing a key command PROCEDURE 1. Use the list of categories and commands to select the item or function for which you want to remove a key command. The key command is shown in the Keys column and the Keys list. 2. Select the key command in the Keys list and click the Delete button (the trash icon). You are asked whether you really want to remove the key command. 3. Click Remove to remove the selected key command. 4. Click OK to close the dialog.
Key Commands Setting up key commands You can also assign key commands to macros. All macros you have created appear in the upper section of the Key Commands dialog under the Macros category – just select a macro and assign a key command as with any other function. Saving key commands presets As mentioned above, any changes made to the key commands are automatically stored as a Cubase preference. However, it is also possible to save key commands settings separately.
Key Commands Setting up tool modifier keys 3. In the file dialog, use the “Files of type” pop-up menu to specify if you want to import a key commands file (“.key”) or a macro commands file (extension “.mac”). When you have imported an older file, you might want to save it as a preset (see above) to be able to access it from the Presets pop-up menu in the future. 4. Navigate to the file you want to import and click “Open”. The file is imported. 5.
Key Commands The default key commands 4. Hold down the desired modifier key(s) and click the Assign button. The current modifier keys for the action are replaced. If the modifier keys you pressed are already assigned to another tool, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite them. If you do, this will leave the other tool without any modifier keys assigned. 5. When you are done, click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog.
Key Commands The default key commands Devices category Option Key command MixConsole Lower Zone Alt-F3 Mixer F3 Video F8 Virtual Keyboard Alt-K VST Connections F4 VST Instruments F11 VST Performance F12 Edit category Option Key command Activate/Deactivate Focused Object Alt-A Auto-Scroll On/Off F Copy Ctrl/Cmd-C Cut Ctrl/Cmd-X Cut Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-X Delete Delete or Backspace Delete Time Shift-Backspace Duplicate Ctrl/Cmd-D Expand/Reduce Alt-E Find Track/Channel Ctrl
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Invert Alt-F Left Selection Side to Cursor E Lock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L Move to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd-L Move to Front (Uncover) U Mute M Mute Events Shift-M Mute/Unmute Objects Alt-M Open Ctrl/Cmd-E Paste Ctrl/Cmd-V Paste at Origin Alt-V Paste Relative to Cursor Shift-V Paste Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-V Primary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Down Arrow Primary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Up Arrow Record Enable R Redo Ctrl
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Snap On/Off J Solo S Split At Cursor Alt-X Split Range Shift-X Stationary Cursor Alt-C Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z Ungroup Ctrl/Cmd-U Unlock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-U Unmute Events Shift-U Write W Editors category Option Key command Edit In-Place Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-I Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd-R Open/Close Editor Return File category Option Key command Close Ctrl/Cmd-W New Ctrl/Cmd-N Open Ctrl/Cmd-O Quit Ctrl/Cmd-Q Save Ctrl/Cmd-S 10
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Save As Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-S Save New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-S Media category Option Key command Open MediaBay F5 Preview Cycle On/Off Shift-Num / Preview Start Shift-Enter Preview Stop Shift-Num 0 Search MediaBay Shift-F5 Toggle Attribute Inspector Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 6 Toggle Filters Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 5 Toggle Location Tree Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 4 Toggle Locations Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 8 Toggle Previewer Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 2 MIDI category Opt
Key Commands The default key commands Navigate category Option Key command Add Down: Shift-Down Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the bottom/ Move selected event in the Key Editor down 1 octave Shift-Left Arrow Add Left: Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the left Shift-Right Arrow Add Right: Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the right Shift-Up Arrow Add Up: Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the top/Move selected event
Key Commands The default key commands Nudge category Option Key command End Left Alt-Shift-Left Arrow End Right Alt-Shift-Right Arrow Left Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow Right Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow Start Left Alt-Left Arrow Start Right Alt-Right Arrow Project category Option Key command Open Browser Ctrl/Cmd-B Open Markers Ctrl/Cmd-M Open Pool Ctrl/Cmd-P Open Tempo Track Ctrl/Cmd-T Remove Selected Tracks Shift-Delete Setup Shift-S Quantize category Option Key command Quantize Q Set Ins
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command 1/4 Alt-3 1/8 Alt-4 1/16 Alt-5 1/32 Alt-6 1/64 Alt-7 1/128 Alt-8 Toggle Dotted Alt-.
Key Commands The default key commands TrackVersions category Option Key command Duplicate Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-D New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N Next Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-H Previous Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G Transport category Option Key command Activate Punch In I Activate Punch Out O Cycle Num / Enter Left Locator Shift-L Enter Project Cursor Position Shift-P Enter Punch In Position Shift-I Enter Punch Out Position Shift-O Enter Right Locator Shift-R Enter Tempo Shift-T Ente
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Go to Right Locator Num 2 Insert Marker (Windows only) Insert Locate Next Event N Locate Next Hitpoint Alt-N Locate Next Marker Shift-N Locate Previous Event B Locate Previous Hitpoint Alt-B Locate Previous Marker Shift-B Locate Selection Start L Locators to Selection P Loop Selection Alt-P Nudge Cursor Left Ctrl/Cmd-Num - Nudge Cursor Right Ctrl/Cmd-Num + Panel (Transport panel) F2 Play Selection Range Alt-Space Recal
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Set Marker 3 to 9 Ctrl/Cmd-Num 3 to 9 or Ctrl/Cmd- 3 to 9 Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd-Num 2 Start Enter Start/Stop Space Stop Num 0 To Marker 1 Shift-1 To Marker 2 Shift-2 To Marker 3 to 9 Num 3 to 9 or Shift-3 to 9 Use External Synchronization Alt-Shift-T Use Metronome C Use Tempo Track T Window Zones Option Key command Show/Hide Left Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-L; Alt-I Show/Hide Right Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Show/Hide Overview Alt--O Windows category Option Key command Inline: Key Commands Shift-F4 Inline: Settings Shift-F3 Inline: View Layout Shift-F2 Workspaces category Option Key command New Ctrl/Cmd-Num 0 No Workspace Alt-Num 0 Update Workspace Alt-U Workspace 1-9 Alt-Num 1-9 Workspace X Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 0 Zoom category Option Key command Zoom Full Shift-F Zoom In H Zoom In Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow Zoom In Vertically
Key Commands The default key commands Option Key command Zoom to Event Shift-E Zoom to Selection Alt-S Zoom Tracks Exclusive Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Down Arrow 1026
File handling Importing audio In Cubase audio can be imported in a variety of different formats. For example, you can import tracks from audio CDs, or import audio files saved in different formats (compressed and uncompressed).
File handling Importing audio NOTE When you import 5-channel interleaved files that do not have the speaker arrangement metadata (“BEXT”), Cubase always considers them as 5.0 format. Use Settings No Options dialog will appear when you import.
File handling Importing audio 1. Play 2. Stop 3. Play from Left Marker 4. Play to Right Marker 5. Start of selection handle 6. End of selection handle To import one or more tracks, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. If you have more than one CD drive, select the correct one from the Drive pop-up menu at the top left. On opening the CD, the program tries to retrieve the track names from CDDB (a CD database).
File handling Importing audio 5. Click on the Copy button to create a local copy of the audio file(s) or section(s). The copied files are listed at the bottom of the dialog. By default, imported audio CD tracks will be stored as Wave files (Windows) or AIFF files (Mac OS) in the Audio folder of the current project. To change the folder, click Destination Folder and select a different folder from the dialog. During copying, the Copy button is labeled “Stop”; click it to stop the process. 6.
File handling Importing audio • If you want to copy and import a section of an audio CD track only, select the track in the list and specify the start and end of the selection to be copied by dragging the handles in the copy selection ruler. NOTE Note that you can import sections of several audio CD tracks by selecting them in turn and adjusting the selection. The start and end settings for each track are displayed in the list. • You can audition the selected audio CD track by clicking the Play button.
File handling Importing audio IMPORTANT For this to work, the REX Shared Library needs to be installed on your system. PROCEDURE 1. Select an audio track and move the project cursor to where you want the imported file to start. You probably want to import REX files to audio tracks that are set to musical time base, since this will allow you to change the tempo later on (having the imported REX file automatically adjust). 2. Select “Audio File…” from the Import submenu of the File menu. 3.
File handling Exporting and importing OMF files (Cubase Pro only) FLAC files FLAC is an open source format and stands for Free Lossless Audio Codec. Audio files in this format are typically 50 to 60 % smaller than regular Wave files. FLAC files are not converted to Wave files on import. MPEG audio files MPEG, which stands for Moving Picture Experts Group, is the name of a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information (e. g. movies, video, music) in a digital compressed format.
File handling Exporting and importing OMF files (Cubase Pro only) 2. Use the track list to the left to select the tracks that you want to include in the exported file. To select all tracks, click the “Select All” button. Normally, the whole project is included – to export the range between the locators only, activate “From Left to Right Locator”.
File handling Exporting and importing OMF files (Cubase Pro only) 6. If you selected the “2.0 File” option above, you can choose whether to include the volume settings and fades for the events (as set up with the event volume and fade handles) as well as the clip names – to include these in the OMF file, activate “Export Clip Based Volume”, “Use Fade Curves” and/or “Export Clip Names”. 7. Specify a sample size (resolution) for the exported files (or use the current project settings). 8.
File handling Exporting and importing standard MIDI files This allows you to manually import the video files, using the Markers as position references. A new, untitled project is created (or tracks are added to the existing project), containing the audio events of the imported OMF file. Exporting and importing standard MIDI files Cubase can import and export standard MIDI files, which makes it possible to transfer MIDI material to and from virtually any MIDI application on any platform.
File handling Exporting and importing standard MIDI files Option Description as MIDI Volume and Pan events in the MIDI file. Export Automation If this option is activated, the automation data (as heard during playback) are converted to MIDI controller events and included in the MIDI file. This also includes automation recorded with the MIDI Control plug-in (see the separate PDF document Plug-in Reference). Note that if a continuous controller (e. g.
File handling Exporting and importing standard MIDI files Option Description on different MIDI channels). If you do not activate this option, the MIDI file will be of Type 1 (data on separate tracks). Which type to choose depends on what you want to do with the MIDI file (in which application or sequencer it should be used, etc.). Export Resolution You can specify a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file.
File handling Exporting and importing MIDI loops Importing MIDI files To import a MIDI file from disk, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Select “MIDI File…” from the Import submenu of the File menu. 2. If there is already an open project, a dialog opens in which you can select whether a new project is created for the file. If you select “No”, the MIDI file will be imported into the current project. 3. Locate and select the MIDI file in the file dialog that opens and click Open.
File handling Exporting and importing track archives (Cubase Pro only) Exporting and importing track archives (Cubase Pro only) You can export Cubase tracks (audio, FX, group, instrument, MIDI, and video) as track archives for import into other Cubase (or Nuendo) projects. All the information associated with the tracks will be exported (channel settings, automation tracks, parts and events, etc.).
File handling Exporting and importing track archives (Cubase Pro only) • To import a track as a new TrackVersion of an existing track, select a track from the track list. 5. Optional: Activate Copy to Active Project Folder if you want to import the media files into your project folder. 6. Optional: Activate Perform Sample Rate Conversion if the sample rate of the imported media files is different from the sample rate of your project. 7. Click OK.
File handling Exporting and importing track archives (Cubase Pro only) • If a track is imported as a new TrackVersion, this new track version contains all events of the imported track. The mixer settings of your active project are not changed. NOTE Imported track versions must be of the same type as the track in your active project. To select a track as destination for the imported track, click on the corresponding list entry.
File handling Track Import from Projects Track Import from Projects Audio, instrument, MIDI, chord, marker, and video tracks can be imported directly from other Nuendo or Cubase projects. You can import audio, instrument, and MIDI tracks either as new tracks or as new TrackVersions of existing tracks. Depending on the track type that you want to import, the following applies: Audio, instrument, and MIDI tracks • If you import a track as a new track, a new track is created in your project.
File handling Track Import from Projects PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Tracks from Project. 2. In the file dialog, select a project file and click Open. 3. In the Import column of the Import Options dialog, select the tracks that you want to import or click Select All. 4. In the Destination column, select one of the following options for each track that you want to import: • To import a track as a new track, select New Track.
File handling Track Import from Projects Destination Allows you to select if a track is imported into your active project as a new track, or as a new TrackVersion of an existing track. • If a track is imported as a new track, this new track contains all events and mixer settings of the imported track. The following mixer settings are not imported: the channel visibility and zone settings, the record-enable status, the send destination, and the device panel settings.
File handling Track Import from Projects NOTE This option is available only if the sample rates of the imported tracks and your active project differ and Copy To Active Project Folder is activated.
Customizing Workspaces Workspaces in Cubase allow you to organize windows and specific dialogs for your common work routines. A workspace saves the size, position, and layout or setting of important windows and dialogs, such as the Project window, MixConsole, or Transport panel. You can define several workspaces. This allows you to quickly switch between different working modes, either through the Workspaces menu or by using key commands.
Customizing Workspaces Project workspace Allows you to save a specific layout of dialogs and windows that is saved with your current project. This allows you to open your project layout on other computers. Project workspaces are indicated by the letter P on your Workspaces menu. Workspace Templates Cubase provides sample templates that you can use as a starting point for your own workspaces.
Customizing Workspaces • Select the project’s original layout from the project workspaces on the Workspaces menu or in the Workspace Organizer. • In the Preferences dialog on the General page, select Never from the Open Projects in Last Used View menu. This opens all external projects using their original layout. However, this may lead to a modification of your custom layout. To return to the view that you last saved without any workspace assigned, select No Workspace on the Workspaces menu.
Customizing Workspaces Workspaces Organizer The Workspaces Organizer allows you to manage the existing workspaces. To open the Workspaces Organizer, click Workspaces > Organize. The Workspaces Organizer displays the global workspaces and the project workspaces in separate lists. Every workspace has an assigned key command that lets you switch views quickly. Moving or deleting workspaces within the lists changes the key command assignments.
Customizing Using the Setup options Using the Setup options You can customize the appearance of the following elements: • Transport panel • Info line • Toolbars • Inspector The setup context menus If you right-click the Transport panel, the toolbars, the info lines, or the Inspector, the respective setup context menu opens. The following general options are available on the setup context menus: • “Show All” makes all items visible. • “Default” resets the interface to the default setting.
Customizing Appearance The Setup dialogs If you select “Setup…” from the setup context menus, the Setup dialog opens. This allows you to specify which elements are visible/hidden and to set the order of the elements. You can also save and recall setup presets in this dialog. The dialog is divided into two sections. The left section displays the visible items and the right section displays the hidden items.
Customizing Appearance Allows you to adjust the colors in the Project window. • Editors Allows you to adjust the colors in the editors. • Rulers Allows you to adjust the colors in the ruler. • MixConsole Faders Allows you to adjust the colors for the level faders of the channel types in the MixConsole. • MixConsole Racks Allows you to adjust the colors for the racks in the MixConsole. • MixConsole Channel Strip Allows you to adjust the colors for the channel strips in the MixConsole.
Customizing Appearance The current and the new color are shown at the bottom of the pane. 3. Click outside the color selector pane to confirm your settings and apply your changes. Note that you must restart the application for some changes to take effect. • To copy a color and paste it on another element, even on another subpage, open the context menu in the color selector pane and select “Copy Color” and “Paste Color”. You can also copy colors on the same subpage using drag and drop.
Customizing Appearance Metering–Appearance Cubase allows for precise color assignment of level meter values. On the Metering– Appearance page you can specify colors for quick identification of what levels are being reached. You can adjust the colors for the Channel Meter or the Master Meter. For the Master Meter you can only make changes for the Digital Scale scaling mode. Changes take effect when you click Apply or OK.
Customizing Applying colors in the Project window Applying colors in the Project window You can use color scheming for an easier overview of tracks and events in the Project window. Colors can be applied individually to tracks and events/parts. If you color a track, the corresponding events and parts are displayed in the same color. However, you can also color events and parts differently, “overriding” the applied track color.
Customizing Applying colors in the Project window Applying track colors automatically In the Preferences dialog (Event Display–Tracks page), you can find the “Auto Track Color Mode” option. This offers you several options for automatically assigning colors to tracks that are added to the project. The following options are available: Use Default Track Color The default color (gray) is assigned. Use Previous Track Color Analyzes the color of the selected track and uses the same color for the new track.
Customizing Applying colors in the Project window RESULT The color is applied to the selected item. If you change the color of a track, the new color is used for all events on the track and for the corresponding channel in the MixConsole. NOTE If you assign a different color to individual parts or events, they no longer follow color changes of the track. Resetting the Default Color You can reset the color of a track, part, or event to the default color. PROCEDURE 1.
Customizing Applying colors in the Project window Color fields Click a field to open a color selector pane that allows you to specify a new color. Click Options for the following options. Append New Color Adds a new color button at the bottom of the color list. Insert New Color before Selection Adds a new color button above the selected color button. Remove Selected Color Removes the selected color. Reset Selected Color Resets the selected color to the factory settings.
Customizing Where are the settings stored? Reset Current Set to Factory Settings Returns to the standard color palette. Adding and editing individual colors In the Project Colors dialog, you can fully customize the color palette. To add new colors to the color palette, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Add a new color by clicking the Insert New Color button. 2. In the Project Colors section, click the newly created color field to activate the new color for editing. 3.
Customizing Where are the settings stored? On Mac OS, preference files are stored in the following location: “/Library/Preferences/ /” under your home directory. On the Start menu, you will find a shortcut to this folder for easy access. The full path is: “/Users//Library/Preferences//”. NOTE The RAMpresets.xml file, which contains various presets settings (see below), is saved when exiting the program. NOTE Program functions (e. g. crossfade) or configurations (e. g.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Profiles allow you to save customized program settings and preferences. You can switch between profiles, and import and export your profiles for use on different computers. Profiles are helpful if you work on different computers if you use different settings for different kinds of projects, or in a studio environment where several users work on the same computer. Profiles are saved as files with file name extension .srf.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) New Adds a new profile with factory settings. Duplicate Duplicates the selected profile. Rename Allows you to rename the selected profile. Delete Deletes the selected profile. Import Opens a dialog that allows you to import a profile from a file. Export Opens a dialog that allows you to export the selected profile to a file. Activate Profile Activates the selected profile. You must restart the program for the change to take effect. Close Closes the dialog.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Duplicating Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to create a duplicate of a profile and save it under a different name. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, select the profile that you want to duplicate. 3. Click Duplicate. 4. In the Duplicate Profile dialog, enter a profile name and click OK. RESULT The new profile is added to the list. Activating Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to switch to another profile.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Deleting Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to delete profiles. PREREQUISITE You have saved at least two profiles. NOTE You cannot delete the active profile. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, select the profile that you want to delete. Select multiple profiles to delete them at once. 3. Click Delete. 4. Click OK.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) RESULT The imported profile is added to the list of available profiles. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This section gives you some hints and tips on how to get the most out of your Cubase system, performance-wise. NOTE For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties refer to the Cubase web site. Performance Aspects Tracks and Effects The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQ you are able to play. Exactly what constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are given below.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance NOTE We recommend that you use audio hardware for which there is a specific ASIO driver. This is especially true when using Cubase for Windows: • Under Windows, ASIO drivers written specifically for the hardware are more efficient than the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver and produce shorter latency times. • Under Mac OS, audio hardware with properly written Mac OS (Core Audio) drivers can be very efficient and produce very low latency times.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance Average load Shows how much of the available CPU power is used for audio processing. Real-time peak Shows the processing load in the realtime path of the audio engine. The higher this value, the higher the risk that dropouts occur. Overload indicator The overload indicator to the right of the real-time peak indicator and the average load indicator displays overloads of the average or real-time indicator.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance • Realtime-dependent signals • External effects and instruments NOTE If you select Devices > Plug-in Manager and click Show Plug-in Information, you can deactivate the ASIO-Guard option for selected plug-ins. If you activate the monitoring for an input channel, a MIDI or a VST instrument channel, the audio channel and all dependent channels are automatically switched from ASIO-Guard to realtime processing and vice versa.
Preferences The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the program. Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the entries in the navigation list opens a settings page. • To open the Preferences dialog, select File > Preferences. In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options: Preference Presets Allows you to select a saved preference preset.
Preferences Preferences Dialog Rename Allows you to rename a preset. Delete Allows you to delete a preset. Store marked preferences only Allows you to select which pages are included in the preset. Help Opens the dialog help. Defaults Resets the options on the active page to their default settings. Apply Applies any changes that you have made without closing the dialog. OK Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog. Cancel Closes the dialog without saving any changes.
Preferences Appearance In the preferences list a Store column is shown. 4. Click in the Store column of the preference pages that you want to save. 5. Click Store in the lower left section of the dialog. 6. Enter a preset name and click OK. RESULT Your settings are now available from the Preferences Presets pop-up menu. Appearance Colors This page features subpages that allow you to change the default color settings.
Preferences Editing Editing ‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ follow focus If this option is activated, and Record in Editor or Solo Editor is activated in a MIDI editor, these options follow the focus. That is, if the Project window gets the focus, Record in Editor and Solo Editor are suspended in the MIDI editor. Default Track Time Type This allows you to specify the default track time type for new tracks. When you change this setting, all new tracks will use the selected time type.
Preferences Editing Parts Get Track Names If this option is activated and you move an event from one track to another, the moved event will automatically be named according to its new track. Otherwise, the event will retain the name of the original track. Lock Event Attributes This setting determines which properties are affected when you lock an event (by selecting Lock from the Edit menu). You can select any combination of the following 3 options: • Position If this is locked, the event cannot be moved.
Preferences Editing • All automation events for the track between the start and end of the event or part will be moved. If there are automation events in the position to which you move the part or event, these will be overwritten. • If you duplicate an event or part, the automation events will be duplicated as well. • This function also affects copying and pasting. Drag Delay When you click and drag an event, this setting determines the delay before the event is moved.
Preferences Editing files and avoids confusion if the source file contains no stereo or surround material, but poly-mono audio. Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection If this option is activated, and you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically detects its hitpoints. This allows you to navigate to hitpoints of an audio file from within the Project window.
Preferences Editing Use this for processing monophonic and polyphonic material. This is the recommended MPEX default quality setting. You can use this for drum loops, mixes, or chords. • MPEX – Poly Complex This high quality setting produces high CPU load. Use this setting when processing difficult material or for stretch factors above 1.3. • Realtime This algorithm is much quicker and allows for better CPU performance than MPEX, but produces a lower sound quality.
Preferences Editing In this mode, you can click and drag up or down to adjust the value (much like dragging a vertical fader). Double-click to enter values manually. Knob Mode The menu contains the following options: • Circular To move an encoder, click on it and drag in a circular motion, such as turning a real encoder. When you click anywhere along the encoder’s edge, the setting is immediately changed.
Preferences Editing • If Legato Overlap is set to 0 Ticks, the Legato function extends each selected note so that it reaches the next note exactly. • Setting Legato Overlap to a positive value causes the notes to overlap by the specified number of ticks. • Setting Legato Overlap to a negative value makes the Legato function leave a slight gap between the notes.
Preferences Editing Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings When you activate this option, a track in the track list or a channel in the MixConsole automatically gets selected when you click the respective edit button. Deactivating this option always keeps the current track/channel selection. Scroll to selected Track If you activate this option, selecting a MixConsole channel automatically scrolls the track list to display the respective track.
Preferences Editing Editing - Tool Modifiers On this page you can specify which modifier keys are used for additional functionality when using tools. PROCEDURE 1. Select an option in the Categories list. 2. Select the action for which you want to edit the modifier key in the Action list. 3. On your computer keyboard, hold down the modifier keys and click Assign. RESULT The current modifier key(s) for the action is replaced.
Preferences Editors Warn before switching Display Domain (Timewarp Tool) (Cubase Pro only) If this option is activated, a warning opens if you select the Timewarp tool and the ruler is not set to Bars and Beats. Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only This affects the result when using the Zoom tool (magnifying glass). If this option is activated and you drag a selection rectangle with the Zoom tool, the window is only zoomed horizontally and the track height does not change.
Preferences Event Display Show Overlaps When events overlap, this setting allows you to specify when the overlapping areas are displayed. Grid Overlay Intensity Increases or decreases the overlay intensity of the displayed grid lines. Event Handling Opacity Increases or decreases the opacity of an overlying event background when you move it. Smallest Track Height To Show Data Specifies from which track height the track contents are displayed.
Preferences Event Display Background Color Modulation If this option is activated, the backgrounds of audio waveforms reflect the waveform dynamics. This is especially useful to get an overview when working with small track heights. Event Display - Chords & Pitches Pitch Notation • The Note Name pop-up menu lets you select between 3 ways of displaying chords: English, German, and Solfège. • The Naming Format pop-up menu lets you determine how MIDI note names (pitches) are displayed in editors, etc.
Preferences Event Display • Click the Type and Tension fields and enter your custom symbol. NOTE You must define custom symbols for each set of tensions. • The Result field shows how the chord will be displayed. • The Remove Custom Chord button allows you to remove the custom chord symbol that is selected in the list.
Preferences General Controller Brightness Increases or decreases the brightness of controller events. Event Display - Tracks Colorize Track Controls This slider allows you apply the track color to the track controls. Drag the slider to the right to intensify the color. Colorize Only Folder Track Controls Activate this to restrict the effect of the Colorize Track Control function to folder tracks only. This is useful in projects with a large number of tracks and folder tracks.
Preferences General Auto Save Interval Allows you to specify how often a backup copy is created. Maximum Backup Files Allows you to specify how many backup files will be created with the Auto Save function. When the maximum number of backup files is reached, the existing files will be overwritten (starting with the oldest file). Show Tips If this option is activated and you position the pointer over an icon or button in Cubase, an explanatory tooltip is displayed after a second.
Preferences MIDI General - Personalization Default Author Name Allows you to specify an author name that is used by default for new projects. This will be included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk. Default Company Name Allows you to specify a company name that is used by default for new projects. This will be included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk. MIDI This page contains settings that affect MIDI recording and playback.
Preferences MIDI MIDI Display Resolution This allows you to set the display resolution for viewing and editing MIDI data. This only affects how MIDI events are displayed and not how they are recorded. Insert Reset Events after Record If this option is activated, a reset event is inserted at the end of each recorded part. This resets controller data, such as Sustain, Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Modulation, Breath Control. This is useful if you stop recording before the note off command is sent, for example.
Preferences MIDI Export Automation If this option is activated, the automation data (just as it is heard during playback) is converted to MIDI controller events and included in the MIDI file. This also includes automation recorded with the MIDI Control plug-in. Note that if a continuous controller (e. g. CC7) has been recorded but the Read button is deactivated for the automation track (i. e.
Preferences MIDI Export includes Delay If this option is activated, any delay settings you have made in the Inspector will be included in the MIDI file. NOTE • To include other Inspector settings, you must convert the settings to real MIDI events and properties by using the Merge MIDI in Loop function for each track. • Exported MIDI files include the tempo and time signature events of the Tempo Track Editor or, if the tempo track is deactivated, the current tempo and time signature.
Preferences MIDI Auto Dissolve Format 0 If this option is activated and you import a MIDI file of type 0 into the project, the file will automatically be “dissolved”: For each embedded MIDI channel in the file, a separate track will be inserted in the Project window. If this option is deactivated, only one MIDI track will be created. This track will be set to MIDI Channel “Any”, allowing all MIDI events to play back on their original channels.
Preferences MediaBay To filter out a controller type, select it from the list at the top of the section and click “Add”. It will appear in the list below. To remove a controller type from the list (allow it to be recorded and thruput), select it in the lower list and click “Remove”. MediaBay Show File Extensions in Results List Activate this to display file name extensions in the Results list.
Preferences Record Meters’ Peak Hold Time This allows you to specify for how long the peak levels are held in the meters. For this to work, deactivate Meters - Hold Forever in the MixConsole. Meters’ Fallback This allows you to specify how quickly the meters in the MixConsole return to lower values after signal peaks. Metering - Appearance On this page you can assign colors to level meter values to quickly identify what levels are reached.
Preferences Record Record - Audio Audio Pre-Record Seconds This allows you to specify for how many seconds any incoming audio you play is captured in buffer memory during playback or in stop mode. When Recording Wave Files larger than 4GB This allows you to specify what happens if you record Wave files that are larger than 4 GB. • To split the Wave file, activate Split Files. Use this if you work on a FAT32 file system that supports only file sizes up to 4 GB.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) Retrospective Record If this option is activated, the program captures MIDI input in buffer memory, even when not recording. The contents of the buffer memory can then be retrieved and turned into a MIDI part on a record-enabled MIDI track. This therefore allows you to capture any MIDI notes you play in stop mode or during playback and later turn them into a recorded MIDI part.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) Double-Click Symbol to get Draw tool If this option is activated, you need to double-click with the Object Selection tool in a Palette to activate the Draw tool. If this option is deactivated, a single click is enough to bring out the Pencil. Keep Crescendo Symbols “Horizontal” If this option is activated, crescendo symbols are never “slanted”.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) Snap Slurs when dragging If this option is activated, the endpoints of slurs will snap to notes when you draw or move them. Unlock Layout when editing single parts If there are more than one part on a track, and you open score edit for one of these parts, the other parts are displayed as “empty space” to preserve the layout. If this option is activated, this empty space is avoided, so you can print this single part without endless rests.
Preferences Transport • In Edit Mode to set how many bars are shown across the page. • In Page Mode to decide how many bars there are shown across the page in a new layout. NOTE When using the Auto Layout function, you will be asked for the maximum number of bars across the page, overriding this setting. Scores - Note Layer If you are moving and editing notes, you might accidentally move other objects nearby.
Preferences Transport If this option is deactivated, audio playback will continue until you release Rewind or Fast Forward. Wind Speed Options These options affect the fast forward/rewind speed. • If Adjust to Zoom is activated, the wind speed will be adapted to the horizontal zoom factor. If you zoom in very close for detailed editing, you probably do not want to have a high fast forward/rewind speed. Because of this, the Speed Factor does not have any effect in this mode.
Preferences VST Use Inserts While Scrubbing When you activate this option, you can activate insert effects for scrubbing with the shuttle speed control. By default, insert effects are bypassed. VST This page contains settings for the VST audio engine. Default Stereo Panner Mode (Cubase Pro only) This allows you to specify the default pan mode for inserted audio tracks (Stereo Balance Panner, Stereo Dual Panner or Stereo Combined Panner).
Preferences VST Delay Compensation Threshold (for Recording) Cubase features full delay compensation - any delay inherent in the VST plugins you use will automatically be compensated for during playback. However, when you play a VST instrument in realtime or record live audio (with monitoring through Cubase activated), this delay compensation may result in added latency. To avoid this, you can click the Constrain Delay Compensation button on the toolbar or the Transport zone of the Project window.
Preferences VST select the “Manual” mode and keep all audio monitor buttons turned off in Cubase. Warn on Processing Overloads When you activate this option, a warning message is displayed as soon as the CPU overload indicator (on the Transport panel) lights up during recording.
Preferences VST largest number of audio events to make sure that your computer system can handle the current number of VST plug-ins. Plug-in Editors “Always on Top” If this option is activated, the control panels for effect plug-ins and VST instruments will always be shown on top of other windows. VST - Control Room (Cubase Pro only) This page contains settings for the Control Room.
Preferences VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) NOTE You can also manually adjust the reference level in the Control Room settings. Main Dim Volume Use this to set the amount of gain reduction applied to the Control Room channel when the DIM button is activated. VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Inhibit warning when changing the Sample Data When you are modifying audio material that is used in several places in the project in the Sample Editor, a warning message is shown.
Score Layout and Printing
How the Score Editor works About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How the Score Editor and MIDI data relate. • What Display Quantize is and how it works. Welcome! Welcome to scoring in Cubase! The Score Editor has been created to allow you to get any possible piece of music displayed as a score, complete with all the necessary symbols and formatting.
How the Score Editor works Display Quantize more: What type of instrument are we talking about, Drums? Piano? What key is the piece in? What is the basic rhythm? How should the notes be grouped under beams? You provide this information by making settings and working with the tools available in the Score Editor. An example of the MIDI/score relationship When Cubase stores a MIDI note’s position, it makes the measurement in an absolute value, called ticks. There are 480 ticks to a quarter note.
How the Score Editor works Display Quantize OK, now the timing looks right, but the notes still do not look like what you intended. Maybe you can understand that from a computer’s point of view, you did play sixteenth notes, which is why there are a lot of pauses. But that’s not how you meant it. You still want the track to play back short notes, because it is a staccato part, but you want something else “displayed”.
How the Score Editor works Display Quantize Using Rests as Display Quantize setting Above we used Display Quantize for notes. There is a similar Display Quantize setting called “Rests” which is used to set the smallest rest to be displayed. Often, this setting is very effective. Let’s start with the following note example: As you see, the first note appears one sixteenth note late.
How the Score Editor works Entering notes by hand vs. recording notes Automatic Display Quantize If your score contains both straight notes and triplets, you can use Auto Quantize. If this option is activated, Cubase tries to “understand” whether the notes should be display quantized to straight notes or triplets.
The basics About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to open the Score Editor. • How to switch between Page Mode and Edit Mode. • How to set up the page size and margins. • How to hide and show the Symbols Inspector, the toolbar, and the extended toolbar. • How to set up the ruler. • How to set a zoom factor. • How to make initial settings for clef, key, and time signature. • How to transpose instruments. • How to print and export your score. Preparations PROCEDURE 1.
The basics The project cursor • You can also select the Score Editor as your default editor, allowing you to open it by double-clicking parts. This is done with the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu in the Preferences dialog (Editors page). Editing whole tracks When preparing a score for printing, you probably want to open whole MIDI tracks in the Score Editor. To do this, select the track(s) in the track list and make sure no parts are selected – then open the Score Editor as described above.
The basics Playing back and recording Playing back and recording You can play back and record MIDI in the Score Editor using the standard transport commands, just like in the other MIDI editors. RELATED LINKS MIDI Editors on page 716 Page Mode When you are preparing a score for printout, you should set the Score Editor to Page Mode. This is done by selecting Page Mode from the Scores menu. If Page Mode is activated, a checkmark appears next to this menu option.
The basics Changing the zoom factor Using the scrollbars in Page Mode In Page Mode, the scrollbars are used to scroll the image of the page inside the window. Moving between pages in Page Mode If your score takes up more than one page, you use the page number indicator in the lower right corner to move to another page in your score. The number can be adjusted using the standard editing techniques. The page number indicator – adjust it to move to another page.
The basics The active staff By zooming in you can make detailed adjustments to symbols, etc. By zooming out you get a better overview. • If you select “Fit Page”, the zoom factor is adjusted according to the window size so that the whole page becomes visible. • If you select “Fit Width”, the zoom factor is adjusted according to the window width so that the full width of the page becomes visible. NOTE This pop-up menu can also be opened by right-clicking in the ruler.
The basics Making page setup settings Making page setup settings Before preparing the score for printout, you have to make some page settings for your project. This does not have to be the first thing you do, but it is a good working habit, because it also affects the on-screen display of the score. PROCEDURE 1. On the File menu, select Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog appears. This is the regular operation system Page Setup dialog, described in detail in your system’s documentation.
The basics Designing your work space Configuring the window layout PROCEDURE 1. On the toolbar, click the “Set up Window Layout” button. 2. Activate the desired options. The status line The status line features the Mouse Time and the Mouse Note Position displays as well as the Current Chord Display, which helps you identify chords in the Score Editor note display. It can be hidden/displayed using the “Status Line” option in the “Set up Window Layout” pane.
The basics Designing your work space Bar Handles Displays the bar handles, used for copying bars. Hidden Notes Displays any notes you might have hidden. Hide Displays markers in the score for each hidden element (except notes). Quantize Displays markers in the score where you have made Display Quantize “exceptions”. Layout Tool Displays markers in the score where you have made adjustments with the Layout tool. Grouping Displays markers in the score where you have made beam groupings.
The basics Designing your work space • Select “Toggle” to switch between a vertical or horizontal view of the palette. • Select one of the options on the pop-up menu to bring up the corresponding palette instead of the current palette. • Hold down Ctrl/Cmd and select a palette from the pop-up menu to open the selected palette in a new window (without closing the existing one). • Click the close button to close a symbol palette.
The basics About the Score Editor context menus About the Score Editor context menus Many functions and settings of the Score Editor can be accessed via context menus, opened by right-clicking on certain elements of the score. For example, if you choose a note, the note context menu opens, listing note-related functions. If you open the context menu on an empty area of the score, it lists all available tools (allowing you to quickly switch between tools) and it contains many functions of the main menus.
The basics Setting clef, key, and time signature Using the Symbols Inspector to set the initial clef, key, and time signature PROCEDURE 1. Click the “Set up Window Layout” button on the toolbar and activate the Symbols option. The Symbols Inspector is displayed. 2. Open the Clefs section of the Inspector and click on the symbol for the clef that you want to use in your score. 3. Click anywhere in the first bar of the staff to set the clef for this track. 4.
The basics Setting clef, key, and time signature The numerator can consist of several numbers for composite time signatures. However, if the project is in a simple time signature you only need to fill in the first number above the line. The more advanced options are described below. 4. Click OK or press Return. IMPORTANT All tracks share the time signature! In other words, when you set the time signature, you do this for all tracks in the project.
The basics Setting clef, key, and time signature • The score always shows the time signature events set in the signature track/Tempo Track Editor, regardless of whether or not the Tempo button is activated. Likewise, any time signatures you create in the Score Editor are shown in the signature track/Tempo Track Editor. • You cannot create composite time signatures using the signature track/Tempo Track Editor.
The basics Setting clef, key, and time signature On the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog PROCEDURE 1. Click on a staff to make it the active staff. 2. On the Scores menu, select “Settings…” to open the Score Settings dialog. Select the Staff page at the top to open the Main tab, showing the current settings for the active staff.
The basics Setting clef, key, and time signature RELATED LINKS Split (piano) staves on page 1157 Strategies: How many voices do I need? on page 1176 Using Auto Clef On the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog you also find the Auto Clef option. If this option is activated, the program automatically selects a treble clef or a bass clef for the staff, depending on the range of the notes in the part.
The basics Setting clef, key, and time signature PROCEDURE 1. Double-click on the accidentals at the beginning of a staff. The “Edit Key” dialog opens. Double-click here… …to open the Edit Key dialog. 2. Use the scrollbar to select a key and click OK. RELATED LINKS Transposing instruments on page 1129 On the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog PROCEDURE 1. Make the desired staff active, open the Score Settings dialog and select the Staff page. The Clef/Key section on the Staff page 2.
The basics Transposing instruments 4. If you need to set a different key for the lower staff, activate the “Lower Staff” checkbox and set a key for this. RELATED LINKS Split (piano) staves on page 1157 Strategies: How many voices do I need? on page 1176 Setting a local key You can also set a different key for the selected staff only. This is useful for instruments like oboe and English horn that change display transpose and therefore also the key. PROCEDURE 1.
The basics Printing from the Score Editor Display Transpose in the Edit Key dialog If you want to change the Display Transpose setting in the middle of the score, you can do this by inserting a key change. In the Edit Key dialog, which is opened by double-clicking a key symbol, you can find a Transpose field, in which you can enter a transposition value in semitones. This is useful if you are for example writing a saxophone part and want the player to switch from alto to tenor saxophone.
The basics Exporting pages as image files Selecting a section of a page for exporting If you only want to export a part of a certain page, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that you are in Page Mode. 2. Select the Export tool (“Select Export Range”). The pointer turns into a cross-hair cursor. 3. Drag over the section of the score you want to include.
The basics Working order Working order When you prepare a score, we suggest you do things in the following order, since this minimizes the time needed if you make a mistake somewhere and need to redo a step. • Preferably work on copies of recorded tracks. If the parts are fairly complex you might have to change them permanently, after which they do not play back as they originally did. • If memory is an issue, break the score up into segments.
Transcribing MIDI recordings About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to prepare your parts for score printouts. • How to use the Display Quantize tool to handle “exceptions” in the score. • How to resolve parts that contain mixed notes and triplets. About transcription This chapter assumes you have a MIDI recording that you want to transform into a printable score. However, if the parts are fairly complicated, you probably need to perform some manual editing of the notes.
Transcribing MIDI recordings Preparing parts for score printout 6. Activate Page Mode. Preparing parts for score printout Below follow a few tips to note when preparing a score for printout: • If a part is complex, you may have to do some manual editing of notes, like moving them or changing their lengths. This means that the recording does not play back exactly as it originally did. If this is a problem, we suggest you work on a copy of the recording.
Transcribing MIDI recordings Situations which require additional techniques For this to work, make sure no notes or symbols are selected – otherwise, clicking the “i” button may open a dialog with settings for the selected object instead. Click the Staff button to open the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog. The Staff page shows the current settings for the staff on four tabs.
Transcribing MIDI recordings Inserting Display Quantize changes RELATED LINKS Polyphonic voicing on page 1316 No Overlap on page 1167 Syncopation on page 1166 The Cut Notes tool on page 1202 Graphic moving of notes on page 1203 Accidentals and enharmonic shift on page 1188 Background: Note stems on page 1185 Split (piano) staves on page 1157 Inserting Display Quantize changes Some situations may require different staff settings on different sections of the track.
Transcribing MIDI recordings The Explode function RELATED LINKS Display Quantize and Interpretation Options on page 1165 The status line on page 1119 Polyphonic voicing on page 1316 Viewing and Editing Display Quantize Changes If you activate the “Quantize” checkbox on the filter bar, a marker is shown under the staff for each Display Quantize setting you have entered with the tool.
Transcribing MIDI recordings Using "Scores Notes To MIDI" 2. Make sure that “To New tracks” is selected at the top of the dialog. 3. Enter the desired number of new tracks. Note that this is the number of new tracks to be created! For example, if you have a three-part polyphonic section and want to split this into three separate tracks, you must specify 2 new tracks, since the original track holds one of the parts. 4. Use the options in the bottom section to set up the criteria for the split.
Transcribing MIDI recordings Using "Scores Notes To MIDI" PROCEDURE 1. For safety, go back to the Project window and make a copy of the track. 2. Open the part(s) again in the Score Editor. If you only want some sections of your score to be “converted”, make sure to only open those parts. 3. Make sure that the notes you want to affect are not hidden. 4. Select “Scores Notes To MIDI” from the Functions submenu on the Scores menu. The notes are now “converted”. 5.
Entering and editing notes About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to make various settings for how notes are displayed. • How to enter notes. • How to use tools and settings to make the score as legible as possible. • How to set up a split (piano) staff. • How to work with multiple staves. Score settings Before you start entering notes, you need to make some initial staff settings.
Entering and editing notes Score settings Staff presets When you want to reuse settings made for one track in other tracks, you can save some time by creating a staff preset. NOTE There are a number of staff presets available, set up to suit various instruments, etc. These are accessed via the Presets pop-up menu on the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog, or from the Staff context menu, opened by right-clicking on the rectangle to the left of the staff.
Entering and editing notes Note values and positions Option Suggested setting Tablature tab settings Tablature Mode deactivated NOTE It is very important that you understand how the Display Quantize values for notes and rests interact with the score. If you select too large a notes/rests value, the notes you “click in” may not appear as intended.
Entering and editing notes Note values and positions Selecting a Quantize value When you move the mouse pointer over the score the Mouse Time Position display in the status line tracks your movement and shows the current position in bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. Positioning on screen is controlled by the current Quantize value. If you set this to 1/8, for example, you can only insert and move notes to eighth note positions, at quarter notes, at half bars or at bar positions.
Entering and editing notes Adding and editing notes The figures below show some note positions and their corresponding position values: Eighth note positions 2/2 1.1.1.0 1.1.3.0 1.1.5.0 1.1.7.0 1.2.1.0 1.2.3.0 1.2.5.0 1.2.7.0 4/4 1.1.1.0 1.1.3.0 1.2.1.0 1.2.3.0 1.1.3.0 1.3.3.0 1.4.1.0 1.4.3.0 8/8 1.1.1.0 1.2.1.0 1.3.1.0 1.4.1.0 1.5.1.0 1.6.1.0 1.7.1.0 1.8.1.0 Eighth note triplet positions 2/2 1.1.1.0 1.1.2.40 1.1.3.80 1.1.5.0 1.1.6.40 1.1.7.80 4/4 1.1.1.0 1.1.2.40 1.1.
Entering and editing notes Adding and editing notes NOTE If the “Computer Keyboard Note Entry: Require ALT-Key” option is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Scores–Editing page), you can insert notes without holding down Alt. A note with the note value specified on the extended toolbar appears. By default, the insert position is the first position of the bar and the pitch is C3. • To change the pitch, press the key that corresponds to the note on your computer keyboard (c, d, e, f, etc.).
Entering and editing notes Adding and editing notes 3. If you select the note value by clicking on a symbol on the extended toolbar, the Insert Note tool is automatically selected – otherwise select the Insert Note tool on the toolbar or context menu. 4. Select a Quantize value. The Quantize value determines the spacing between notes. If you set Quantize to 1/1 you only can add notes at downbeats. If you set Quantize to 1/8, you can add notes at eighth note positions, etc. 5.
Entering and editing notes Adding and editing notes About the interpretation The notes may not always appear in the score as you initially expect them to. This is because there are a number of situations that require special techniques and settings. Below you can find a list of some of these and where to find more information about handling them: • Notes at the same position are considered parts of a chord.
Entering and editing notes Selecting notes Selecting notes In the operations described in the rest of this chapter, you often work on selected notes. The text below describes how to select notes: By clicking To select a note, click on the note head with the Object Selection tool. The note head gets colored to indicate that it is selected. • To select more notes, hold down Shift and click on them. • To deselect notes, hold down Shift and click on them again.
Entering and editing notes Moving notes Selecting tied notes Longer notes are often displayed in the score as one note with a tie. If you intend to select the entire note (e. g. for deleting), you should select the first note, not the tied note. IMPORTANT There is a setting for this in the Preferences dialog (Scores–Editing page): If you activate “Tied Notes selected as Single Units”, the whole note is selected, even if you click on one of the tied notes.
Entering and editing notes Moving notes RELATED LINKS Selecting a Quantize value on page 1143 Moving by using key commands Instead of dragging the note with the mouse, you can assign key commands for this: • The corresponding commands can be found in the Nudge category in the Key Commands dialog. • When moving notes to the left or right using key commands, the notes are moved in steps according to the Quantize value. The keys assigned for up/down nudging transpose notes in semitone steps.
Entering and editing notes Moving notes About the lock layers When you are moving and editing notes in the score, you might accidentally move other objects nearby. To avoid this, assign different types of objects to different “lock layers” (up to three) and instruct Cubase to “lock” one or two of these layers, making them unmovable. There are two ways to set up which type of object should belong to which lock layer: • Open the Preferences dialog from the File menu and select the Scores–Note Layer page.
Entering and editing notes Duplicating notes • To get an overview of all layers, activate the Colorize Layer (A) button. This deactivates all other layer buttons and displays the score objects in different colors, where each color stands for a specific type of layer. Duplicating notes To duplicate notes in the score, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Set the Quantize value and select the desired notes. You can duplicate any block of notes, even on several systems at the same time. The Snap mode applies.
Entering and editing notes Editing pitches of individual notes Inserting notes from the clip board to the score Notes that you have put on the clipboard by cutting or copying can be inserted into the score again as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Activate the desired staff. 2. Move the project cursor to the position where you want the first note to appear. This is done by holding down Alt and Shift and clicking at the desired position in the score. 3.
Entering and editing notes Changing the length of notes Using the info line You can use the info line to change the pitches (and other properties) of one or several notes numerically. • If you have several notes selected and change the pitch on the info line, the changes are relative. That is, all selected notes are transposed by an equal amount. • If you have several notes selected, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and change the pitch on the info line, the changes are absolute.
Entering and editing notes Changing the length of notes IMPORTANT Remember that the appearance of notes and rests in the score is determined by the Display Quantize settings on the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog. Depending on the Notes and Rests values, notes may be displayed as if they were longer than they really are. RELATED LINKS Display Quantize on page 1109 By using the extended toolbar Using the extended toolbar is another quick way to set a number of notes to the same length: PROCEDURE 1.
Entering and editing notes Splitting a note in two Changing the display length If you want to change the displayed length of notes without affecting how they play back, the first thing to try is to adjust Display Quantize, either for the whole staff or for a separate section, using the Display Quantize tool. But you can also make display length adjustments to individual notes in the Set Note Info dialog: PROCEDURE 1. Double-click on the note. The Set Note Info dialog opens. 2.
Entering and editing notes Split (piano) staves Split (piano) staves Setting up the split staff PROCEDURE 1. Make a staff active. 2. Open the Score Settings dialog on the Staff page and select the Polyphonic tab. 3. From the Staff Mode pop-up menu, select Split. 4. Set the Split Point value to a suitable note. All notes below this note value are put on the lower clef, all above are put on the upper clef. Split mode selected.
Entering and editing notes Strategies: Multiple staves RESULT Now, some notes that were previously on the lower staff are on the upper, or vice versa. Strategies: Multiple staves As described above, when you have parts on several tracks selected in the Project window, these are put on one staff each, when you open the Score Editor. This allows you to work on several staves in parallel. Working with several staves is not much different from working with one.
Entering and editing notes Inserting and editing clefs, keys, or time signatures Polyphonic voicing on page 1172 Editing pitches of individual notes on page 1153 Inserting and editing clefs, keys, or time signatures It is possible to insert a change of clef, key, or time signature anywhere in the score. Inserting a symbol on one staff PROCEDURE 1. In the Symbols Inspector, open the “Clefs etc.” section. This contains clef, key, and time signature symbols. 2. Select the symbol that you want to insert.
Entering and editing notes Inserting and editing clefs, keys, or time signatures NOTE If some of the staves are bracketed (straight brackets only, as set up in the Score Settings dialog on the Layout page), inserting a symbol for one of these staves inserts it for all other staves within the bracket. Staves outside the bracket are not affected.
Entering and editing notes Deleting notes Deleting notes Using the Erase tool PROCEDURE 1. Select the Erase tool on the toolbar or context menu. 2. One at a time, click on the note(s) you want to erase, or enclose them in a selection rectangle, and click on any of the notes. Using the Delete menu option or the keyboard PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that you want to delete. 2. Select Delete from the Edit menu, or press Delete or Backspace on the computer keyboard.
Staff settings About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to make staff settings. • How to work with staff presets. Staff settings Below follows a run-through of all staff settings, more detailed information about the ones already described and references to other places in the manual for some options. The Staff page has four tabs – here, the Main tab is selected. Making settings PROCEDURE 1. Open the Score Settings and select the Staff page. 2.
Staff settings Working with staff presets The settings for regular staves are found on the Main and Options tab, the Polyphonic tab contains settings for split systems and polyphonic voices while the Tablature tab lets you set up tablature scores. 4. When you have made the desired settings, click Apply. NOTE If the “Apply closes Property Windows” option is activated in the Preferences dialog (Scores–Editing page), clicking Apply also closes the dialog.
Staff settings Staff names How staff presets are stored The staff presets are stored as individual files in the Presets–Staff Presets folder within the Cubase program folder. The presets are available for selection in any project you create or edit. Staff names These fields allow you to specify a “long” and a “short” name for the staff. The long name is shown for the very first system for this staff in the score (at the start of the project), while the short name is shown for the remaining systems.
Staff settings Display Quantize and Interpretation Options Display Quantize and Interpretation Options These two sections of the dialog contain a number of settings used to determine how the notes are interpreted. While these settings are more critical to making MIDI recorded music appear as legible as possible it is still important to have them set correctly when entering notes using the mouse. Below you can find descriptions of the settings.
Staff settings Display Quantize and Interpretation Options For example, if you want a single short note on a beat (quarter note position) to be displayed as a quarter note, set the Rests value to 4 (quarter notes). 3. Deactivate the Auto Quantize option. 4. Set all the Interpretation Options. These are described in detail below. 5. Examine the score. 6. If necessary, use the Display Quantize tool to insert “exceptions” to the staff settings.
Staff settings Display Quantize and Interpretation Options Without and with Syncopation Again, without and with Syncopation Note that you can insert “exceptions” to the Syncopation setting in the Score Settings dialog on the Staff page, by using the Display Quantize tool. You can also create tied notes in various combinations by using the Cut Notes tool.
Staff settings Display Transpose …and like this when No Overlap is activated. You can insert “exceptions” to the No Overlap setting on the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog, by using the Display Quantize tool. IMPORTANT Please note that there may be situations when neither of these alternatives is ideal. If you run into such a situation, it can probably be resolved by using polyphonic voicing.
Staff settings The Options tab The Options tab Clicking the Options tab in the dialog brings up another page with additional settings. Below follows a brief description of these, with references to more detailed explanations. Switches This section allows you to make beam settings. Flat Beams Activate this when you want the beams over notes to be flat (as opposed to slanted). No Beams Activate this when you do not want any beaming at all on the staff (for example for vocal scoring).
Staff settings The Options tab System Sizes This section allows you to set the number of system lines and to control spacing between the lines: System Lines The number of lines in a system. For regular scoring, this should be set to 5. Add Space Allows you to increase or decrease the space between the lines in a system. Size Allows you to set a size for the systems, as a percentage (with 100 % being the default value). In effect, this setting scales the score vertically.
Staff settings The Polyphonic tab The Polyphonic tab This is where you activate and set up split (piano) systems or polyphonic voices (several independent score lines in the same staves). RELATED LINKS Polyphonic voicing on page 1172 The Tablature tab This tab contains settings for creating tablature scores.
Polyphonic voicing About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to decide when to use polyphonic voicing. • How to set up voices. • How to automatically convert your score to polyphonic voicing. • How to enter and move notes into voices. Background: Polyphonic voicing Polyphonic voicing allows you to resolve a number of situations impossible to score properly otherwise: • Notes starting at the same position, but with different lengths.
Polyphonic voicing Background: Polyphonic voicing How voices are created Cubase allows for up to eight voices. The first thing you do is to set them up. This includes “telling” the program which voices belong to the upper clef and which belong to the lower, how you want rests displayed for each voice, etc. The second thing you do is to move or enter notes into the voices. If you have a recording done already, the program can do much of this work for you, automatically.
Polyphonic voicing Setting up the voices NOTE When you open a part that contains notes on different MIDI channels, these notes are in fact already assigned to voices (since notes are assigned to voices using their MIDI channel setting). While this fact can be put to good use, it can also create confusion, and even disappearing notes, as described above. Setting up the voices To set up your score for polyphonic voicing, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that the desired staff is active. 2.
Polyphonic voicing Setting up the voices A checkmark indicates that rests are shown for a voice. Often you only want rests to be shown for one voice per staff, see below. 8. If you have activated “Rests–Show” for a voice, but do not want rests to be shown in empty bars, click in the “Rests–Reduce” column for that voice. This is especially useful for cue voices. 9. Click in the “Rests–Center” column to determine at which vertical positions rests are shown (for voices with “Rests–Show” activated).
Polyphonic voicing Strategies: How many voices do I need? Variable Split This sets up the dialog for two voices, one on each staff, each with auto stem direction. This is a good starting point for a piano staff when the fixed split option does not suffice. Optimize Two Voices In this preset, only voices 1 and 2 are activated, and set up like this: This way the first voice behaves as in single staff mode, but if there are notes in the second voice, the stems of the first one are set to Up.
Polyphonic voicing Entering notes into voices Entering notes into voices When you add new notes, you need to decide which voice they go into: PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that the extended toolbar is visible. 2. Select the Object Selection tool. 3. If you have a split system, check the voice Insert buttons. These are displayed after the text “Insert” on the left side on the extended toolbar. Only the voices that are activated on the Polyphonic tab are shown.
Polyphonic voicing Moving notes between voices Moving notes between voices Manually To manually move notes to another voice, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Select the note(s) you want to move to a particular voice. 2. Right-click on one of the notes and select “Move to Voice” from the context menu. 3. On the submenu, select the voice to which you want to move the notes. Only the activated voices are available on the menu.
Polyphonic voicing Handling rests 4. Option Description Split Note Use this to move all notes below a certain pitch to another voice. Lines To Tracks Use this when you want all musical “lines” to be put in one voice each. The notes with the highest pitch goes to the first voice, the notes with the second highest pitch goes to the second, and so on. Bass To Lowest Voice If this option is activated, the lowest notes always ends up in the lowest voice. Click OK.
Polyphonic voicing Voices and Display Quantize • If a voice does not need any rests at all, you can deactivate rests separately for this voice on the Polyphonic tab of the Staff page in the Score Settings dialog. • If you only need rests from one voice on a staff, activate Rests–Center for that voice (this is done in the same dialog). If two or more voices have rests, deactivate Rests– Center.
Polyphonic voicing Creating crossed voicings 5. Fill out the dialog. 6. Click Apply. RELATED LINKS Inserting Display Quantize changes on page 1136 Display Quantize and Interpretation Options on page 1165 Creating crossed voicings Often, for example in vocal scoring, you have crossed voicings on one system. You can of course move notes manually into voices to get the stem direction and other note properties right, but there is a quicker way. Let’s explain how to do this by example.
Polyphonic voicing Automatic polyphonic voicing – Merge All Staves 8. Select the two notes that you want to be moved from voice 1 to voice 2. Two notes in voice 1 selected. 9. Move the notes to voice 2. The quickest way to do this is to press Ctrl/Cmd and click the voice Insert 2 button on the extended toolbar. Two notes moved to the right voice. 10. Select the two notes that you want to be moved to voice 1 and move them, too. All notes in the right voices.
Polyphonic voicing Converting voices to tracks – Extract Voices Now a new track is created and shown in the score. The track has polyphonic voices activated, and the four original tracks are assigned to one voice each (voices 1, 2, 5 and 6 are used). Before… …and after merging the staves Furthermore, all non-linked symbols that belong to the staff that become the first polyphonic voice in the merged staff are copied. They have the same positions as the original symbols.
Polyphonic voicing Converting voices to tracks – Extract Voices IMPORTANT When you later play back the music, you need to mute the original track (the one with polyphonic voices), or you get double notes.
Additional note and rest formatting About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to control stem direction. • How to control beaming, and create cross-staff beaming. • How to make detailed adjustments to note appearance. • How to perform “graphic moving” of notes. • How to create grace notes. • How to create tuplets. Background: Note stems The direction of stems is governed by five things: • How notes are grouped under beams. • Any manual manipulation of beams.
Additional note and rest formatting Setting stem direction Setting stem direction In polyphonic voices In the Score Settings dialog, on the Staff page (Polyphonic tab), the stem direction can be set separately for each voice. Using Flip Stems Flipping the stem of one or several notes PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes. 2. Click the Flip icon on the extended toolbar. All the stems in the selection are now flipped. Those that pointed up now point down and vice versa.
Additional note and rest formatting Stem length Independent stem direction under a beam If you need stems attached to the same beam to go in different directions, this is achieved by dragging the beam’s start and end points. This feature is available in Page Mode only. Independent stem direction under a beam RELATED LINKS Manual adjustment of beams on page 1201 Stem direction in the Set Note Info dialog The Set Note Info dialog can be opened by double-clicking on a note head.
Additional note and rest formatting Accidentals and enharmonic shift All selected stems are lengthened or shortened by the same amount. Resetting stem length and beam slants PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that the filter bar is visible. If the filter bar is not visible, click the “Set up Window Layout” button on the toolbar and select the Filters option. 2. Make sure that the “Stems/Beams” checkbox is activated on the filter bar.
Additional note and rest formatting Accidentals and enharmonic shift 2. Option Description Force Notes outside the scale get accidentals, and accidentals are repeated even within the same bar. Force all Every single note in the score gets an accidental. In the “Outside the Scale” area, you can decide how five of the most common intervals outside the scale are displayed, as sharps or as flats.
Additional note and rest formatting Changing the note head shape Use this button when you want to create a “help accidental” for the selected notes only. Use this button when you want to enclose the accidental in parentheses. To remove these, select “off”. Changing the note head shape PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes for which you want to change the note head shape. Make sure not to select the stems, only the note heads. 2. Open the Set Note Info dialog.
Additional note and rest formatting Other note details The Set Note Info dialog contains the following settings: Note Head Used for selecting custom note head shapes. Tablature on/off and number Used for creating or editing tablature. This feature can be used for individual notes or together with the automatic tablature function. Bows Used for adding bow up/bow down articulation. When selecting “Off”, bow symbols are not displayed for the selected notes.
Additional note and rest formatting Other note details No Flag/Beam Activate this to hide the flags or beams of the selected notes. Bracket Head If this option is activated, notes are displayed with brackets: Bracket Head on and off X Stem (Spoken) If this option is activated for a note, it is displayed with an x across its stem. This is normally used to indicate spoken words. Hide Note Activating this checkbox hides the selected notes. Stem Determines the stem direction.
Additional note and rest formatting Coloring notes Grace notes on page 1205 Cue notes on page 1204 The Cut Notes tool on page 1202 Coloring notes You can assign colors to notes using the Event Colors pop-up menu on the toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Simply select the notes for which you want to use colors, open the Event Colors pop-up menu on the toolbar and pick a color. Only the note heads are colored. Note that the color is only visible once the notes have been deselected. 2.
Additional note and rest formatting Copying settings between notes 2. Click in the Active column to activate this function for the corresponding element. 3. Click in the Color field to the right to select a color. When color-printing a score, you get the colors you selected for the notes. When you are using a black-and-white printer, the notes appear in black (notes that have not been assigned a color) and different shades of gray (depending on how bright/dark a color was used for the note).
Additional note and rest formatting Handling beaming The selected notes now get the attributes of the first, copied note, but their pitches and note values remain unchanged. RELATED LINKS Adding note symbols on page 1216 Handling beaming Turning beaming on/off Beaming is enabled/disabled independently for each staff. PROCEDURE 1. On the Staff page in the Score Settings dialog, click the Options tab. 2. To turn off beaming, activate No Beams and click Apply.
Additional note and rest formatting Handling beaming cannot be entered in the current time signature, you have to group notes manually, see below. Regular grouping of a number of eighth notes or smaller (“Beam”) If the grouping the program assigns is not the one you want, you can put any selection of eighth notes or smaller under a beam: PROCEDURE 1. Select at least two notes, where you want the beam to begin and end. All notes between these two notes are grouped under a beam. 2.
Additional note and rest formatting Handling beaming 4. Right-click on one of the notes and from the Group/Ungroup submenu, select “Repeat...” 5. In the dialog that appears, use the radio buttons to select the desired note value for the repeats. In this example, the “Repeat” feature is used to display two pairs of sixteenth notes as two eighth notes with “repeat bars”. Note that the second and fourth sixteenth note have only been hidden – playback is not affected! 6. Click OK to close the dialog.
Additional note and rest formatting Handling beaming • Which Grouping dialog appears depends on the grouping option you used for the notes (Beam, Repeats or Accelerando, see above). Removing groups If you have created a group as described above and want to remove it, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that the “Grouping” checkbox is activated in the display filter bar. 2. Select a group by clicking on its “Grouping” text. 3. Press Backspace or Delete. The grouping is removed.
Additional note and rest formatting Handling beaming Cross-staff beaming To create a beam that extends from one staff to another, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Set up a split or polyphonic voicing system or open the Score Editor with more than one track. 2. Set up a beam of notes (using the group command) and adjust their pitches so that they are correct even though some of the notes are on the wrong staff. Use the info line to edit the pitches if they are very low or high. 3.
Additional note and rest formatting Handling beaming Beam Subgroups on On with 16th Subgroups activated Beam appearance and slant settings Global settings In the Score Settings dialog, on the Project page (Notation Style subpage), you can find the following three options for beam appearance in the Beams category: • Thick Beams. Activate this if you want beams to be displayed as thick lines. • Show Small Slants as Flat Beams.
Additional note and rest formatting About tied notes Manual adjustment of beams For very detailed control you can manually adjust the beam slant: PROCEDURE 1. Group and flip notes and adjust the settings described above until the beams are as close as possible to how you want them. 2. Click on the corner made up by the beam and the stem. A handle appears on the corner of beam and stem. A beam handle 3. Drag the handle up or down. The slant of the beam changes. Dragging a handle and the effect it has.
Additional note and rest formatting About tied notes 1. This quarter note is cut. 2. This eighth note is cut. However, this is not always what you want. There are three ways to affect the cutting mechanism: Syncopation If the Syncopation option is activated on the Main tab of the Staff page in the Score Settings dialog, Cubase is less prone to cut and tie notes. For example, the second quarter note in the figure above would not have been cut if syncopation had been activated.
Additional note and rest formatting Graphic moving of notes As a result, the regular cutting mechanism is disabled and the note is cut at the position you clicked instead. The following rules apply to cutflag events: • If a bar contains a cutflag event, the automatic cutting mechanism is disabled within that bar. • All notes or rests that start before and end after a cutflag event are cut at the position of the event.
Additional note and rest formatting Cue notes Modes for the Layout tool The following modes are available: Move Single Object In this mode, only the object you move with the Layout tool is affected (moved). Use this if you want to “correct” the position of one single note in the score, for example. Move Notes and Context In this mode, other score objects are moved accordingly when you move a note with the Layout tool.
Additional note and rest formatting Grace notes RELATED LINKS Setting up the voices on page 1174 Polyphonic voicing on page 1172 A quick example Let’s say you have a flute part and want some cue notes for it: PROCEDURE 1. Switch on polyphonic voices and activate voice 1 and voice 2. 2. Set voice 2 to “Auto” stem direction and centered rests. 3. Set up voice 1 to be a cue voice, with hidden rests and stems pointing up. 4. Insert the cue notes into voice 1.
Additional note and rest formatting Grace notes NOTE Grace notes are always positioned just before the next note on the staff. If there is no note after a grace note on the staff, the grace notes are hidden! Creating grace notes manually PROCEDURE 1. Locate the note for which you want a grace note. 2. Insert one or more new notes just before it. The note value and exact position of the note is not important. However, the pitch of course is.
Additional note and rest formatting Tuplets 4. Click Apply. The settings are applied to the selected notes. 5. Close the dialog. Converting grace notes to normal notes PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that you want to convert. If you want to make sure that all notes in the score are normal notes, you can select all notes (using the Select All command on the Edit menu). 2. Double-click on one of the selected grace notes. The Set Note Info dialog appears. 3. Select “Normal” from the “Type” pop-up menu.
Additional note and rest formatting Tuplets 4. Set the type of tuplet in the Type field. “5” means a quintuplet, “7” means a septuplet, etc. 5. Set the length of the entire tuplet using the “Over” field. 6. Activate Change Length, if needed. If you do, the program alters the length of all notes so that they are exactly the note value the tuplet indicates. If you do not, the lengths of the existing notes is not affected in any way. 7.
Additional note and rest formatting Tuplets Editing tuplet settings PROCEDURE 1. Double-click on the text above the Tuplet group to bring up the Tuplets dialog. 2. Adjust the Text setting. 3. Click Apply. The changes are applied to the tuplet, without affecting the tuplet type or length. Grouping If the Tuplet is a quarter note long or shorter, the notes are automatically grouped under a beam. If it is longer you have to perform the grouping manually.
Working with symbols About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • What the different types of symbols are. • How to insert and edit symbols. • Details about special symbols. Background: The different layers A score page is always made up of three layers – the note layer, the layout layer and the project layer. When you add symbols, these are inserted into one of these layers, depending on the type of symbol.
Working with symbols Background: The different layers • All other note layer symbols (tempo, dynamics, chords, etc.). Their position is related to the bar. Whichever way you edit the notes, these symbols remain unaffected. However, their positions are fixed within a measure. If you for example change the spacing of the bars across the page, this affects the symbols positions.
Working with symbols The Symbols Inspector The Symbols Inspector To display the Symbols Inspector, click the “Set up Window Layout” button on the toolbar and activate the Symbols option. Customizing the Symbols Inspector You can customize the appearance of the Symbols Inspector by showing/hiding sections and by specifying their order in the Inspector. Showing/Hiding Symbols Inspector Sections If you right-click any Inspector section, a context menu appears.
Working with symbols The Symbols Inspector A customized Symbols Inspector • If you click the Save button (disk icon) in the Presets section, you can name the current configuration and save it as a preset. • To remove a preset, select it and click the trash icon. • Saved configurations are available for selection from the Presets pop-up menu in the dialog or directly from the Inspector context menu.
Working with symbols The Symbols Inspector The available symbols The following symbols palettes/tabs are available: • Quick Staff Setup • Favourites • Keys • Clefs • Time Signature • Chord Symbols • Guitar Symbols • Cubase Pro only: Expression Map • Dynamics Mapping • Clefs etc. • Note Symbols • Dynamics • Line/Trill. Note that the arpeggios, hand indication and strum symbols are all “notedependent”! • Other • Form Symbols.
Working with symbols Important! – Symbols, staves, and voices 3. Right-click on the symbol that you want to add to the Favourites section and select “Add to Favourites” on the context menu. You can also add a symbol to the Favourites section by Alt-clicking on it. 4. Repeat this procedure for other symbols that you want to add to the Favourites section. To remove a symbol from the Favourites section, select “Remove from Favourites” from the context menu or hold down Alt and click on it.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score About the Draw tool Unlike the other MIDI editors, the Score Editor toolbar does not contain a Draw tool. Instead, the Draw tool is “automatically” selected when you insert symbols. The following applies: • Normally, the Draw tool is automatically selected when you click on a symbol in the Inspector.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score Adding a symbol to several notes using the Draw tool You might for example want to add a staccato symbol to all notes within a few measures. PROCEDURE 1. In the Symbols Inspector, open the Note Symbols section. 2. Select the notes to which you want to apply the symbol. 3. In the Symbols Inspector, click on the desired symbol. 4. Click on one of the notes. The symbol is added to each selected note, at a predefined distance.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score About note-dependent symbols Note-dependent symbols like arpeggios and strum directions must be put in front of a note or they belong to the following note instead (if there is no following note, the symbols are not inserted at all). Adding text There are special methods for working with text. RELATED LINKS Working with text on page 1251 Adding slurs and ties Slurs can be drawn in manually or inserted automatically for a group of notes.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score 2. Click on the correct slur/tie in the Symbols Inspector, so that the Draw tool is selected. 3. Position the mouse close to the first note and drag to a position close to the second note. The end points of the slur/tie snap to their default positions – holding down Ctrl/Cmd allows you to move the end points freely. There are two special functions for inserting a slur or tie that automatically spans from one note to another.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score • To move the slur, click on it (but not on a curve point) and drag. • To resize the slur, click and drag the end points. • To change the shape of the slur, click on one of the middle curve points and drag in any direction. Right-clicking on a curve point brings up a context menu with the following options: Add Points/Reduce Points Adds another pair of curve points to the Bezier slur. This allows you to create very complex slur shapes.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score Inserting symbols across staves If you hold down Alt while adding a symbol to one staff in a grand staff, this symbol is put in at corresponding positions on all staves. This allows you for example to insert rehearsal marks, repeats, etc. for all instruments at the same time. Adding a keyboard symbol The Other section contains a piano keyboard symbol, useful in educational scores, for example.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score Adding guitar chord symbols A fretboard symbol of a guitar chord can be inserted anywhere in the score. Guitar symbols are found in the “Guitar Symbols” section and the Other section in the Symbols Inspector. • The Guitar Symbols section contains all Guitar symbols of the current guitar library. If the symbol that you want to insert is among these, select it and insert it as you would any other symbol, see above.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score • Clicking the Insert Notes button inserts the actual notes in the chord into the score. You can also right-click on a guitar symbol and select “Insert Notes” from the context menu. You can edit the symbol at any time by double-clicking it, changing the settings in the dialog and clicking Apply. Note that you can also access the symbols that you defined in the guitar library by right-clicking a guitar symbol – see below.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score 2. To add a guitar chord symbol to the library, click the New button. A chord symbol appears in the list to the left. 3. To edit the chord symbol, double-click it in the list. This opens the Guitar Symbol dialog, as when editing a chord symbol in the score. • The symbol you create is also “interpreted” and its name is displayed to the right of the fretboard symbol. This can also be edited by double-clicking if you like.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score • Right-click on a guitar symbol in the score and select a chord symbol from the Presets submenu on the context menu. Adding an image file You can insert image files as symbols into the Score. This allows you to import logos, copyright symbols, images of finger positions, etc. PROCEDURE 1. In the Symbols Inspector, open the Other section. Image files can be inserted on all three layers. 2. Click the Image File button to select the Draw tool.
Working with symbols Adding symbols to the score Using layout symbols Layout symbols and texts are inserted on the layout layer. When you are editing a layout containing several tracks, you can have inserted layout symbols and texts automatically copied to any combination of tracks in the layout. You decide which staves should display layout symbols and texts by ticking their “L” column in the Score Settings dialog, on the Layout page.
Working with symbols Selecting symbols Selecting symbols Almost all symbols can be selected by clicking on them. For symbols that have a length or size, one or more handles appear. A selected crescendo An exception to this are the slurs and ties which can be selected by clicking on the end points or by drawing a selection rectangle. Using the lock layers Sometimes it can be very hard to click on a symbol or other object in the score without accidentally selecting other symbols nearby.
Working with symbols Moving and duplicating symbols A checkmark for an object type means it belongs to that layer. If no checkmark is shown, you can select the object type from the pop-up menu to move it to that layer. Locking a layer To “lock” a layer, click on its lock layer button. In this figure, layer 2 is locked. Event types assigned to layer 2 cannot be selected, moved, or deleted. Visual indication of the layers Objects belonging to locked note layers are “grayed out” in the score.
Working with symbols Moving and duplicating symbols There are two features to help you position symbols (and other score objects) correctly: the rulers and the Position Info window. RELATED LINKS Graphic moving of notes on page 1203 The rulers Unlike other editors, the Score Editor does not have a meter/time position-based ruler. Instead, its rulers are “graphical”, i. e. they indicate the actual x-y position of objects (with “zero” at the upper left corner).
Working with symbols Moving and duplicating symbols When no objects or several objects are selected, these values show the current horizontal and vertical position of the pointer. When a single object is selected, you can click on these values and type in a new position for the object. dX, dY When you are moving an object, these values indicate the horizontal and vertical distance you have moved it. You can click and type in values to move the object(s) by the specified distances. Sel. Staff If “Abs.
Working with symbols Moving and duplicating symbols Moving and duplicating with the bar handles This function allows you to move or copy the contents of a whole bar to one or several other bars. You can select which elements in the bar will be included in the operation. PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that the filter bar is visible. If the filter bar is not visible, click the “Set up Window Layout” button on the toolbar and activate the Filters option. 2.
Working with symbols Changing length, size, and shape The actual positions of notes are used as a basis for this operation – not the displayed positions. If you copy the note symbols from the first bar to the second bar… …only symbols that find corresponding note positions in the second bar are copied. • If you activated other types of symbols, these are simply moved to the same graphical position in the “target” bar.
Working with symbols Changing length, size, and shape 2. Drag one of the handles. You may be restricted to vertically or horizontally only, depending on the type of symbol. IMPORTANT In the Preferences dialog (Scores–Editing page), there is a preference called “Keep Crescendo Symbols Horizontal”. If this option is activated, crescendo and diminuendo symbols are never slanted. Resizing note symbols and dynamics PROCEDURE 1. Right-click on a dynamic or note symbol. 2.
Working with symbols Deleting symbols In other words, the end point of the slur/tie keeps its relative distance to that note when the note is moved with the Layout tool or when the measure width is adjusted. • By holding down Ctrl/Cmd and dragging the end points of a slur or tie, it can be detached from the notes it belonged to. NOTE To restore the default shape of a symbol, right-click on it and select “Default position” from the context menu.
Working with symbols Symbol details IMPORTANT Note symbols like staccato and accents can only be aligned horizontally. The “Dynamics” option is a special function for aligning dynamic symbols. RELATED LINKS Aligning dynamics on page 1237 Symbol details This section further describes some of the symbol sections. The Quick Staff Setup Section This section combines the basic settings for Display Quantize, staff mode, as well as staff presets for quick access.
Working with symbols Symbol details Clefs You can insert a clef symbol anywhere in the score. This has an effect on the notes, just as the first clef on the staff has. And just as with the first clef, the type is selected from the Edit Clef dialog that appears when you select the Clef symbol and click in the Score. When you double-click on an existing clef, the Edit Clef dialog appears again, allowing you to change the type. When you right-click on a clef, you can change the type from the context menu.
Working with symbols Symbol details • In the Line/Trill section you can find a line symbol which allows you to create the following type of change in dynamics: Crescendo and diminuendo (decrescendo) In the Dynamics section, there are three kinds of crescendo symbols: regular crescendo, regular diminuendo and a “double” crescendo (diminuendo–crescendo). • To insert a crescendo (<) or diminuendo (>), select the corresponding symbol from the section and drag from left to right.
Working with symbols Symbol details RELATED LINKS Alignment on page 1234 The Line/Trill Section Octave Symbols The octave symbols (8va and 15va) act as a “local display transpose” – they shift the display of the score one/two octaves down. • By dragging the end of the dotted line, you can specify exactly which notes are affected by the octave symbol. Only notes beneath the dotted line are display transposed.
Working with symbols Symbol details RELATED LINKS Working with text on page 1251 Inserting chord symbols on page 1246 Pedal down and up symbols When you insert a Pedal down or up symbol, you also insert an actual MIDI event (damper pedal, control change 64) at that position. Similarly, inserting or recording a damper pedal event in another editor displays a pedal down/up symbol in the score.
Working with symbols Symbol details elements, i. e. they do not insert any note data into the track. They do not affect MIDI playback! You can set the desired symbol font size directly in the Font Size field. The Form Symbols Section Rehearsal marks The following types of rehearsal marks are available: numbers and letters. When you place the first of these in the score, it is labeled 1 or A (depending on which you choose), the second is then automatically labeled 2 or B, the next 3 or C, etc.
Working with symbols Symbol details Endings There are two types of endings, closed (“1”) and open (“2”). Both can be stretched to any length or height by dragging the handles. You can also double-click or right-click the existing number and enter any text you like. You can insert endings in all layers. Which one to choose depends on the score; while it is handy to insert endings once and for all as Project symbols, this does not allow you to make individual adjustments for the different parts.
Working with symbols Symbol details 2. Open the Functions pop-up menu and select the desired zoom factor from the View submenu. Often you want to work at a reasonably high zoom factor when drawing and editing symbols. 3. Use the tools and functions to draw a symbol. The available tools are listed in the table below. When you are finished, you can close the editor and insert the symbol into the score, or you can create more symbols: 4. Select “New Symbol” from the Functions pop-up menu.
Working with symbols Symbol details Rectangle Creates a rectangle. You can fill this with the Fill button if needed. Polygon Creates a polygon – click where each corner of the polygon should be and close the figure by clicking outside the drawing area. Circle Creates a circle. You can fill this with the Fill button if needed. Ellipse Creates an ellipse. You can fill this with the Fill button if needed. Arc Creates an arc. Text Allows you to insert text objects.
Working with symbols Symbol details The Note Linked pop-up menu lets you create symbols linked to note positions. This affects the whole symbol, not a selected graphic object: Not Linked The symbol is not linked to notes. Linked/Left The symbol is linked to a note, appearing to the left of the note. Linked/Center The symbol is linked and centered to a note. Linked/Behind The symbol is linked to a note, appearing to the right of the note.
Working with symbols Symbol details Draw – Group Groups the selected objects so that they are treated as one. Draw – Ungroup Ungroups the selected group. Draw – Bring To Front/Send To Back These items let you arrange the objects by moving them to the front or the back. Align – Left/Right/Top/Bottom/Center Vertically/Center Horizontally Aligns the selected objects to each other. Display Sets the zoom factor for the drawing area.
Working with chords About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to enter chord symbols manually and automatically using the “Make Chord Symbols” feature. • Which settings can be made for chord symbols. Inserting chord symbols To insert chord symbols in the score, you can insert them manually by using the Chord Symbol button in the Inspector. You can also let Cubase analyze an existing recording and create the chord symbols.
Working with chords Inserting chord symbols Again, this can be done by typing or by using the pop-up menu. However, there are some special display options which you can only get by typing (see the table below). You might also want to add some text here (such as “no third”). You can also select the basic tensions from the pop-up menu, and then add special options by typing. 6. If you want to have a special bass note (e. g.
Working with chords Inserting chord symbols 2. If you like, make display settings for the chords. These settings are available in the Score Settings dialog, on the Project page (Chord Symbols subpage). You can change all these settings after you inserted the chords as well. 3. Select the notes for which you want chord symbols to be created. If you want chord symbols to be created for all chords on the track, use the Select All function on the Edit menu. 4.
Working with chords Global chord settings The Current Chord Display Cubase features a handy chord recognition function that helps you identify chords in the Score Editor note display. To find out which chord is formed by simultaneously played notes, place the project cursor over the notes. All notes “touched” by the project cursor are analyzed and the Current Chord Display in the status line shows you which chord the notes form.
Working with chords Global chord settings • If you want to scale a staff by using the Size setting on the Options tab of the Staff page in the Score Settings dialog and want the chords to be scaled accordingly, activate “Scale Chords”. • If you want the chord symbols to be affected by the Display Transpose setting on the Staff page of the Score Settings dialog, activate “Use Display Transpose”.
Working with text About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • Which different types of text are available. • How to enter and edit text. • How to set font, size, and style. • How to enter lyrics. Adding and editing text symbols This section describes the general procedure for adding and editing text symbols. There are several different types of text symbols, but the basic procedures are the same (except for block text symbols and page text symbols).
Working with text Adding and editing text symbols 6. Enter the text in the text box that appears. You can use Backspace to delete letters, and move the cursor with the Left Arrow/Right Arrow keys. 7. When you are done, press Return. The text appears. You can move, duplicate or delete it as with any symbol.
Working with text Adding and editing text symbols • The Melisma Style pop-up menu is where you specify whether the line is solid or dotted. • The Melisma End pop-up menu allows you to choose whether the end of the line is plain, has an arrow, or forms a “bracket” up or down. Making space Dragging staves is a way to edit distances within staves or between grand staves. Auto Layout makes the program “go through“ the score and makes adjustments to measure widths, staff distances, etc.
Working with text Adding and editing text symbols Special style options Most of the options are common text style variations such as bold, italic, underline, etc. But there are also a few special style options: Frame Allows you to put the text in a rectangular (“Box”) or oval frame. Melisma options These determine the appearance of the “melisma line”. Positioning Allows you to select which side of the text block (left or right) is used for calculating its position.
Working with text Different types of text click Apply. You can also apply a text attribute set to a text block directly in the score by rightclicking it and selecting the set from the context menu. • If you select a text attribute set on the Text page when no text is selected in the score, the settings are used the next time you insert some text. NOTE After you have selected a set for a text block, there is a “link” between the text and the attribute set.
Working with text Different types of text Pasting text You can paste text (e. g. from another program) into a text symbol in the score. To do this, select the text symbol and right-click it. Then, select “Text From Clipboard” from the context menu. This option is also available on the Functions submenu of the Scores menu. Similarly, you can copy selected text by using the “Text To Clipboard” option from the context menu. Lyrics This type of text is inserted by selecting Lyrics in the Other symbol section.
Working with text Different types of text When entering words with several syllables you normally separate the syllables with a dash (-). By default, the dash signs are automatically centered between the syllables – if this is not what you want, activate the “Don’t Center Hyphens” option in the Score Settings dialog, on the Project–Notation Style subpage (Lyrics category).
Working with text Different types of text Moving lyrics If you want to move the lyrics up or down, for example to make room for a second verse, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Hold down Shift and double-click on the first word in the lyrics. All lyric “blocks” are selected. 2. Drag one of the lyric blocks up or down. All selected lyric blocks are moved accordingly.
Working with text Different types of text Settings Brings up the RTF Settings dialog. You can also open this by double-clicking the Block Text. Import Text Imports text from a text file or RTF file. The imported text replaces any text inserted at the position of the Block Text. Update Text Reloads the text from the file. Text From Clipboard Pastes the text from the clipboard into the Block Text. Text To Clipboard Copies the Block Text to the clipboard. Hide/Show Hides the inserted block text.
Working with text Different types of text Lay Text The Lay Text symbol allows you to insert layout text for multiple staves. This is available only on the layout layer. To hide or show the inserted text for different staves in the layout, deactivate or activate the “L” column for the corresponding tracks on the Layout page of the Score Settings dialog. The text appears in all staves for which you have activated the “L” column. This means that the text is tied to the bar and staff position.
Working with text Different types of text Text adjustment options Show on all Pages If this option is activated, the text is shown on all pages. The “Except First” checkbox allows you to exclude the very first page. Show on First Page If this option is selected, the text is only shown on the first page. Line This determines how the text is aligned. For example, if you place several texts on “Top/Left”, you can sort them by entering the desired number of lines.
Working with text Text functions When you select a text symbol and move the mouse pointer over the score, the pointer changes to a pencil, and you can enter text at the position you click on. RELATED LINKS Symbol details on page 1235 The Notepad tab and the Selection tab Below the text symbols and the Layer pop-up menu, you can find two tabs with large text entry fields. • Use the Notepad tab to enter longer text passages.
Working with text Text functions Right-clicking one of the fields opens a context menu with a number of options: • Select “Edit” to open the Custom Text Editor dialog. • Select “New” to add a new empty symbol to the Words section. • Select “Remove” to delete any unwanted symbols from the Words section. • Select “Open As Palette” to open the Words symbol palette.
Working with text Text functions In a multi-track layout, you can choose for which tracks the staff names are shown by clicking in the “N” column for each track. • You specify a long and short staff name in the Score Settings dialog, on the Staff page (Main tab). These are used if you do not use the “From Tracks” option on the Layout page of the Score Settings dialog. The long name is displayed for the first system only, and the short name for the following systems.
Working with text Text functions The options are “First Bar” (bar numbers shown for the first bar on each staff), “Off” (no bar numbers shown) and any number. Click in the State column and use the mouse wheel to select the desired option. 4. If you like, activate the “Show Range with Multi-Rests” option. If this option is activated, and you have a multi-rest, the bar number at the beginning of the multi-rest shows a range, indicating the length of the multi-rest. 5.
Working with text Text functions • Bar number offsets belong to the Project layer and are shown for all tracks and layouts. Settings for other fixed text elements You can make settings for virtually all text and numbers that appear in the score. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Score Settings dialog on the Project page and select the Font Settings subpage. 2. Select the Project Text tab. 3. Use the “Font For” pop-up menu to select a text type to make settings for. 4.
Working with layouts About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • What layouts are and what they contain. • How to create layouts. • How to use layouts for opening combinations of tracks. • How to apply, load, save and delete layouts. • How to import and export layouts. • An example of how layouts can be used. Background: Layouts Layouts can be viewed as “presets” containing settings for the layout layer: staff spacing, bar lines, layout symbols, etc.
Working with layouts Creating a layout NOTE Note that Project symbols, bar line types and bar number offsets are part of the Project layer, and appear in all layouts. RELATED LINKS The available symbols on page 1214 How layouts are stored Layouts are created automatically when you edit a single track or a combination of tracks. They are an integral part of the specific track combination, which means you do not have to save them separately.
Working with layouts Layout operations Opening the tracks in a layout To select another combination of tracks for editing, select the corresponding layout in the list. • You can keep the dialog open while you are editing, and use this function for selecting which tracks to edit.
Working with layouts Using layouts – an example Using layouts – an example The following text outlines the basic steps for extracting a musical part from a full score. PROCEDURE 1. Prepare the entire score, including all formatting. This might include inserting project layer block text for the score title, setting the bar line type, etc. 2. Open the Score Settings dialog on the Layout page and enter the desired name in the Name field (for example “Full Score”). 3. Close the Score Editor. 4.
Working with MusicXML (Cubase Pro only) Introduction MusicXML is a music notation format developed by Recordare LLC in 2000 based primarily on two academic music formats. It allows the representation of scores in the current symbolic representation of western music notation, used since the 17th century. With Cubase you can now import and export MusicXML files created with version 1.1.
Working with MusicXML (Cubase Pro only) Importing and exporting MusicXML files Advantages of MusicXML MIDI tracks hold MIDI notes and other MIDI data. A MIDI note in Cubase is only defined by its position, length, pitch and velocity. This is not enough to decide how the note will be displayed in a score. For a correct representation, Cubase also needs the following information: • Stem direction, beaming. • Expression marks (staccato, accent, ties and slurs).
Working with MusicXML (Cubase Pro only) Importing and exporting MusicXML files Parameter Export Import Voices Yes Up to four per staff Accidentals Yes Yes Ties Yes No Dots Yes No Stem Yes Yes Beams Yes No Grace Notes Yes Yes Rests Yes Yes Importing and exporting Layouts Parameter Export Import Page Size Yes No Page margins Yes Yes Page scaling Yes Yes Page breaks Yes No System breaks Yes Yes Distance between staves and Yes systems Yes Left/right Inset Yes No
Working with MusicXML (Cubase Pro only) Importing and exporting MusicXML files Importing and exporting Symbols Parameter Export Import Keys Yes Yes Clefs Yes Yes Time Signature Yes Yes Dynamics Yes Yes Ornaments Yes / incomplete Yes / incomplete Articulations Yes / incomplete Yes / incomplete Technicals Yes / incomplete Yes / incomplete Lyrics Yes Yes Chord Symbols Yes Yes Damper Pedal Yes Yes Dynamics Yes Yes Rehearsals Yes Yes Text Yes Yes Layout Text Yes N.A.
Working with MusicXML (Cubase Pro only) Importing and exporting MusicXML files Importing and exporting Formats Parameter Export Import Display Transpose Yes Yes Drum notation Yes Yes Short / long staff names Yes Yes Program changes Yes N.A. Music font Yes (if Jazz font) Yes Tablature (including String tunings) Yes Yes Importing MusicXML files PROCEDURE 1. Open the File menu and open the Import submenu. 2. On the submenu, select “MusicXML…”. 3.
Designing your score: additional techniques About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to change the staff size. • How to create multi-rests. • How to add and edit bar lines. • How to create upbeats. • How to set measure spacing and the number of bars across the page. • How to control staff and grand staff spacing. • How to use the Auto Layout dialog. • How to use the Reset Layout function. • How to break bar lines.
Designing your score: additional techniques Layout settings The track list The track list lists the tracks included in the layout and allows you to make the following settings: Brackets These two columns allow you to add braces or brackets, encompassing any number of staves in the layout. T This is relevant if the “Modern Time Sign.” option is activated to the right. In that case, you use this column to specify for which tracks the time signature is shown – see below.
Designing your score: additional techniques Staff size Multi-Rests Whenever more than one-bar rests occur, the program can replace these with a multi-rest symbol. This parameter allows you to set how many empty bars are “allowed” before Cubase collects them into a multi-rest. “Off” means “never”. RELATED LINKS Multiple rests on page 1281 Real Book If this option is activated, clef symbols are not set out at the beginning of each staff, only on the first staff on each page.
Designing your score: additional techniques Hiding/showing objects The values range from 25 % up to 250 % of the normal size. 4. Click Apply. For all tracks in a layout To set the staff size for all tracks in a layout, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Open the Score Settings and select the Layout page. 2. Change the Size parameter. The values range from 25 % up to 250 % of the normal size. 3. Click Apply. RESULT All staves now get the desired size.
Designing your score: additional techniques Hiding/showing objects Hiding To hide items, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Select all the items you want to hide. 2. Select “Hide/Show” from the Score menu or click the “H” (Hide) button on the extended toolbar. Notes can also be hidden by selecting them, clicking the “i” button on the extended toolbar and ticking the Hide Note checkbox in the Set Note Info dialog.
Designing your score: additional techniques Coloring notes The text is selected. 3. Press Backspace or Delete. The object appears. Undo is available if you change your mind. Showing all objects If you select “Hide/Show” from the Scores menu again, all hidden objects are displayed. • You can also use the Reset Layout function to permanently display hidden notes and objects.
Designing your score: additional techniques Multiple rests For example, a value of 2 means that three or more consecutive empty bars are displayed as a multi-rest. If you set this to “Off”, multi-rests are not used. 3. Click Apply and close the dialog. RESULT The multi-rests now appear in the score. Splitting multi-rests To divide one long multiple rest into several shorter ones, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the multi-rest symbol. The Split Multi-Rest dialog appears: 2.
Designing your score: additional techniques Editing existing bar lines • On the Spacings subpage of the dialog, you can adjust the height and width of multirest symbols. • On the Font Settings subpage, you can select a font for the multi-rest numbers (select “Multi-Rests” in the “Font For” pop-up menu and make the desired settings). Editing existing bar lines For each bar line, you can choose whether you want a regular, single bar line, a double bar line, a repeat sign, etc.: PROCEDURE 1.
Designing your score: additional techniques Creating upbeats To insert a time signature, select it in the “Time Signature” section in the Symbols Inspector and click in the Score with the Draw tool. 3. Enter the notes in the upbeat into the first bar. The first bar before making any adjustments 4. Double-click the time signature for the upbeat bar. The Edit Time Signature dialog appears. 5. Activate the “Pickup Bar” option and click OK.
Designing your score: additional techniques Setting the number of bars across the page Setting the number of bars across the page You can specify how many bars you want to display across the page. Automatically • When you open a new combination of tracks for editing, the number of bars across the page is determined by the “Default Number of Bars per Staff” setting in the Preferences dialog (Scores–Editing page). • In the Auto Layout dialog, you can set the maximum number of bars across the staff.
Designing your score: additional techniques Moving bar lines Before and after moving the third bar one staff down • To bring the bar back up to the previous staff, use the Glue tool to click the last bar line on the upper of the two staves. This in fact moves all measures in the lower staff to the upper staff. Moving bar lines The following operations can be made using the regular Object Selection tool or the Layout tool.
Designing your score: additional techniques Dragging staves The sizes of all measures are adjusted proportionally. Before and after dragging the first bar line on the first staff Making indents on several lines If you hold down Alt and drag the first or last bar line in a system, all following systems get the same indent. If you want all lines on all pages to be modified in the same way, hold down Alt and drag the appropriate bar line on the first system of the score.
Designing your score: additional techniques Dragging staves 2. Click just to the left of the first bar line and keep the mouse button pressed. The entire staff is selected. 3. Drag downwards until you have reached the desired distance between the staves and release the mouse button. Before… …and after dragging the upper system Setting the same distance between all grand staves PROCEDURE 1.
Designing your score: additional techniques Dragging staves Dragging apart the staves in a piano system. The new distance is set for the two staves. Setting the same distance between staves in several systems PROCEDURE 1. Hold down Alt and drag the desired staff as described above. 2. Release the mouse button. The corresponding staves in all following systems are moved accordingly. Moving one staff only You may want to move one staff without affecting any other staff in any way: PROCEDURE 1.
Designing your score: additional techniques Adding brackets and braces Moving staves to the previous page PROCEDURE 1. Make the staff at the top of the page the active staff. If any other staff is active, the “Move to Previous Page” option cannot be used. Also, the function does not work for the first staff on the first page. 2. Right-click the rectangle to the left of the staff, and select “Move to Previous Page” from the context menu.
Designing your score: additional techniques Displaying the Chord Symbols from the Chord Track Displaying the Chord Symbols from the Chord Track You can display the chord symbols from the chord track. Chord symbols can be viewed, edited, and printed out in Page Mode. PROCEDURE 1. To show the Chord Track symbols, open the Scores menu, and from the Advanced Layout submenu select “Show Chord Track”. On the Layout page of the Score Settings dialog you can specify which staff should display the chord track. 2.
Designing your score: additional techniques Auto Layout Move Bars This option looks at the active grand staff, and attempts to adjust the measure widths, so that all notes and symbols get as much room as possible. The number of bars on the staff is not affected. • You can perform this function for several staves in one go, by dragging a selection rectangle over their left edges, and then selecting Move Bars.
Designing your score: additional techniques Reset Layout Optimize All All of the above in one fell swoop. This procedure might take some time but usually yields great results. Other functions In the lower part of the dialog, the following options are available: Auto Space/Page Mode The higher the value, the more space is allowed for each element in the score (and thus, the fewer the bars across the page).
Designing your score: additional techniques Breaking bar lines 3. Click “This Staff” to clean up the active staff only, or on “All Staves” to clean up all staves in the score. Reset Layout Options Hidden Notes Makes all hidden notes permanently visible again. Hidden Makes all other hidden objects permanently visible again. Quantize Deletes all Display Quantize elements. Layout Tool Resets all positions of notes, clefs, slurs and ties altered using the Layout tool.
Designing your score: additional techniques Breaking bar lines Breaking bar lines in one grand staff PROCEDURE 1. Select the Erase tool. 2. Click a bar line connecting the two staves. Before and after splitting the bar lines between two staves. All bar lines between these two staves (except the first and last) are broken. To break the first or last bar line in a grand staff, you need to click directly on these.
Designing your score: additional techniques Breaking bar lines RELATED LINKS Adding brackets and braces on page 1290 1296
Scoring for drums About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to set up the drum map. • How to set up a staff for drum notes. • How to enter and edit drum notes. • How to use a single line drum staff. Background: Drum maps in the Score Editor When scoring for drums, you can assign a unique note head to each pitch.
Scoring for drums Setting up the drum map Use Score Drum Map on/off For the drum map settings to be used in the score, you need to activate the “Use Score Drum Map” option in the Score Settings dialog on the Staff page (Options tab). Setting up the drum map To set up the drum map, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Open the Score Editor for the drums track. This should be a MIDI track to which you have assigned a drum map. 2. Open the Score Settings dialog and select the Staff page. 3.
Scoring for drums Setting up the drum map Voice This allows you to make all notes with this pitch belong to a certain voice, so that they get a common rest handling and stem direction, for example. Using note head pairs Not only can you have different drum sounds displayed with different note heads, you can also display different note heads for different note values: PROCEDURE 1. Activate the “Use Head Pairs” checkbox. The “Head Symbol” column now shows two head symbols for each drum sound.
Scoring for drums Setting up a staff for drum scoring Editing the drum map in the score If you activate the “Edit in Scores” option in the Drum Map Setup dialog, you can change the settings for the score drum map directly in the score: • Transposing a note changes the display pitch of its drum sound – the actual note is not transposed. • Double-clicking a note allows you to make note head settings for that drum sound. • Using the “Move to Voice” function changes the voice assignment of the drum sound.
Scoring for drums Using “Single Line Drum Staff” NOTE If the drum map contains two notes with the same pitch (for example open and closed hihat), you can get the second note by holding Ctrl/Cmd. Using “Single Line Drum Staff” If this option is activated on the Options tab of the Staff page in the Score Settings dialog, there is only one line in the system. Furthermore, notes can only appear below the line, on the line and above the line. To decide which notes go where, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1.
Creating tablature About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to create tablature, automatically and manually. • How to control the appearance of the tablature notes. • How to edit tablature. Cubase is able to produce score in tablature format. This can be done automatically, by “converting” recorded MIDI information. You can also create a tablature staff from scratch and enter the notes “by hand”.
Creating tablature Creating tablature automatically 3. Activate “Tablature Mode”. 4. Select one of the predefined instruments from the pop-up menu. • If you are not using one of the predefined instruments, set the open tuning of each string using the value fields. You can create tablature for up to 12 strings. To disable a string, set it to Off, the lowest value. 5. If you want to use a capodaster, e. g. on the forth fret, enter the corresponding value in the Capo field.
Creating tablature Creating tablature manually 4. The notes are automatically placed on the right strings. For example if you played a “B” on the low E-string, it appears as a “7” on that string, not as a “2” on the A-string. Creating tablature manually To set up an empty system for inputting tablature, proceed as follows: PROCEDURE 1. Double-click on the clef symbol in the score to open the Edit Clef dialog. 2. Change the clef to the tablature symbol. 3.
Creating tablature Tablature number appearance Tablature number appearance In the Score Settings dialog on the Project–Font Settings subpage, you can find settings for the tablature numbers. In the “Font For” pop-up menu, select “Tablatures” and then select the desired font, size, and style for the number note heads. Editing Tablature can be edited like any other score. You can move notes, handle beaming, stem direction, etc.
Rhythmic Notation In Cubase you can display your score in rhythmic notation. This is useful if you want to focus on rhythmic information only. Rhythmic notation can also help you to create lead sheets. You can display your full score or selections of it in rhythmic notation. The smallest possible selection that you can show in rhythmic notation is a bar. Even if you only select one note, the display for the whole bar changes.
Rhythmic Notation Showing Rhythmic Notation RELATED LINKS Showing Rhythmic Notation on page 1307 Notation Style on page 1309 Showing Rhythmic Notation You can show regular notation as rhythmic notation. PREREQUISITE You have opened your score in Cubase and you have performed basic editing to make the score as legible as possible. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that you want to display as rhythmic notation. 2. Select Scores > Rhythmic Notation > Show Rhythmic Notation.
Rhythmic Notation Showing Regular Notation NOTE Rhythm bar indicators are not printed. RELATED LINKS Showing Rhythmic Notation on page 1307 Showing Regular Notation You can suspend rhythmic notation and show the regular notation again. PREREQUISITE Parts of your score are shown in rhythmic notation. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that you want to display as regular notation. 2. Select Scores > Rhythmic Notation > Show Regular Notation. RESULT The selected notation is displayed as regular notation.
Rhythmic Notation Showing Repeat Bar Signs RELATED LINKS Rhythm Bar Indicators on page 1307 Showing Rhythmic Notation on page 1307 Showing Regular Notation on page 1308 Showing Repeat Bar Signs You can show a repeat bar sign that replaces the regular or the rhythmic notation in one or more bars. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or more notes. 2. Select Scores > Rhythmic Notation > Show Bar Repeat Sign. RESULT All notes and rests are hidden from that bar and a repeat bar sign is shown instead.
Rhythmic Notation Notation Style Outlined Note Head Allows you to select a note head for whole notes and half notes. Display Ties Across Barlines If you activate this option, notes that are tied across barlines in regular notation are shown with a tie symbol in rhythmic notation.
The score and MIDI playback About this chapter In this chapter you will learn: • How to use the Arranger mode to have the playback follow the structure of the score. • How to use the “mapped” Dynamics symbols. NOTE Cubase Pro only: You can also play back articulations in the Score using the Expression Map and Note Expression functions.
The score and MIDI playback Working with mapped dynamics modifying the velocity values in percentages, by sending volume controller messages or by sending additional generic controllers. These methods can also be combined. RELATED LINKS Note Expression on page 823 Setting up the symbols You can make settings for the symbols in the Dynamics Mapping Setup dialog. On the left in the upper section, the available symbols are listed.
The score and MIDI playback Working with mapped dynamics PROCEDURE 1. Activate “Send Volume” in the lower section of the dialog, and select whether you want to use the MIDI controllers 7 or 11 or the VST 3 parameter Volume (if the instrument you are using is compatible with VST 3). 2. Set up a percentage value (positive or negative) in the Volume column to specify by how much the corresponding symbol will raise or reduce the current volume of a note.
The score and MIDI playback Working with mapped dynamics If you select “pp-ff”, the extreme Dynamics symbols (pppp, ppp, ffff, and fff) do not have an effect. If you select “pppp-ffff”, the whole dynamic range will be used. Using dynamics symbols in the Score Editor Once you have set up the dynamics as desired, you can use the symbols in the Score Editor.
Tips and Tricks Overview This chapter provides useful information about editing techniques and answers to a number of questions that might arise when you use the Score Editor. For more information about the functions referred to, please use the index and check the previous chapters. Useful editing techniques Use this section to find out more about some editing techniques that help you to use the score functions more efficiently.
Tips and Tricks Useful editing techniques Polyphonic voicing If you are working on a full score with more than one instrument in one staff (2 flutes, 2 trumpets, etc.), you should use polyphonic voices. And even if both instruments play the same notes, you should insert notes for both instruments (you can mute the notes of the second voice if playback is an issue). If you do this, it is much easier to extract single parts later by using the “Extract Voices” command.
Tips and Tricks Useful editing techniques Zero system lines Having no system lines at all might seem like a stupid idea to start with. But this option allows you to create chord sheets really quickly.
Tips and Tricks Useful editing techniques Setting the distance between staves in a piano score Drag the first bass staff on the first page. This copies the spacing to all staves. Please note that this can only be done in Page Mode.
Tips and Tricks Frequently asked questions Frequently asked questions In this section, you can find some answers to questions concerning adding and editing of notes as well as the handling of symbols and layouts. I enter a note with one value and it is shown as a note with another value. Set the Rests value for Display Quantize to a smaller note value. Try deactivating Auto Quantize, especially if you do not have any triplets or triplets only. Notes are not displayed at the correct positions.
Tips and Tricks Frequently asked questions Even though I’ve tried the above, notes are not tied as I want them. The way notes are tied in Cubase follows basic notation rules. You may need to make exceptions to these rules, by using the Cut Notes tool. I have an unnecessarily large amount of rests. Especially with polyphonic voicing, superfluous rests may be created. Try deactivating rests for one or more voices.
Tips and Tricks Frequently asked questions I can’t select an object on the screen, or I can’t select an object without selecting another object. Drag a selection rectangle around the objects. Then hold down Shift and deselect all the objects you do not want included, by clicking on them. You should also check out the lock layer function. Symbols have disappeared. Are they layout symbols? Then maybe they belong to another layout than the one you are editing now.
Tips and Tricks If you wish you had a faster computer There is no pause after the note although there should be one. Either the note is too long (use Clean Lengths or change the current note’s length), or Rests Display Quantize is set to too high a value. Open the Score Settings, select the Staff page and lower the value. The note has an accidental when it shouldn’t, or it doesn’t when it should.
Index A Accelerando 1197 Accents Above stems 1216 Accidentals About 1188 Distance from note 1190 ACID® loops 489 Acoustic feedback Score Editor 1150 Activate Project 97 Activate Read/Write for all tracks 624 Activate tempo track 924 Active TrackVersion 183 Adapt (Display Quantize) 1166 ADAT Lightpipe 972 Add Track dialog 164 Adding chords 844, 847 AES/SPDIF Digital Audio 972 AES17 Meters 390 AIFC files Exporting 960 AIFF files Exporting 960 Algorithms Limitations 449 Time stretching 447 Aligning Dynamics 1
Index Record File Format 245 Record Folder 246 Record Modes 247 Recovering 250 Recovering recordings 249 Undo 249 With Effects 248 Audio regions About 196 Audio tracks 106 Audition chords 849 Audition through MIDI Inserts/Sends 1089 Auditioning Audio events 199 Audio parts 199 Using key commands 555 Auto Disable Talkback Mode 1105 Auto fades Global settings 284 Track settings 285 Auto layout About 1291 Don’t hide first staff 1097 Hiding empty staves 1292 Moving bars 1292 Moving staves 1292 Auto Monitoring
Index Bounce MIDI 710 Bounce Selection 195 Box symbol 1239 Braces 1290 Showing in Edit Mode 1097 Bracket heads 1190 Brackets 1290 Brillenbass 1196, 1196 Broadcast Wave files Exporting 959 Broadcast Wave Files Embedded information 1096 Buffer Settings 1068 Bulk Dumps 805 Busses Adding 34 Child busses 34 Bypass VST MultiPanner 612 C Cadence mode Chord Assistant 845 Complexity filters 845 Channel linking 335 Channel names Searching 327 Channel overview MixConsole 317 Channel racks 330, 346 EQ 352 Filters 350
Index Chords Changing pitch 740 Changing voicing 740 Editing 740 Inserting 742 Cleanup 1027 Clefs Editing 1160 Inserting 1159 Moving 1160 Selecting automatically 1127 Setting initial 1123 Clip editing Pool 556 Clock sources 972 Coloring Note events 718 Tracks 167 Colorize Only Folder Track Controls 1087 Colorize Track Controls 1087 Colors Assigning to MIDI notes 1193 Customizing 1053 Preferences 1073 Colors for Additional Meanings Scores 1097 Common notes mode Chord Assistant 845 Complexity filters 845 Com
Index Cue Sends 389 Adjusting the volume 389 Cue mix 388 Cursor Width 1100 Custom Chord Symbols 1085 Customizing Appearance 1052 Colors 1053 Info line 1051 Inspector 1051 Toolbars 1051 Transport panel 1051 Cut Notes tool 1202 Cut tool Score Editor 1156 Cutflag events 1202 Cutting Notes in score 1152 Cycle Follows Range Selection 1074 Cycle markers About 306 Editing with tools 307 Using 306 Zooming 307 Cycle recording 241 D Damper pedal symbols 1239 Data on Folder Tracks Showing 1086 DC Offset Removing 433
Index E Edge Hints Using 1087 Edit History dialog 87 Editing events Group editing 211 Editor Content Follows Event Selection 1083 Editor Inspector Opening 61 Effect parameters Quick Controls 657 Effect Plug-in Presets Loading 591 Effects About 396 Comparing settings 416 Control panel 415 Copying presets 420 Dithering 414 Exporting plug-in information files 423 External effects 415 Extracting insert effect settings from track presets 421 Insert effects 396, 399 Managing plug-ins 422 Multi-channel configurat
Index Channel selection 954 Channel selection section 954 Cycle Marker Selection 955 Defining Naming Schemes 957 Export Cycle Marker(s) 955 File Format section 958 File Location section 955 Flac files 964 Import Into Project section 966 MP3 files 961 Naming Scheme dialog 956 Ogg Vorbis files 964 Post Process section 967 Real-Time Export 965 Wave 64 files 964 Wave files 959 Windows Media Audio files 961 Exporting MIDI files 1036 OMF 1033 Profiles 1065 Score as image files 1130 Selected tracks 1040 Track arc
Index Gaps Fill options 630 Gate Strip module 355 Generic remote device 667 Global track controls 52 Filter Track Types 53 Find Tracks 53 Global workspaces 1047 Gluing Events 207 Staves 1285 Grace notes Converting to normal 1207 Creating manually 1206 Order of 1317 Settings 1206 Grid Overlay Intensity 1083 Groove quantizing 264 Group channel tracks 148 Group channels Adding insert effects 401 Routing 349 Setting up 36 Group Channels - Mute Sources as well 1102 Group editing 211 Grouping Removing in score 1
Index Talkback channel 386 Using while scrubbing 1101 Inspector About 60 Assigning Quick Controls 658 Editor Inspector 61 Expression maps 814 Settings Dialog 63 Synchronizing track and channel visibility 67 Track Inspector 61 Track Visibility 65 Visibility 65 Zones Visibility 67 Inspector Sections Showing/Hiding 63 Instrument Freeze 644 Instrument Presets Loading 591 Instrument tracks 113 Instruments Display Transpose 1129 Instruments use Automation Read All and Write All 1102 Interpolate Audio Waveforms 1
Index List Editor 793 Editing events 804, 804 Editing operations 803 Event display 802 Event list 800 Filters bar 800 Inserting events 803 Showing/Hiding events 800 Status line 799 Toolbar 794 Value display 802 Listen MixConsole 341 Live transform Chord track 855 Loading Multi-Track Presets 192 Locate When Clicked in Empty Space 1100 Locators 228 Setting 229 Lock Transpose track 302 Lock Event Attributes 212, 1074 Lock layers 1227 Lock Punch Points to Locators 232 Lock Record 257 Logical Editor About 886 A
Index Viewing results 570 Volume databases 595 VST Sound node 567 Window 565 Melisma lines 1252 Merge Clipboard (function) 428 Merge MIDI in Loop 706 Metadata Author Name 1089 Company Name 1089 Meter peak options 344 Hold forever 344 Hold peaks 344 Meter position options 344 Input 344 Post-Fader 344 Post-Panner 344 Meter section MixConsole 390, 391 Metering About 390 Meters AES17 390 Alignment level 390 Peak meter display 390 RMS display 390 Scale standards 390 Settings 344 Meters’ Fallback 1094 Meters’ Pe
Index MIDI Thru Active 1089 Monitoring 245 MIDI timecode Destinations 977 MIDI track delay MIDI track parameters 680 MIDI track parameters 680 MIDI tracks 121 Expression Maps 742 Routing to device 806 MIDI volume MIDI track parameters 680 Missing ports Re-routing 98 MixConsole 317 Assigning Quick Control parameters 368, 657 Channel linking 332 Channel overview 317 Channel racks 330 Channel selector 323 Channel types 328 Creating VCA faders 372 Display line 334 EQ presets 354 Equalizer curve 317 Fader secti
Index Setting values 766 Setting velocity values 721 Setting with Snap 721 Splitting 739, 768 Transposing 737, 787 Note Expression About 823 Channel rotation 829 Editing data 831 Key Editor 743 MIDI controllers 824, 825 Overdubbing 830 Recording 829 Recording via MIDI 831 VST 3 controllers 823 Note Info Showing 1097 Note Layer Scores 1100 Note layer symbols 1210 About 1210 Adding 1216 Note lengths Changing 767 Changing in Score Editor 1154 Note stems Flipping the direction 768 Note symbols Adding 1216 Resi
Index Playback Toggle triggers Local Preview 1100 Plug-in delay compensation 398 Plug-in Editors Always on Top 1104 Plug-in information 421 Exporting 423 Managing plug-ins 422 Plug-in Manager 652 Collections 653 Window 653 Plug-in panels Quick Controls 657 Plug-in processing Suspending 398 Plug-ins Applying 436 Installing 652 Managing 652 Surround 599 Poly Pressure events 752 Polyphonic voicing About 1172 Automatic 1182 Crossed voicings 1181 Display Quantize 1180 Entering notes 1177 Identifying voices for
Index Lower zone 68, 70, 71, 71, 72 Overview 45 Overview line 56 Project zone 46 Right zone 75 Ruler 54 Snap 84 Snap to zero crossings 85 Status line 55 Toolbar 47 Toolbox 50 Track list 51 Track Visibility 65 Visibility 65 Zones 46 Zones Visibility 67 Zoom presets 82 Zoom submenu 82 Zooming 81 Project workspaces 1047 Project zone 46 Event display 52 Global track controls 52 Ruler 54 Toolbar 47 Track list 51 Projects About project files 92 About template files 92 Activating 97 Back up 100 Creating new 89, 9
Index With Effects 248 Recovering recordings Audio 249 MIDI 256 ReCycle files 1031 Reducing the project size Pool 560 Reference file Pool 544 Reference Level 1105 Regions About 197 Creating with Detect Silence 442 Event or Range as Region 197 Events from Regions 197 Rehearsal Marks 1240 Remote control Key commands 666 Setting up 663 Writing automation 665 Remote Controllers Connecting with Quick Controls 648, 660 Remove Empty Tracks 167 Remove Regions/Hitpoints on all Offline Processes 1076 Remove Selected
Index Score 1168, 1285 Adding notes 1144 Bows 1190 Composite signatures 1124 Creating chord symbols 1247 Deleting notes 1161 Display markers 1270 Ending symbols 1241 Explode function 1137, 1178 Extended toolbar 1119 Force screen redraw 1132 Gluing notes 1155 Grouping signatures 1195 Hiding stems 1190 Lay text 1260 Layers 1210 Layout layer symbols 1211 Lock (L) button 1150 Locking layers 1227 Merging staves 1182 No Flag/Beam 1190 No Overlap 1167 Notes to MIDI 1138 Offsetting bar numbers 1265 Page number ind
Index Effect inputs 398 Inserts rack 352 Trigger signals 413 Side-chain inputs 398 Signature track 156 Silence 434 Inserting 218 Simple Crossfade Editor 280 Single Voice Follow Chord Track 856 Slices About 478 Slider Mode 1078 Slurs Adding 1218 Bezier slurs 1219 Direction 1233 Inserting 1219 Shape 1233 Smallest Track Height To Show Data 1083 Smallest Track Height To Show Name 1083 Snap About 84 Snap MIDI Parts to Bars 1096 Snap modes 1150 Snap point Setting 84 Snap Point To Cursor 84 Snap Slurs when draggi
Index Synchronization About 969 Operation (Sync mode) 979 Setting up 973 Speed references 972 Timecode 970 Timecode preferences 974 Timecode source 974 Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track Selection 1104 Synchronizing Track Data Follow Chord Track 857 Sys text 1260 SysEx Changing settings 806 Editing values 808 Messages 805 T Tablature Automatic creation 1302 Capo 1302 Clef 1304 Editing 1305 Manual creation 1304 MIDI channels 1303 Tap Tempo 932 Template projects 92 Templates Renaming 93 Workspac
Index To Punch Fill options 629 To Start Fill options 629 Toggle Time Base 922 Tool modifier keys 1013, 1082 Toolbar Project window 47 Score Editor 757 Toolbox Project window 50 Track archives Exporting 1040 Importing 1040 Track Area Width 1087 Track Controls Settings 104 Track Folding 174 Track Height 170 Track Inspector Opening 61 Track list About 51 Dividing 51 Track Name Width 1087 Track Pictures 168 Browser 169 Showing 168 Track Presets About 187 Applying 191 Audio 188 creating 190 Creating 190 Extrac
Index Recording 303 Transposing 301 Transposing Instruments 1129 MIDI notes 1153 Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted 1076 Trills Creating 1220 Trim Automation 627 Trim tool Changing event lengths 739 Tuplets 1207 Display options 1209 Group symbols 1238 N-Tuplets 1208 Quantizing 265 Type of New Tempo Points 924 U Undo Edit history 87 Maximum undo steps 88 Undoing Recording Audio 249 Unlock Layout when editing single parts 1097 Upbeats 1283 Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned 1083 Use Up/Down Naviga
Index VST Instruments Right zone 76 VST MultiPanner About 602 Constant power 613 VST plug-ins Installing 652 VST Presets Loading 191 VST System Link About 980 Activating 984 Connections 981 Latency 982 MIDI 987 Putting computers online 985 Requirements 980 Setting up sync 981 Settings 983 Left zone 59 Lower zone 68 MixConsole 323 Project zone 46 Right zone 75 Zones Visibility Inspector 67 Zoom Project window 81 Zoom history Project window 84 Zoom presets Project window 82 Zoom Tool Standard Mode - Horizon
